PK61 


VANDERBILT  ORIENTAL  SERIES 

VOLUME  VI. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN 
LEXICON  AND  TEXTS 

TOLMAN 


A M j:  i 1\  J.  GAN  BOOK  COMPANY 


j 


Division  FK6I2I 

Section  .T  652- 


( 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.org/details/ancientpersianle00tolm_0 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 
AND  TEXTS 


VANDERBILT  UNIVERSITY  STUDIES 

FOUNDED  BY 

AUGUSTUS  H.  ROBINSON 


American'  Agent Lemcke  and  Buechner,  Neav  York  City 


Foreign  Agent Otto  Harrassowitz,  Quebstrasse,  14.  Leiezig 


A copy,  in  paper  binding,  of  this  number  of  the  series  "will  be  for- 
warded on  receipt  of  a Postal  Order  for  the  price  (one  dollar)  anywhere 
within  the  limits  of  the  Universal  Postal  Union  upon  application  to  the 
agents  or  to  Vanderbilt  University. 


/ 


NASHVILLE,  TENNESSEE 
PUBLISHED  BY  VANDERBILT  UNIVERSITY 
1908 


THE  VANDERBILT  ORIENTAL  SERIES 


EDITED  BY 


Herbert  Cushing  Tol.man  and  James  Henry  Stevenson 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


AND  THE  TEXTS  OF  THE  ACHAEMENIDAN 
INSCRIPTIONS  TRANSLITERATED  AND 
TRANSLATED  WITH  SPECIAL  REFERENCE 
TO  THEIR  RECENT  RE-EXAMINATION  , 


HERBERT  CUSHING  TOLMAN 

PROFESSOR  OF  THE  GREEK  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE 


NEW  YORK  : CINCINNATI  : CHICAGO 

AMERICAN  BOOK  COMPANY 


Copyright,  1908 

BY 

H.  C.  Tolman 


TO 

MY  FORMER  PUPILS 


IN  SANSKRIT  AND  AVESTAN 
YALE  AND  VANDERBILT 
1890-1908 


THE  VANDERBILT  ORIENTAL  SERIES 

EDITED  BY  PROFESSORS 

Herbert  Cushing  Tolmax,  Ph.D.,  D.D., 

AND 

James  Henry  Stevenson,  Ph.D. 

“The  Vanderbilt  Oriental  Series  deserves  a word  of  welcome  as  an  American 
undertaking." — The  Nation . 

Vol.  I.  Herodotus  and  the  Empires  of  the  East.  Based 
on  Nikel’s  Herodot  und  die  Keilschriftforsckung.  By  the 
editors.  Price,  §1. 

“A  careful  assembling  of  the  valuable  references  in  Herodotus,  and  a 
comparison  of  the  native  sources.” — Prof.  Rogers,  in  History  of  Babylonia 
and  Assyria,  Vol.  I.,  p.  2Gb. 

Vol.  II.  Index  to  the  Chandogya  Upanishad.  By  Charles 
Edgar  Little,  Ph.D.  Price,  $1. 

“The  plan  as  conceived  is  well  executed.” — The  Nation. 

You.  III.  Assyrian  and  Babydonian  Contracts  (with  Ara- 
maic Reference  Motes)  Transcribed  from  the  Originals  in  the 
British  Museum,  with  Transliteration  and  Translation,  by  J. 
H.  Stevenson.  Price,  $2.50. 

“ Your  professional  colleagues  ought  to  be  very  pleased  with  the  whole 
book.” — E.  A.  Wallis  Budge,  British  Museum. 

“ Dr.  Stevenson’s  book  forms  a most  useful  contribution  to  the  study  of 
Semitic  epigraphy.” — Luzac’s  Oriental  List. 

Yol.  IV.  Homeric  Life.  By  Prof.  Edmund  Weissenborn. 
Translated  by  Gilbert  Campbell  Scoggin,  Ph.D.,  and  Charles 
Gray  Burkitt,  M.A.  Price,  $1. 

“The  American  edition  is  especially  valuable  . . . and  will  prove 

a valuable  help  to  every  student  of  Homer.”— The  Outlook. 

Vol.  V.  Mycenaean  Troy.  Based  on  Dorpf eld’s  Excavations 
in  the  Sixth  of  the  Mine  Buried  Cities  at  Hissarlik.  By  H. 
C.  Tolrnan  and  G.  C.  Scoggin.  Price,  $1. 

“Laymen  and  even,  scholars  will  be  thankful  for  this  concise  presenta- 
tion. The  task  has  been  fairly  and  successfully  performed.” — Prof.  Ru- 
fus B.  Richardson,  in  the  Independent. 

“A  satisfactory  description  of  the  results  of  Drs.  Schliemann  and  Dorp- 
feld’s  excavations.” — Classical  Review,  England. 

Vol.  VI.  Ancient  Persian  Lexicon.  With  texts  of  the 
Achaemenidan  Inscriptions  Transliterated  and  Translated. 
By  H.  C.  Tolrnan.  Price,  $1.25. 

Other  volumes  in  the  series  are  in  preparation. 

NEW  YORK  : CINCINNATI  : CHICAGO 

AMEKICAX  BOOK  COMPANY. 


PREFACE 


Merivale  describes  the  Monumentum  Ancyranum  as  “a  truly 
imperial  work  and  probably  unique  in  its  kind,”  but  the 
record  of  the  Great  Darius  on  the  Behistau  Rock  is  just  as 
“unique.”  The  text  of  this  inscription  has  been  made  more 
certain  by  the  partial  reexamination  of  Jackson  (JAOS,  24  and 
27  = Persia  Past  and  Present)  and  the  new  collation  of  King 
and  Thompson  (British  Museum,  1907;  discussed  at  date  of 
present  writing  by 'Weissbach,  ZDMG,  61;  Hoffmann-Kutschke, 
Phil.  Nov.  Ill;  Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud.  1;  Bartholomae,  WZKM,  22). 
Their  work  has  solved  many  old  problems  and  at  the  same 
time  presents  new  ones.  I confess  that  I am  not  in  sympathy 
with  those  who  are  bold  enough  to  style  the  KT  readings  Fehle) •, 
wherever  they  conflict  with  previous  emendations  which  were 
attractive  and  ingenious.  The  two  English  scholars  have  had 
years  of  experience  in  copying  cuneiform  tablets  and  in  their 
long  task  were  doubtless  able  to  catch  the  most  favorable  effects 
of  light  and  shadow  upon  the  stone.  In  fact  it  is  doubtful  if 
another  examination  of  the  rock  would  now  add  very  materially 
to  our  accurate  knowledge  of  the  text.  Our  chief  help  in  the 
future  may  come  from  the  discovery  of  some  of  the  duplicate 
copies,  written  on  bricks  (?  halat)  and  leather  (?  SU,  Jensen), 
which  Darius  declares  he  sent  into  all  lands,  mene  (det)  tuppi-me 
+ + + + tinni  (m)taiyaus  marrita  atima  (m)u  muggiya  (m)tassu- 
tum-pe  sapis  (Elam.  Bh.  1.  = Pers.  Bh.  iv,  11.  88-92),  a fragment 
of  which  (BE,  3627  = Bh.  11.  55-58;  69-72)  has  already  been 
found  by  Koldewey.  Again  in  the  Persepolitan  Inscriptions  we 
now  have  Stolze’s  photographs  supplemented  by  Jackson’s  ex- 
amination of  the  original  (JAOS,  27).  For  Xerx.  Van  cf.  Leh- 
mann, SBAW,  1900,  625;  for  Dar.  Suez  cf.  Daressy,  Revision 
des  Textes  de  la  Stele  de  Chalovf  (Recueil  de  Travaux , Maspero, 
11,  160-71);  for  Elvend  Inscriptions  cf.  de  Morgan,  Mission 
scientifique  en  Perse , 2,  137;  for  Art.  Hamadan  cf.  Tolman,  Re- 
examination of  Moldings  of  Columns  from  Ecbatana , PAPA,  36, 
32;  for  Kerman  Inscr.  cf.  Jackson,  JAOS,  27,  190.  How  accu- 
rately and  painstakingly  Rawlinson  accomplished  his  great  task 
at  Behistan  is  newly  attested  by  the  recent  reexaminations. 
Jackson  has  noted  that  this  patient  workman  inscribed  his  own 
name  below  the  inscription  he  had  copied,  and  certainly  if  any 

(vii) 


phrase  deserves  imperishable  record  on  the  Great  Rock  it  is  that 
of  UH.  C.  Rawlinson,  1844.”  It  is  quite  remarkable  also  what 
a number  of  conjectures  made  many  years  ago  by  Oppert  is 
now  confirmed. 

My  frequent  references  to  works  cited  will  show  my  obliga- 
tion to  modern  scholars.  Bartholomae’s  Altiranisches  Worter- 
buch  (with  his  Zum  Altiran.  Wb.  in  IF,  Beiheft  zum  XIX. 
Band)  has  been  my  constant  vade-mecum , as  it  is  of  all  Avestan 
scholars.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  speak  of  the  light  thrown 
on  the  ancient  language  through  the  investigations  in  Middle 
Persian,  New  Persian,  and  the  other  modern  dialects  by  Sale- 
mann  ( Mittelpersisch / G run  dr.  d.  iran.  PJiilol .),  Ilubschmann 
(Persische  Stud  ten  and  Etymologie  und  lautlehre  der  ossetischen 
Sprache),  Horn  ( Grundriss  der  neupersischen  Etymologie ),  Justi 
( Kurdische  Grammatik ),  Soein  ( Kurdisch / Grundr.  d.  Iran. 
Philol.),  Geiger  ( Afyanisch , Baludj  op.  cit .),  Gray  ( Indo- Iranian 
Phonology)  and  others.  The  importance  of  the  Turfan  MSS. 
material  (F.  W.  K.  Muller;  PLandschriftenreste  — aus  Turfan) 
was  not  overestimated  at  the  time  of  its  discovery,  and  its  bear- 
ing on  the  older  languages  is  being  constantly  brought  into 
greater  prominence.  I have  used  the  transliteration  of  the 
Estrangelo  script,  which  is  of  course  hardly  adapted  to  the 
character  of  the  language,  e.  g.  ’ud  for  ud  < uta;  murdan  for 
murdan,  cf . New  Pers.  murda;  gokhan  (Bartholomae),  not  gokhun 
(Muller);  ’usan  (Bartholomae),  not  ’osan  (Muller). 

The  results  of  their  Elamite  studies  put  forth  with  such  assur- 
ance by  Husing,  Jensen,  Bork,  and  others,  I have  used  perhaps 
Avith  too  great  caution.  We  are  forced  to  admit  that  our  knowl- 
edge of  this  language,  notwithstanding  our  richly  increased  ma- 
terial (Scheil,  Textes  elamites-semitigues , Textes  elamltea-anzan- 
ites ; Deleg.  en  Perse , 1900-1907),  is  still  very  inadequate,  and 
I feel  it  is  hazardous  to  base  our  interpretation  of  the  Persian 
on  a corresponding  Elamite  expression  which  is  not  absolutely 
certain. 

Professor  Weissbach  wrote  me  a few  months  ago  that  the 
second  Eteferung  of  his  Die  altpersischen  Keilinschriften  would 
soon  be  ready,  and  I regret  that  I have  been  unable  to  avail 
myself  of  it  during  the  preparation  of  my  manuscript.  I have, 
however,  held  back  the  sheets  that  I might  consult  it  before 
the  volume  went  to  press. 

Herbert  Cushing  Tolman. 

June  1,  1908. 

(viii) 


ABBREVIATIONS 


AF  = Arische  Forschungen 
Afy.  = Afyiin 

AJP  = American  Journal  of  Philology 

APAW  = Abhandlungen  der  koniglick-Preussiscken  Akademie 
der  Wissenschaften  (1904,  Handschriftenreste  in  Es- 
trangelo-Schrift  aus  Turfan,  F.  W.  K.  Miiller) 

Ai.  Gram.  = Altindische  Grammatik  (Wackernagel) 

Altiran.  Wb.  = Altiranisches  Worterbuck  (Bartholomae,  1904) 
Art.  = Artaxerxes 

Assyriol.  Bibl.  = Assyriologische  Bibliothek 

Av.  = Avesta  or  Avestan 

Av.  Gram.  = Avesta  Grammar  (Jackson) 

Bab.  = Babylonian 

BB  = Beitrage  zur  Kunde  der  indogermanischen  Sprachen 
_Bal.  = BalucI 

Benfey  = Die  persischen  Keilinschriften  (1847,  Benfey) 

Bk.  = Behistan 
Dar.  = Darius 

de  Morgan  = Mission  scientifique  en  Perse 

ed.  = recent  edition  or  editions 

Elam.  = Elamite 

Elv.  = Elvend 

GAy.  = Ga0a  Avesta 

Gil.  = Gllaki 

Grundr.2  = Grundriss  der  vergleichenden  Grammatik,  Zweite 
Bearbeitung  (Brugmann) 

Grundr.  = Grundriss  der  iranischen  Philologie  (Awestasprache 
und  Altpersisch,  Vol.  I,  Bartholomae) 

(ix) 


Grundr.  = Grundriss  der  neupersischen  Etymologie  (Horn) 
Ham.  = Hamadan 

Hdt.  = Herodotus  and  Empires  of  the  East  (Tolman  and  Stev- 
enson ) 

I.  E.  = Indo-European 

IF  = Indogermanische  Forschungen 

Ir.  En.  = Die  iranischen  Eigennamen  in  den  Achamenidenin- 
schriften  (Htising) 

Iran.  Namenbuch  = Iranisches  Namenbuch  (Justi) 

JAOS  = Journal  of  American  Oriental  Society 

Jn.  = Jackson,  who  made  in  1903  a partial  reexamination  of 
the  Bh.  rock  and  the  inscriptions  of  Persepolis 
(JAOS,’  24  and  27  = Persia  Past  and  Present) 

JR  AS  = Journal  of  Royal  Asiatic  Society 
Jud.  Pers.  = Judaic  Persian 
Kas  = KasanI 

Kossowicz  = Inscriptions  Palaeo-Persicae  (1872,  Kossowicz) 
Kr.  = Kerman 

KT  = King  and  Thompson;  The  Sculptures  and  Inscription  of 
Darius  the  Great  on  the  Rock  of  Behistun,  British 
Museum,  1907.  KT  have  newly  copied  the  Persian, 
Elamite,  and  Babylonian  texts 

Kurd.  = Kurdish 

KZ  = Zeitschrift  fur  vergleichende  Sprachforschung 
Middle  Pers.  = Middle  Persian 
New  Pers.  = New  Persian 
NR  = Naks-i-Rustam 

NS  = Neupersische  Schriftsprache  (Grundr.  d.  iran.  Philol., 
Horn) 

OP.  Insc.  = Old  Persian  Inscriptions  (Tolman ) 

Or.  Litt.  Ztg.  = Orientalistisehe  Litteratur-Zeitung 
Oss.  = Ossetic 

PAPA  = Proceedings  of  American  Philological  Association 

(x) 


Pers.  = Persepolis 

Pers.  Stud.  = Persische  Studien  (Hiibschmann) 

Phil.  Nov.  = Philologiae  Novitates 
Phi.  = Pahlavl 

PWb.  = Sanskrit- Worterbuch  (Bohtlingk  und  Roth) 

Rawlinson  = The  Persian  Cuneiform  Inscription  at  Behistun  (= 
JRAS,  Vols.  x,  xi;  1846,  1849) 

SA  = Die  Sprache  der  Afghanen  (Geiger) 

SB  = Die  Sprache  der  Balutschen  (Geiger) 

SBAW  = Sitzungsberichte  der  kdniglich-Preussischen  Akade- 
mie  der  Wissenschaften  (1904,  Handschriftenrestc 
aus  Turfan,  F.  W.  K.  Muller) 

SK  — Die  Sprache  der  Kurden  (Socin) 

Skt.  Gram.  = Sanskrit  Grammar  (Whitney) 

Spiegel  = Die  altpersischen  Keilinschriften.  2.  Auflage 
(Spiegel) 

Stolze  = Persepolis  (Stolze) 

Sus.  = Susa 
Sz.  = Suez. 

Turfan  MSS. , see  APAW 

Ydt.  Stud.  = Vanderbilt  University  Studies.  The  Behistan 
Inscription  of  King  Darius,  Translation  and  Critical 
Notes  to  the  Persian  Text  with  special  reference  to 
recent  Reexaminations  of  the  Rock,  March,  1908 
(Tolman) 

WB  = Weissbach  und  Bang;  Die  altpersischen  Keilinschriften; 
WB"  = Zweite  Lieferung 

WZKM  = Wiener  Zeitsehrift  fiir  die  Kunde  des  Morgenlandes 

Xerx.  = Xerxes 

YAv.  = Younger  A vesta 

ZDMG  = Zeitsehrift  der  Deutschen  Morgenlandischen  Gesell- 
schaft 

Zum  Altiran.  Wb.  = Zum  Altiranischen  Worterbuch  (=  IF, 
Beiheft  zum  xix.  Band,  Bartholomae) 


(xi) 


SPECIMEN  OF  TEXTS,  Ilh.  Col.  iv,  14. 

PERSIAN. 

w <r<T  fty  Z TtT  f f r<*  < ft  rfr  &T  r<-  <ft 

ft  < «TT  fz  fft  r<”  T<TfT  r<~  < Trr-<fr~T£ 

*-rrr  < [r£  yrr]  < «rr  ft  Prr  T<-  T<r  fr  r<^<zr.<t< 

r<*<  Tfr^r  'Zr~T7T<rfT<t<T<'<-TrT&zTrn ?[r<^ 
<(<£<  r(vj  < rr  £j<rr  _ r<  t<  < Yrj  <p<  tTrT  rrr<-<  <z< 
r<- tTr  <Z”T<rr]£TTZ£T<  . > <fTr  <-<^rTdf. 
rrr<*<?rT  >~T£  fr  r <-  < -Trr  ? fr  < Tr  <?r  U tzTrT  t fr 
<•*>  jTt<  <rrr«£r<<  zrrrfjr  Err  rrr<»  < ^ zr 
T£e  *fTr 

67.  0atiy  darayavaus  xsaya0iya  tuvarn  [ka]  xsaya0iya  68.  h}ra 
aparam  ahy  martiya  [kya]  draujana  ahatiy  hyava  [zujrakara  + + 
ahat-69.  iy  avaiy  rua  dausta  + + + a ufrastadiy  parsa 


ELAMITE. 

yirr^J%rTT-TTT<  yj.  fjT< Frr r my vNr* m<r<^ 

ft  rrnr  f<rr  <r~  tTr  -77£  -r;  T*ir? 

^ZTT-  rTy  *%TT-  *-tt<  *Trr<rr <*-&■? 
Sfrrr  *-  r<  r>  <rT^^  yy. 

<rr^  t=rrp  j-  *-rr<zr *7} &tt 

82.  aiak  (m)  tari-83.  yamaus  (m)  zunkuk  nanri  (m)  ni  [(m) 
zunkuk  (m)  akka  messin]  nekti  (m)  ruk(id)-irra  titukra  hupirri 
aini  in  kannenti  aiak  aini  (m)  akka  appan-  84.  la-ikkimme 
huttis 


BABYLONIAN. 

/•f.  r et<t  &<  t mrU  ?<*< & Tf 
ty  ftn\p  «vr&T  &v  v'  ^ 

•‘prrf  ¥#f&j(rE£zr£;Z  < 

£>-(r£jm  f'«.+$Ti&T 

105.  (m)  da-ri-ia]-mus  [sarru]  ki-a-am  i-kab-bi  man-nu 
at-ta  sarru  sa  be-la-a  ar-ki-ia  amelu  sa  u-par-ra-su  u amelu 
UD-IS-A-NI  106.  la  ta-  + + + + + + + + 


BASE  OF  COLUMN  WITH  XERXES  INSCRIPTION 
Found  at  Susa  (trilingual) 


J.  de  Morgan,  Delegation  en  Perse,  I,  90. 


Xerx.  Sus. 

Transliteration 

l)0atiy  xsayarsa  xsayaft[ya]  vasna  au[rama]zdaha  2)ima  hadi[s  d]ara- 
yavaus  xsaya&ya  [ajkunaus  hya  [mana  ] Pit  [a] 

Translation 

Says  Xerxes  the  king:  By  the  gi’ace  of  Ahura  Mazda  this 
dwelling  Darius  the  king  made  who  (was)  my  father. 


(1) 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 

INSCRIPTIONS  OF  BEHISTAN  (Bh.) 


Col.  i. 

1.  l)Adam  Darayavaus  xsayatfiya  vazarka1  xsaya0i[ya  xsaya]- 
0iy-2)anarn  xsayatfiya  Parsaiy  xsayatfiya  dah[yunam]  V'st-3)as- 
pahyti  pu0ra  Arsamahya  napa  TIaxamanis[iya 

2.  0]atiy  4)Darayavaus  xsaya#iya  mana  pita  V'staspa  V!s- 
taspa[hya  pitja  Ars-o)ama  Arsamahya  pita  Ariyaramna2  Ariya- 
raranahya  pit[a  Cispis]3  Cisp-6)ais  pita  Haxamanis 

3.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya[#iya  ava]hyara-7)diy  vayam  Ilax- 
amanisiya  0ahytimahy  haca  paruv[iyata  a]mata4  ama-8)hy  haca 
paruviyata  hya  amaxam  tauma  xsaya[0iya  a]ha 

4.  0-9)atiy  Darayavaus  xsavafliya  VIII  mana  taumay[a  tyai]y 
[pajruvam  10)xsaya#iya  alia"  adam  uavama  IX  duvitaparanam5 
[vayam]  xsaya#i-ll)ya  amahy 

5.  ftltiy  Darayavaus  xsayafliya  va[sna]  Auramazd-12)aha  adam 
xsftyatfiya  arniy  Auramazda  xsa0ram  mana  [frjabara 

6.  #-13);Itiy  Darayavaus  xsuyafliya  ima  dahyava  tya  mana 
[pat]iyfiisan  vasn-14)a  Auramazdaha  [ajdamsam  xsayatfiya  aham 
Parsa  Uvaja  [BJabirus  A-15)0ura  Arabaya  Mudraya  tyaiy  dra- 
yahya6  Sparda  Yaun[a  Mada]  Armina  Kat-16)patuka  Partfava 
Zranka7  Haraiva  Uvarazmiya  Baxtris  [Sugjuda  Gandara  Sa-17)ka 
©atagus  Ha[ra]uvatis  Maka  fraharavam8  dahyava  XXIII 


•vazarka,  Noldeke,  Foy,  Bartholomae.  vazraka,  ed.  See  voc. 

2 ariyaramna,  ed.  wrongly.  See  voc. 

3c  ispis,  see  voc. 

4ada.ta,  Andreas-Husing.  See  voc. 

6 duvitaparanam,  Tolman,  Bartholomae  (with  different  meaning), 
duvituparnam,  KT,  WB“;  also.  Hoffmann-Kutschke,  who  proposes  an 
etymology  contrary  to  philological  laws,  duvitataranam,  ed.  wrongly. 
See  voc. 

6darayahya,  ed.  KT,  wrongly. 

7zaranka,  ed. 

8 fraharavam,  Bartholomae.  fraharvam,  KT,  ed.  See  voc. 

(2) 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  BEHISTAN 

High  up  on  the  perpendicular  face  of  the  great  Behistan  Rock, 
65  miles  west  of  Ilamadan  ( Ecbatana ),  where  are  sculptured 
King  Darius  and  two  attendants;  beneath  his  foot  the  prostrate 
Pseudo- Smerdis,  while  facing  the  king  is  the  standing  row  of 
the  nine  captives;  above  is  the  divine  symbol;  below  the  panel 
the  four  columns  of  Persian  text  ( ca . 12x6  ft. ) with  col.  five  to 
their  right , while  to  their  left  are  the  three  columns  of  Elamite 
version;  to  left  of  sculpture  the  Babylonian  version  on  pro- 
jecting block. 

Col.  i. 

1.  I (am)  Darius,  the  great  king,  the  king  of  kings,1  the  king 
in  Persia,  the  king  of  countries,  the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the 
grandson  of  Arsaraes,  the  Achaemenide. 

2.  Says  Darius  the  king:  My  father  (is)  Hystaspes;  the  father 
of  Hystaspes  (is)  Arsames;  the  father  of  Arsames  (is)  Ariaram- 
nes;  the  father  of  Ariaramnes  [is  Teispes];  the  father  of  Teispes 
(is)  Achaemencs. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Therefore2  we  are  called  the  Achae- 
menides;  from  long  ago  we  have  been  of  ancient  lineage;3  from 
long  ago  our  family  have  been  kings.4 

4.  Says  Darius  the  king:  8 of  my  family  (there  were)  who 

1Cf.  in  Plil.  the  Semitic  logogram  malkun  malka  spoken  as  s.ihiin  sab, 
king  of  kings,  somewhat  as  we  write  Deo  volente  but  speak  the  phrase  as 
“Providence  permitting.’’ 

2avahyaradiy.  In  the  modern  Persian  dialects  the  survival  of  radiy  is 
noteworthy;  in  New  Pers.  rn  is  used  in  a general  adverbial  sense,  e.  g. 
r iz-ra,  by  day,  ci-ra,  why;  cf.  Horn,  NS,  53,  C;  in  Afy.  lara  (metathesis 
for  rala)  is  an  affix  for  dat.,  e.  g.  >ra  ( mountain ) + lara,  Geiger,  SA,  17; 
in  Balnei  ra  is  postposition  for  dat.  and  acc.,  e.  g.  togiira,  Geiger,  SB,  9; 
in  Kurd,  ra  is  also  affix  for  dat.,  Sociu,  SK,  158. 

3KT  plainly  record  [a’mata.  For  emendation  adata  see  voc.  and  cf. 
nlst  banti  ’at  ni  azati,  there  is  neither  bond  nor  free,  Neutest.  Bruchstucke 
in  soghdiseher  Sprache,  Muller,  SBAW,  1907.  Bab.  [mar]-Mnuti  (pi),  the 
same  word  which  is  used  in  the  phrase  mar-banuti  (pi)  sa  it-ti-su  gab-bi= 
Pers'a.i  martiya  tyaisaiy  fratama  annsiya. 

4Or  our  family  have  been  royal;  cf.  ^sevaneti,  Neutest.  B ruchstucke  in 
soghdiseher  Sprache. 


(3) 


4 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


7*  0atiy  Dara-18)yavaus  xsfiyafliya  ima  dahyava  tya  mana 
pati[yaisan]  vasna  Au-19)ramazdaha  ma[n]a  bandaka  aha”ta  mana 
bajirn  abaranta  [tyajsam  hacama  2O)a0ahya  xsapava  raucapativa 
ava  akunavayanta1 

8.  0atiy  [Dara]yava-21)us  xsayatfiya  a"tar  ima  dahyava  martiya 
hya  agar[ta]2 3  aha  avam  u-22)bartam  abaram  hva  araika  aha 
avain  ufrastam  aparsam  vasn[a]  Auramazda-23)ha  ima  dahyava 
tyanaa  mana  data8  apariyaya"4 5  yaflasam  hacama  a&th-24)ya 
[ajvaftl  akunavaya”ta® 

g.  ftitiy  Darayavaus  xsayatfiya  Auramazda-25)m[aiy]  ima6 
xsa<9ram  frabara  Auramazdamaiy  upastam  abara  yata  ima  xsa0ram 
2 ( J ) h a [ m a J d a r a y a i [y J 7 vasna  Auramazdaha  ima  xsatf'am  dara- 
yamiy 

10.  0a-27 )tiy  Darayavaus  xsayafliya  ima  tya  mana  kartam 
pasava  ya0a  xs-28)aya<9iya  abavarn  Iva”bujiya  nama  Kuraus  pu0ra 
amaxam  taumay-29)a  hauvama8  ida  xsayafliya  aha  avahya 
Kanbujiyahya  bra-30)t[a  Bardijya  nama  aha  hamata9  hamapita 
Kanbujiyahya  pasava  Kan-31)b[ujiya  a]vam  Bardivam  avajan 
ya&7  Kanbujiya  Bardiyam  avajan  karahy-32)[a  naiy]  azda  abava 
tya  Bardiya  avajata10  pasava  Kanbujiya  Mudrayam  33)[asiya]va 
yafti  Kanbujiya  Mudrayam  asiyava  pasava  kara  araika  abava 
34)[pasava]  drauga  dahyauva  vasiy11  abavra  uta  Parsaiy  uta 
Madaiy  ut-35)[a  anjiyauva  daily usuva 

11.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsayafliya  pa-36 )[sava]  I martiya  magus 
aha  Gaumata  nama12  hauv  udapatata  haca  Paisi-37)[ya]uvadaya 
Arakadris  nama  kaufa  haca  avadasa  Yiyaxnahya  mah-38)[ya] 
XIV  raucabis  Sakata  ahan  yadiv  udapatata  hauv  karahya  avaftl 
39  )[a]durujiya  adam  Bardiya  amiy  hya  Kuraus  pu0ra  Kanbuji- 

1 akunavayaHa,  Bartholomae.  akunavyata,  ed. 

2agarta,  Tolman,  Bartholomae  (with  different  meaning).  agara  + + KT. 
The  emendation  dausta  is  impossible.  See  voc. 

3tyana  mana  data,  KT.  Probably  dittography  for  tya  mana  data.  See 
voc.  s.  v.  tjTa. 

4 apariyaya®,  Bartholomae.  apariyaya”,  ed.  KT.  See  voc.  s,  v.  hapariya. 

5 akunavaya“ta,  Bartholomae.  akunavyata,  ed. 

6auramazdam[aiy]  ima,  KT. 

7 ha[ma]darayai[y],  KT.  See  voc. 

8hauvama,  KT.  Wrongly  [pa]ruvam,  ed. 

9 Or  haplography  for  liamamata,  Bartholomae. 

10  avajata,  KT.  avajata,  Gray,  Bartholomae.  See  voc. 

11  vasiy  or  vasaiy.  Wrongly  vasiya,  Muller.  See  voc. 

12  nam*.  nama”.  Bartholomae.  See  voc. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


0 


were  formerly  kings;  I am  the  ninth  (9);  long  aforetime1  we  were 
(lit.  are)  Icings. 

5.  Says  Darius  the  king:  By  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  I am 
king;  Ahura  Mazda  gave  me  the  kingdom. 

6.  Says  Darius  the  king:  These  are  the  countries  which  came 
to  me;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  I became  king  of  them; — 
Persia,  Susiana,  Babylonia,  Assyria,  Arabia,  Egypt,  the  (lands) 
which  are  on  the  sea,  Sparda,  Ionia,  [Media],  Armenia,  Cappa- 
docia, Parthia,  Drangiaua,  Aria,  Chorasmia,  Bactria,  Sogdiana, 
Ga(n)dara,  Scythia,  Sattagydia,  Arachosia,  the  Macae;  in  all 
(there  are)  23  countries. 

7.  Says  Darius  the  king:  These  (are)  the  countries  which 
came  to  me;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  they  became  subject 
to  me;  they  bore  tribute  to  me;  what  was  commanded  to  them 
by  me  night  or  day'2  this  they  did. 

8.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Within  these  countries  what  man 
was  watchful3  him  well  esteemed  I esteemed;  who  was  an  enemy, 
him  well  punished  I punished;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda 
these  countries  respected  my  laws;  as  it  was  commanded  by  me 
to  them,  so  they  did. 

9.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Ahura  Mazda  gave  me  this  king- 
dom; Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid  until  I obtained  this  kingdom; 
by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  I hold  this  kingdom. 

10.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  (is)  what  (was)  done  by  me 
after  that  I became  king;  Cambyses  by  name,  the  son  of  Cyrus 
(was)  of  our  family;  he  was  king  here;  of  this  Cambyses  there 
was  a brother  Bardiya  (i.  e.  Smerdis)  by  name  possessing  a 
common  mother  and  the  same  father  with  Cambyses;  afterwards 
Cambyses  slew  that  Bardiya;  when  Cambyses  slew  Bardiya,  it 
was  not  known4  to  the  people  that  Bardiya  was  slain;  afterwards 


1 duvitaparanam.  My  interpretation  (Vdt.  Stud.  8)  has  been  accepted 
by  several  critics.  Bartholomae,  however,  writes  me  that  he  would  con- 
nect duvita  with  Middle  Pers.  dit,  and  render  the  compound  one  after  an- 
other. If  this  view  be  correct,  I would  take  the  preceding  numeral  in  con- 
nection with  the  word,  translating  nine  in  succession  we  were  kings. 

2Cf.  Turfan  MSS.,  sab  ’fid  roj,  night  and  day,  M.  33. 

3agar[tab  My  supplement  (Vdt.  Stud.  9)  seems  to  me  quite  certain; 
cf.  Tnrfan  MSS.  vigaraned. 

4Cf.  Turfan  MSS.,  pat  nidfar  saved  ’6  Galilah  ’fit  'azd  qared  ’6  Simon 
ht  + + + + [’a]barig,  at  sunset  (Bartholomae;  evening , Andreas)  go  to  Gal- 
ilee and  make  known  to  Simon  and  the  others. 


6 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


yahya  br-40)[a]ta  pasava  kara  haruva  hami(9riya  abava  haca 
Kanbujiya  abiy  avarn  41)[a]siyava  uta  Parsa  uta  Mada  uta  aniya 
dahyava  xsa0ram  hauv  42)  agar  bay  ata  Garmapadahya  mahya  IX 
raucabis  Sakata  aha"  avaftl  xsa-43)0ram  agarbavata  pasava 
Kanbujiya  uvamarsiyus  amariyata 

12.  0atiy  44)Darayavaus  xsayatfiya  aita  xsa0ram  tya  Gaumata 
hya  magus  adln-45)a  Kanbujiyam  aita  xsa0ram  haca  paruviyata 
amaxam  taumaya  a-46)ha  pasava  Gaumata  hya  magus  adlna 
Kanbujiyam  uta  Parsam  uta  47)Madain  uta  aniya  dahyava  hauv 
ayasata1  uvaipasiyam  akuta  hau-48)v  xsayatfiya  abava 

13.  ft'itiy  Darayavaus  Xsaya^iya  naiy  aha  martiya  49)naiy 
Parsa  naiy  Mada  naiy  amaxam  taumaya  kasciy  hya  avam  Gau- 
50)matam  tyam  magum  xsa0ram  dltam  caxriva  karasim  haca 
darsma"2  a-51)tarsa  karam  vasiy  avajaniya  hya  paranam  Bardi- 
yam  adana  avahyar-52)adiy  karam  avajaniya  matyamam  xsnasa- 
tiv  tya  adam  naiy  Bard-53 )iya  amiy  hya  Kuraus  pu0ra  kasciy 
naiy  adarsnaus  cisciy  0astana-54)iy  pariy  Gaumatam  tyam 
magum  yfita  adam  arasam  pasava  adam  Aura-55  )maz[d]am  pati- 
yavahyaiy3  Auramazdamaiy  upastam  abara  Bagayadais  56)mahya 
X raucabis  0akata  ahan  ava0a  adam  hada  kamnaibis  martiyai- 
bi-57)s  avam  Gaumatam  tyam  magum  avajanam  uta  tyaisaiy 
fratama  mar-58)tiya  anush'a  ahaDta  Sika[ya]uvatis  nama4  dida 
Nisaya  na-59)ma  dahyaus  Madaiy  avadasim  avajanam  xsa0ram- 
sim  adam  adlnam  va-60)sna  Auramazdaha  adam  xsayatfiya 
abavam  Auramazda  xsa0ram  mana  fr-61)abara 

14.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsayatfiya  xsa0ram  tya  haca  amaxam 
ta-62)umaya  parabartam  aha  ava  adam  patipadam  akunavam 
adamsim  ga0a-63)va5  avastayam  yaftl  paruvamciy  ava 0a  adam 
akunavam  ayadan-64)a  tya  Gaumata  hya  magus  viyaka11  adam 
niya0rarayam  karahya  abi-65)caris6  gaiflamca  maniyamca  v‘0abai- 
sacaa7 *  tyadis  Gaumata  h[ya]  66)magus  adlna  adam  karam  gaflava 
avastayam  Parsam[c]a  Madam[c]-67)  a uta  aniya  dahyava  ya0a 
paruvamciy  ava&i  adam  tya  paraba[rta]-68)m  patiyabaram  vasna 

1 ayasata,  Bartholomae.  ayasta,  ed.,  KT.  ayasta,  Kern. 

2 darsmaD,  Bartholomae.  darsam,  ed.  darsama,  KT.  See  voc. 

5 patiyavahyaiy,  Jn.,  KT.  See  voc. 

4nim>a.  naruan,  Bartholomae.  See  voc. 

5 ga#  va,  ed. , KT,  wrongly.  See  voc. 

6abicaris,  KT,  Jn.  See  voc. 

7 Text  as  confirmed  by  KT  and  Jn.  vi#bis,  Justi,  Tolman.  viflabisaca- 

ca,  Foy.  Formerly  vifcubis,  Gray,  Bartholomae.  vMbis,  ed.  See  voc. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


7 


Cambyses  went  to  Egypt;  when  Cambyses  went  to  Egypt,  after 
that  the  people  became  hostile;  after  that  there  was  Deceit  to 
a great  extent  in  the  land,  both  in  Persia  and  in  Media  and  in 
the  other  provinces. 

11.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  there  was  one  man,  a 
Magian,  Gaumata  by  name;  he  rose  up  from  Paishiyauvada; 
there  (is)  a mountain  Arakadri  by  name;  from  there — Id  days 
in  the  month  Viyakhna  were  completing  their  course  when  he 
rose  up;  he  thus  deceived  the  people;  I am  Bardiya  the  son  of 
Cyrus  brother  of  Cambyses;  afterwards  all  the  people  became 
estranged  from  Cambyses  (and)  went  over  to  him,  both  Persia' 
and  Media  and  the  other  provinces;  he  seized  the  kingdom;  9 
days  in  the  month  Garmapada  were  completing  their  course — 
then  he  seized  the  kingdom;  afterwards  Cambyses  died  by  a 
self-imposed  death. 

12.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  kingdom  which  Gaumata  the 
Magian  took  from  Cambyses,  this  kingdom  from  long  ago  was 
(the  possession)  of  our  family;  afterwards  Gaumata  the  Magian 
took  from  Cambyses  both  Persia  and  Media  and  the  other  prov- 
inces; he  seized  (the  power)  and  made  it  his  own  possession;  he 
became  king. 

13.  Says  Darius  the  king:  There  was  not  a man'  neither  a 
Persian  nor  a Median  nor  any  one  of  our  family  who  could 
make  Gaumata  the  Magian  deprived  of  the  kingdom;  the  peo- 
ple feared  him  for  his  tyranny;  (they  feared)  he  would  slay  the 
many  who  knew  Bardiya  formerly;  for  this  reason  he  would 
slay  the  people;  “that  they  may  not  know  me  that  I am  not 
Bardiya  the  son  of  Cyrus;”  any  one  did  not  dare  to  say  any- 
thing against  Gaumata  the  Magian  until  I came;  afterwards  I 
asked  Ahura  Mazda  for  help;  Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid;  10 
days  in  the  month  Bagayadi  were  completing  their  course — 
then  I with  few  men  slew  that  Gaumata  the  Magian  and  what 
foremost  men  were  his  allies;  there  (is)  a stronghold  Sikayau- 
vati  by  name;  there  is  a province  in  Media,  Nisaya  by  name; 
here  I smote  him;  I took  the  kingdom  from  him;  by  the  grace 
of  Ahura  Mazda  I became  king;  Ahura  Mazda  gave  me  the 
kingdom. 

14.  Says  Darius  the  king:  The  kingdom  which  was  taken 
away  from  our  family,  this  I put  in  (its)  place;  I established  it 
on  (its)  foundation:  as  (it  was)  formerly  so  I made  it;  the  sane- 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


8 

Auramazdaha  ima  adam  akunavam  adam  liamatax[saiy]  69)yata 
v'0nm  tyam  amaxam  gaflava  avastayara  yafla  [par]uvam[ci]y 
7O)ava0a  adam  hamataxsaiy  vasna  Auramazdaha  va0a  Gaumata 
hya  magu-71)s  v’ftim  tyam  amaxam  naiy  parabara 

15.  0;itiy  Darayavaus  xsaya0-72)iya  ima  tya  adam  akunavam 
pasava  yafti  xsayatfiya  abavam 

16.  0atiy  78)  Darayavaus  xsayafliva  va0a  adam  Gaumatam 
tyam  magum  avajanam  pa-74)sava  I martiya  A#rina  nama  Upa- 
dara”mahya1  pu0  a hauv  udapata[ta  Uvajai]-7o)y  karahya  avafla 
aflaha  adam  Uvajaiy  xsayatfiya  amiy  pa[sava]  Uva-76)jiya  ham- 
i0riya  abava"  abiy  avam  [ A ]<9rinam  asiyava”  hauv  x[saya0iya] 
77)abava  Uvajaiy  uta  I martiya  Babiruviya  Nadi”tabaira  nama 
Aina[ira]hy-78)a  pu0ra  hauv  udapatata  Babirauv  karam  avafti 
adurujiya  adam  Nab-79)ukudracara  amiy  hya  Nabunaitahya 
pu0ra  pasava  kara  hya  Babiruviya  80)haruva  abiy  avam  Nadin- 
tabairam  asiyava  Babirus  hami(9riya  abava  x-81)sa0ram  tya  Ba- 
birauv hauv  agarbayata 

17.  0;itiy  Darayavaus  xs;Iya-82)0iya  pasava  adam  fraisayam 
Uvajam  hauv  A0r[i]na  basta  anayata  a[biy  m]a-83)m  adamsim 
avajanam 

18.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsayafliya  pasava  adam  Ba-84)  birum  asi- 
yavam  abiy  avam  Nadintabairam  hya  NabukMracara  aga[ubat]- 
a 8o)kara  hya  Nadintabairahya  Tigram  adaraya  avada  aistata2  uta 
86)abis  n a viva  aha  pasava  adam  karam  maskauva  avakanam  am 
iyam  usa-87)barim3 4  akunavam  aniyahya  asarn*  f ranayam5  Aura- 
[maz]damaiy  upas[t]am  88)abara  vasna  Auramazdaha  Tigram 
viyatarayama6  [a]vada  avam  karam  89)tyam  Nadintabairahya 
adam  ajanam  vasiy  A0r[i]yadiya[h}"a]  mahya  XXYI  rau-90)cabis 
Sakata  aha“  a[  va0]a  hamaranam  akum[a] 

19.  0:1  tiv  Darayavaus  x-91)saya0iya  pasava  a[da]m  Ba birum 
asiyavam  a0iy7  Babiru[m  ya0a  naiy  up]-92)ayam8  Zazana  nama 


1 upadarmakya,  ed.  upadaranmakya,  Oppert,  Husing.  See  voc. 

2 aistata,  ed. 

3 usabarim,  Jn.,  KT.  us[tr]abarim,  Bartholomae. 

4asam,  Jn.,  KT.  Formerly  as[pa]  ed.,  Bartholomae.  See  voc. 

®franayam,  KT.  [patiy]anayam,  ed.  wrongly.  See  voc. 

6 viyatarayama,  KT's  cuneiform  text, — ma  KT’s  transliteration,  viyata- 
rayam[a],  Foy. 

7affiy,  KT. 

8[abiy]avam,  Foy. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


9 


tnaries  which  Gaumata  the  Magian  destroyed  I restored;  for  the 
people  the  revenue  (?)  and  the  personal  property  and  the  estates 
and  the  royal  residences1  which  Gaumata  the  Magian  took  from 
them  (I  restored);  I established  the  state  on  (its)  foundation, 
both  Persia  and  Media  and  the  other  provinces;  as  (it  was) 
formerly,  so  I brought  back  what  (had  been)  taken  away;  by 
the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  this  I did;  I labored  that  our  royal 
house  I might  establish  in  (its)  place;  as  (it  was)  formerly,  so 
(I  made  it);  I labored  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  that  Gau- 
mata the  Magian  might  not  take  away  our  royal  house. 

15.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  (is)  what  I did,  after  that  I 
became  king. 

16.  Says  Darius  the  king:  When  I slew  Gaumata  the  Magian, 
afterwards  there  (was)  one  man  A0riua  by  name,  the  son  of 
Upadara(n)ma;  he  rose  up  in  Susiana;  thus  he  said  to  the  people; 
I am  king  in  Susiana;  afterwards  the  people  of  Susiana  became 
rebellious  (and)  went  over  to  that  A#rina;  he  became  king  in 
Susiana;  and  there  (was)  one  man  a Babylonian  Nidintu-Bel  by 
name,  the  son  of  Aniri’;  he  rose  up  in  Babylon;  thus  he  deceived 
the  people;  I am  Nebuchadrezzar  the  son  of  Nabu-na’id;  after- 
wards the  whole  of  the  Babylonian  people  went  over  to  that  Ni- 
dintu-Bel; Babylon  became  rebellious;  the  kingdom  in  Babylon 
he  seized. 

17.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  I sent  to  Susiana;  this 
A0rina  was  led  to  me  bound;  I slew  him. 

18.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  I went  to  Babylon 
against  that  Nidintu-Bel  who  called  himself  Nebuchadrezzar; 
the  army  of  Nidintu-Bel  held  the  Tigris;  there  he  halted  and 
thereby  was  a flotilla;  afterwards  I placed  my  army  on  floats  of 
skins;  one  part  I set  on  camels,  for  the  other  I brought  horses; 
Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  we 
crossed  the  Tigris;  there  the  army  of  Nidintu-Bel  I smote 
utterly;  26  days  in  the  month  A0riyadiva  were  in  course — then 
we  engaged  in  battle. 

19.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  I went  to  Babylon; 
when  1 had  not  reached  Babylon — there  (is)  a town  Zazana  by 


1 Cf.  Turfan  MSS.,  m.inbed  visbed  zandbed  dahibed,  lord  of  the  house, 
lord  of  the  race , etc.  visbed  = der  Herr,  das  Haupt  des  Geschlechts  (t  j*m), 
das  in  einem  vis,  Oeschlechtsdorf  wohnt.  Muller,  Nachtrage,  SBAW,  1904, 

p.  110. 


10 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


vardan  am  anuv  Ufratuva1  avada  [hauv  Na]dinta-93)baira  hya 
Nabukndracara  agaubata  ais2  hada  kara  patis  [mam  hamaranajm 
94)cartanaiy  pasava  hama[rana]m  akuma  Auramazdiimaiy  upas- 
tarn  abara  [vasna  Aura]ma-95)zduha  karam  tyam  Nadintabairahya 
adam  ajanam  vasiy  aniya  api[y]a  [ahyat]a3  a-9G)pisim  parabara 
Anamakahya  maliya  II  raucabis  Sakata  aha11  ava0ii  hama[ranam 
ak]uma4 


Col.  2. 

1.  l)0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya0iya  [pasajva  Nadintabaira  ha-2)da 
kamnaibis  asabaribis5  a[mu0a6  Babjirum  asiya-3)va  pasava  adam 
Babirum  asiyavam  [vasna  Auramazdjaha  uta  Ba-4)birum  agar- 
bayam  uta  avam  Xadintaba[iram  agarbaya]m  pasava  ava-5)m 
Xadintabairam  adam  Babirauv  avajafnam 

2.  0atiy  DJarayavaus  x-6)saya0iya  yata  adam  Babirauv  aha[m 
ima  dahyava]  tya  hacama  ha-7)mi0riya  abava"  Parsa  Uvaja  Mada 
A0[ura  Mudraya  Par]0ava  Margus  ©a-8)tagus  Saka 

3.  0atiy  Darayavaus  x[saya0iya  I marti]ya  Martiya  na-9)ma 
Cincixrais  pu0ra  Kuganaka  na[ma  vardanam  Parsaiy]  avada 
adaraya  10)hauv  udapatata  Uvajaiy  karahya  a[va0u  a 0a ha  adam] 
Imanis  amiy  U-ll)vajaiy  xsaya0iya 

4.  0atiy  Darayavaujs  xsaya0iya]  adakaiy  adam  asna-12)iy  aham 
abiy  Uvajam  pasava  liaca[ma  atarsanUva]jiya  avam  Marti-13)yam 
agarbaya11  hyasam  ma0ista  aha  [utasim  av]ajanan 

5.  0atiy  D-14)arayavaus  xSaya0iya  I martiya  Frafvartis  nama 
Mada]  hauv  udapatat-15)a  Madaiy  karahya  ava0a  a0aha  [adam 
Xsa0rita  am]iy  D vaxstrah-16)ya  taumaya  pasava  kara  Mada  hya 
[v'0apatiy  aha]  hacama  hami0riya  a-17)bava  abiy  avam  Fravar- 
tdm  asiyava  hauv  [xsaya0iya]  abava  Madaiy 

6.  18)0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya0iya  kara  Parsa  u[ta  ]\I]ada  hya 
upa  mam  a-19)ha  hauv  kamnam7  aha  pasava  adam  karam  frfiisa- 
[yam  Yi]darna  nama  Parsa  man-20)a  bandaka  avamsam  ma0istam 
akunavam  ava0as[am  a0a]ham  paraita  avam  k-21)aram  tyam  Ma- 

1 ufratauva,  ed.  See  voc. 

2aisa,  ed.  See  voc. 

3 [ahyat]a,  Kern,  [aharat]  a,  Oppert,  KT.  [a]han[jat]a,  WB.  See  voc. 

4 akuma,  Ju.  [akjuma,  KT. 

sasbaribis,  Bartholomae.  See  voc. 

6a[mu0a],  Weisabach.  ab[iy],  KT. 

2 kamnam,  ed.  kamnama,  Tolman.  See  voc. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


11 


name  along  the  Euphrates — there  this  Nidintu-Bel  who  called 
himself  Nebuchadrezzar  went  with  his  army  against  me  to  en- 
gage in  battle;  afterwards  we  engaged  in  battle;  Ahura  Mazda 
bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  the  army  of  Nidintu- 
Bel  I smote  utterly;  the  enemy  were  driven  into  the  water;  the 
water  bore  them  away;  2 days  in  the  month  An&maka  were  in 
course — then  we  engaged  in  battle. 


Col.  2. 

1.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  Nidintu-Bel  with  (his) 
few  horsemen  fled  (and)  went  to  Babylon;  afterwards  I went  to 
Babylon;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  I both  seized  Babylon 
and  seized  that  Nidintu-Bel;  afterwards  I slew  that  Nidintu-Bel 
at  Babylon. 

2.  Says  Darius  the  king:  While  I was  in  Babylon,  these  (are) 
the  provinces  which  became  estranged  from  me,  Persia,  Susiana, 
Media,  Assyria,  [Egypt],  Parthia,  Margiana,  Sattagydia,  Scythia. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king:  There  (was)  one  man  Martiya  by 
name,  the  son  of  Ci(n)cikhri — there  (is)  a town  in  Persia  Kuga- 
naka  by  name — here  he  dwelt;  he  rose  up  in  Susiana;  thus  he 
said  to  the  people;  I am  Imanish  king  in  Susiana. 

4.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Then  I was  on  the  march  to  Susiana; 
afterwards  the  Susians  [feared]  me;  they  seized  that  Martiya 
who  was  chief  of  them  and  slew  him. 

5.  Says  Darius  the  king:  One  man  Phraortes  [by  name,  a 
Mede],  he  rose  up  in  Media;  thus  he  said  to  the  people;  [I  am 
Ivhshathrita]  of  the  family  of  Cyaxares;  aftenvards  the  Median 
people  which  [were  in  the  palace]  became  estranged  from  me 
(and)  wrent  over  to  that  Phraortes;  he  became  [king]  in  Media. 

6.  Says  Darius  the  king:  The  Persian  and  the  Median  army, 
which  was  by  me,  it  was  small;  afterwards  I sent  forth  an  army; 
Hydarnes  by  name,  a Persian,  my  subject,  him  I made  chief  of 
them;  thus  I said  to  them;  go,  smite  that  Median  army  which 
does  not  call  itself  mine;  afterwards  this  Hydarnes  with  the 
army  went  away;  when  he  came  to  Media  — there  (is)  a town 
in  Media  Maru  by  name — here  he  engaged  in  battle  with  the 
Medes;  he  who  was  the  chief  among  the  Medes  did  not  there 
[withstand];  Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura 
Mazda  my  army  smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly;  27  days  in 


12 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


dam  jata  kya  mana  naiy  gaubataiy  pasava  kauv  Vidarna  ha-22)da 
kara  asiyava  yaftl  Madam  pararasa  M[aru]s  nama  vardanam  Ma- 
23)daiy  avada  hamaranam  akunaus  hada  Mada[ibi]s  kya  Madai- 
suva  24)ma0ista  aka  kauv  adakaiy  naiy  [a]vada  + +1  Auramazda- 
maiy  u-25)pastam  abara  vasna  Auramazdaka  kara  [kya  ma]na2 
avam  karam  t-26)yam  kamitf'iyam  ajan  vasiy  Anamakakya  ma- 
il [y]li  XX  Y 1 1 raucabis  0akat-27)a  ilka11  avafiasam  kamaranam 
kartam  pasava  kauv  [kajra  kya  mana  Ka"pada3  nam-2S)a  dak- 
yaus  Madaiy  avada  main  amaniya4  yata  adain  arasam  Mada-29)m 

7.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsayatfiya  Dadarsis  nama  Arminiya 
man-30)a  bandaka  avam  adam  fraisayam  Arminam  ava0d[saiy] 
aflaham  paraidiy  ka-31)ra  kya  kamifi'iya  mana  naiy  gaubataiy 
avam  [jad]iy  pasava  Dadarsi-32)s  asiyava  ya0a  Arminam  pararasa 
pasava  [hami0r]iya  kangmata  parai-33)ta  patis  Dadarsim  kama- 
ranam cartanaiy  + + + + y nama  avahanam  A-34)rminiyaiy5 
avada  kamaranam  akunava"  Au[rama]zdamaiy  upastam  a-35)bara 
vasna  Auramazdaka  kara  kya  mana  ava[m  kjaram  tyam  hami0r- 
iyam  36)ajan  vasiy  ©uravaharahya  mak[ya]  V1[II  raucabi]s  Sakata 
aka"  ava0-37)asam  kamaranam  kartam 

8.  0atiy  Da[raya]vau[s  xsa]ya[0]iya  patiy  duv-38)itiyam  harni- 
0riya  kangmata  paraitfa  pa]tis  [Dadajrsim  kamaranam  carta- 
39)naiy  Tigra  nama  dida  Arm'ni[yaiyJ  avada  kamaranam  aku- 
nava11 A-40)uramazdamaiy  upastam  abara  vasna  Aura[mazda]ka 
kara  hya  mana  a-41)vam  karam  tyam  bami0  iyam  ajan  vas[iy 
©iiravajkarakya  makya  XVIII  42)raucabis  Sakata  akan  avaftisam 
hamaranam  ka[rtam] 

9.  0atiy  Daraya-43)vaus  xsaya0iya  patiy  0’itlyam  ka[m]i0r[iya] 
hangmata  paraita  pat-44)is  Dadarsim  hamaranam  cartanaiy 
U[yam]il6  na[m]a  dida  Arm'niyaiy  a-45)vada  kamaranam  aku- 
nava11 Auramazdamaiy  upastajm]  abara  vasna  Aurama-46)zdaha 
kara  hya  mana  avam  karam  tyam  ham[i]0ri  [yam]  [a]jan  vasiy 
©fiigarca-47)is  makya  IX  raucabis  Sakata  iikau  ava[0as]am  kama- 
ranam kartam  pasava  48)Dadarsis  cita  mam  amanaya  Ar[m‘]ni- 
[ya]iy  [y]ata  adam  arasam  Ma-49)dam 


1 [a]vada.  + +,  KT.  [a]vada  [aha],  Tolman.  See  voc 

4 [raa]na,  KT. 

3kanpada,  ed.  kanpanda,  Foy. 

4 amaniya,  KT. 

3 armaniyaiy,  ed.  wrongly.  See  voc. 

6 wrongly  ufhyjama,  ed.  See  voc. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


13 


the  month  Anamaka  were  completing  their  course — then  the 
battle  (was)  fought  by  them;  afterwards  this  army  of  mine — 
there  (is)  a region  Ka(m)pada  by  name  in  Media — there  awaited 
me  until  I went  to  Media. 

7.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Dadarshi  by  name,  an  Armenian, 
my  subject,  him  I sent  forth  to  Armenia;  thus  I said  to  him; 
go,  the  rebellious  army  which  does  not  call  itself  mine,  smite  it; 
afterwards  Dadarshi  went  away;  when  he  came  to  Armenia, 
afterwards  the  rebels  came  together  (and)  went  against  Dadarshi 
to  engage  in  battle;  there  is  a village  [Zuzza]1  by  name  in  Ar- 
menia— here  they  engaged  in  battle;  Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid; 
by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  my  army  smote  that  rebellious 
army  utterly;  8 days2  in  the  month  Thuravahara  were  complet- 
ing their  course — then  the  battle  (was)  fought  by  them. 

8.  Says  Darius  the  king:  A second  time  the  rebels  came  to- 
gether (and)  went  against  Dadarshi  to  engage  in  battle;  there 
(is)  a stronghold,  Tigra  by  name,  in  Armenia — here  they  en- 
gaged in  battle;  Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of 
Ahura  Mazda,  my  army  smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly;  18 
days  in  the  month  Thuravahara  were  completing  their  course- 
then  the  battle  (was)  fought  by  them.3 

9.  Says  Darius  the  king:  A third  time  the  rebels  came  to- 
gether (and)  went  against  Dadarshi  to  engage  in  battle;  there 
(is)  a stronghold,  U[yam]&  by  name,  in  Armenia — here  they 
engaged  in  battle;  Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of 
Ahura  Mazda  my  army  smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly;  9 
days  iu  the  month  Thaigarci  were  completing  their  course — then 
the  battle  (was)  fought  by  them;  afterwards  Dadarshi  awaited 
me  in  Armenia  until  I came  to  Media. 

10.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  Yaumisa  by  name,  a 
Persian,  my  subject,  him  I sent  forth  to  Armenia;  thus  I said  to 
him;  go,  the  rebellious  army  which  does  not  call  itself  mine, 
smite  it;  afterwards  Yaumisa  went  away;  when  he  came  to  Ar- 
menia, afterwards  the  rebels  came  together  (and)  went  against 
Yaumisa  to  engage  in  battle;  there  (is)  a region  I[zar]a  by 
name,  in  Assyria — here  they  engaged  in  battle;  Ahura  Mazda 

+ + + y,  text;  Elam,  zuzza;  Bab.  zu-u-zu. 

2 vi  [ii  raucabi]s,  text.  Elam,  version  makes  supplement  certain. 

sBab.  version;  they  slew  Jive  hundred  and  forty -six  and  took  Jive  hun- 
dred and  twenty  prisoners. 


14 


PERSIA X TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


10.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya0iya  + + + + +Vaumisa  nama  Parsa 
mana  ban-50)daka  avam  adam  fraisayam  Arminam  ava0asaiy 
a0aham  paraidiy  kara  51)hya  hami0riya  mana  naiy  gaubataiy 
avam  jadiy  pasiiva  Vaumisa  a-52)siyava  ya0a  Arminam  pararasa 
pasava  hami[0riy]a  hangmata  paraita  pa-53)tis  Yaumisam  harna- 
ranam  cartanaiy  I + + + + a1  nama  dahyaus  A0uray-54)a  avada 
hamarauam  akuuava”  Auramazda[ma]iy  upastam  abara  vasna 
Au-55)ramazdaha  kara  hya  mana  avam  karam  t[yam]  hami0riyam 
ajan  vasiy  56)Anamakahya  mahya  XV  raucabis  0a kata  aha”  ava- 
0asam  hamaranam  57)  kartam 

11.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya0iya  patiy  duvitlyam  ham-58)i0riya 
hangmata  paraita  patis  Yaumisam  hamaranam  cartanaiy  Au- 
59)tiyara  nama  dahyaus  Arminiyaiy  avada  hamaranam  aku- 
nava”  60)Auramazdamaiy  upastam  abara  vasna  Auramazdaha 
kara  hya  ma-61)na  avam  karam  tyam  hami0riyam  aja"  vasiy 
©uravaharahya  mah-62)ya  jiyamnam2  patiy  ava0asam  hama- 
ranam kartam  pasava  Vaumisa  63)cita  mam  amanaya  Armin- 
iya[iy]  yata  adam  arasam  Madam 

12.  64)0ativ  Darayavaus  xsaya0iya  pasava  adam  nijayam  haca 
65)Babiraus  asiyavam  Madam  ya0a  Madam  pararasam  KuDdu- 
rus  nama  66)vardanam  Madaiy  avada  hauv  Fravartis  hya  Madaiy 
xsaya0iya  a-67)gaubata  ais3  had[a]  kara  patis  mam  hamaranam 
cartanaiy  pasava  hamarana-6S)m  akuma  Auramazdamaiy  upas- 
tam abara  vasna  Auramazdaha  karam  69)tyam  Fravartais  adam 
ajanam  vasiy  Aduka[ni]sahya  mahya  XXV  ra-70)ucabis  0akata 
ahan  ava0a  hamaranam  akuma 

13.  0atiy  Darayavaus  x-71)saya0iya  pasava  hauv  Fravartis 
hada  kamnaibis  asabaribis  amu0a  Ra-72)ga  nama  dahyaus  Ma- 
daiy avapara4  asiyava  pasava  adam  karam  f-73)raisayam  nipadiy5 
Fravartis  agarbT[ta]6  anayata  abiy  mam  ada-74)msai[y]  uta  naham 
uta  gausa  uta  harab;lnam7  frajanam  utasa-75)iy  [ucasjma8  avajam 
duvarayamaiy  basta  adariy  haruvasim  k-76)ara  avaina  pasavasim 


1 [iz]i[tus]  ed.,  wrongly.  i[zar]a,  Tolman.  i[zal]a,  tl^eissback.  Seevoc. 

2 jiyamnam,  seevoc.  jiyamanam,  KT. 

3;iisa.  ed. 

4 avapara,  KT. 

6 nipadiy,  KT.  tyaipatiy,  ed.  See  voc. 

6agarbi[ta],  KT.  agarbi[ta],  Bartholomae. 

7harbanam,  KT.  See  voc.  uzbanam,  Weissbach. 

8 ucasrna,  Weissbach.  [ucsa]m,  KT.  word-divider  +casma,  Jn. 


PE  RSI  AX  TEXTS  TRAXSLATED 


15 


bore  me  aid;  by  the  "race  of  Ah ura  Mazda  my  army  smote  that 
rebellious  army  utterly;  15  days  in  the  month  Anamaka  were 
completing  their  course — then  the  battle  (was)  fought  by  them.1 

n.  Says  Darius  the  king:  A second  time  the  rebels  came  to- 
gether (and)  went  against  Yaumisa  to  engage  in  battle;  there 
(is)  a region  Autiyara  by  name  in  Armenia  here  they  engaged 
in  battle;  Aliura  Mazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura 
Mazda  my  army  smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly;  at  the  end 
of  the  month  Thuravahara — then  the  battle  (was)  fought  by 
them;2  afterwards  Yaumisa  awaited  me  in  Armenia  until  I came 
to  Media. 

12.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  I went  from  Babylon; 
I went  away  to  Media;  when  I went  to  Media — there  (is)  a town 
Ivu(n)duru  by  name  in  Media — here  this  Phraortes  who  called 
himself  king  in  Media  went  with  (his)  army  against  me  to  en- 
gage in  battle;  afterwards  we  engaged  in  battle;  Ahura  Mazda 
bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  I smote  the  army  of 
Phraortes  utterly;  25  days  in  the  month  Adukanisha  were  com- 
pleting their  course — then  we  engaged  in  battle. 

13.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  this  Phraortes  with  a 
few  horsemen  fled;  there  is  a region  Raga  by  name  in  Media — 
along  there  he  went;  afterwards  I sent  forth  my  army  in  pursuit; 
Phraortes  seized  was  led  to  me;  I cut  off  (his)  nose  and  ears 
and  tongue,  and  I put  out  his  eyes;3  he  was  held  bound4  at 
my  court;  all  the  people  saw  him;  afterwards  I put  him  on  a 
cross5  at  Ecbatana,  and  what  men  were  his  foremost  allies,  these 
I haled  within  the  fortress  at  Ecbatana. 


1 Bab.  version;  they  slew  two  thousand  and  twenty-four. 

2 Bab  version;  they  slew  two  thousand  and  forty-five  and  took  one  thou- 
sand five  hundred  and  fifty-eight  prisoners. 

8Cf.  Turfan  MSS.,  bo  casm  padist  vafenfd],  they  sjnt  upon  the  sockets 
of  his  eyes. 

4Cf.  Turfan  MSS.,  bast  + + + ’6  Herodbs  sah,  [he  was  leo. !)  bound  to 
Herod,  the  king. 

"The  phrase  seems  to  mean  crucify  rather  than  impale.  Almost  its  ex- 
act equivalent  occurs  in  the  Darobadageftig  (Crucifixion),  M,  18;  Yiso“ 
sakhon  ’abyad  dared  je  pat  Galilab  ’6  ’asmah  vi’afrast  kum  ’abispartnd 
’ut  qarend  darobadag  (Bartholomae;  durubadag,  Muller)  hridig  roj  ’aj 
murdan  ’akhezan,  hold  in  mind  the  saying  of  Jesus  how  in  Galilee  he  in- 
formed you;  they  will  give  me  over  and  put  me  on  t''e  cross,  (but)  the  third 
day  I will  rise  from  the  dead.  Qarend  <.  kar;  daro  cf.  New  Pers.  dar, 
wood;  bad  < patty. 


16 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


Ilagmatanaiy  uzmayapatiy  akunavam  77)uta  ma[r]tiya  tyaisaiy 
fratama  anusiya  ahanta  avaiy  Ha-78)gmata[naiy]  [aDta]r  didam 
fr  aha11  jam 

14.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xs-79)aya0iya  I mar[t]iya  Ci0ra“taxma 
nfima  Asagartiya  hauvmaiy  hamii9riya  80)abava  karahya  ava0a 
a0aha  adam  xsayafliya  amiy  Asagarta-81)iy  Uvaxstrafhya]  tau- 
maya  pasava  adam  karam  Parsarn  ut-82)a  Madam  fraisayam 
Taxmaspada  nama  Mada  mana  bandaka  avam-83)sam  maflistam 
akunavam  [a]va0asam  atfabam  paraita  k-84)aram  bami0riyam  bya 
mana  naiy  gaubataiy  avam  jata  pas-85)ava  Taxmaspada  bada 
kara  [ajsiyava  bamaranam  akunaus  liad-86)a  Ci0rantaxma  Aura- 
mazdamaiy  upastam  abara  vasna  Auramaz-87)daha  kara  bya 
mana  avam  karam  tyam  bami0riyam  aja"  util  C-88)i0rantaxmam 
agar  bay  a anaya  abiy  mam  pasavasaiy  adam  uta  n-89)aham  uta 
gausa  frajanam  utasaiy  [ujcasma1  avajam  duvaraya-90)maiy 
basta  adariy  haruvasim  kara  a[va]i[na]  pasavasim  Arbairaya 
91)uzmayapati[y]  akunavam 

15.  0atiy  Darayava[u]s  xsayatfiya  ima  tya  ma-92)nii  kartam 
Ma[da]iy 

16.  0atiy2  Darayavaus  xsaya0[i]ya  Parflava  uta  Var-93)kana 
[ham]i[0r]iya  [abajva"  [bacajma  Fravar[tais  aga]u[ban]ta  V's- 
taspa  mana  pita  ha-94)uv  [Parflavaiy]  aba  a[va]m  kilra  avaba[rja3 
ham]i0ri[ya]  abava  pasava  V’staspa  95)[asiyava  bada  kar]a  h[ya- 
saiy]  anusifya]  aha  Vis[pa]uz[a]tis  nama  varda-96)[nam  Par0a- 
vaiy]  avada  bamaranam  [a]kunau[s]  bada  Par0avaibi[s]  A[ura- 
mazdjamaiy  97)[upastam  abara]  vasna  [A]  urama  [zdaha  Y's]ta- 
[spa]  avam  kara[m  tyam  ha]m[i]0riya-9S)in  [ajan  vasiy  VJiyaxna- 
hya  m[a]hya  [XXII  raucabis]  Sakata  aba"  avaSasam  bamaranam 
kartam 


Col.  3. 

1.  l)0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya0iya  pasava  adam  kara- 2) m Par- 
sam fraisayam  abiy  V'staspam  baca  Raga-3)ya  ya0il  bauv  kara 
pararasa  abiy  V’staspam  4) pasava  V’staspa  ayasata4  avam 
karam  asivava  Patigraba-5)na  nama  vardanam  Par0avaiy  avada 
hamaranam  akunaus  bada  6)hami0riyaibis  Auramazdamaiy  up- 

1ucasma,  Weissbach.  [ujcsam,  KT.  word-divider +casma,  Jn. 

2 11.  92-98  suppl.,  KT. 

3avaha[r +],  KT.  avaliar[ja],  Tolman.  avaharfta],  Weissbach.  Seevoc. 

4 ayasata,  Bartholomae.  ayasta,  ed.,  KT. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


17 


14.  Says  Darius  the  king:  One  man,  Ci0'a(n)takhma  by  name, 
a Sagartian,  he  became  rebellious  to  me;  thus  he  said  to  the 
people;  I am  king  in  Sagartia,  of  the  family  of  Cyaxares;  after- 
wards I sent  forth  the  Persian  and  Median  army;  Takhmaspada 
by  name,  a Mede,  my  subject,  him  I made  chief  of  them;  thus 
I said  to  them;  go,  the  rebellious  army,  which  does  not  call  itself 
mine,  smite  it;  afterwards  Takhmaspada  went  away  with  the 
army  (and)  engaged  in  battle  with  Ci#ra(n)takhma;  Ahura 
Mazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  my  army 
smote  that  rebellious  army  and  seized  Ci0ra(n)takhma  (and) 
brought  (him)  to  me;  afterwards  1 cut  off  his  nose  and  cars, 
and  put  out  his  eyes;  he  was  held  bound  at  my  court;  all  the 
people  saw  him;  afterwards  I put  him  on  a cross  in  Arbela. 

15.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  (is)  what  (was)  done  by  me 
in  Media. 

16.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Parthia  and  Ilyrcania  became  re- 
bellious to  me  and  declared  allegiance  to  Phraortes;  my  father 
Hystaspes,  he  was  [in  Parthia];  the  people  abandoned1  him 
(and)  became  rebellious;  afterwards  Ilystaspes  [went  with  his 
army]  which  was  loyal;  there  is  a town  Vish[pa]uz[a]ti  by  name 
[in  Parthia] — here  he  engaged  in  battle  with  the  Parthians; 
Ahura  Mazda  [bore]  me  [aid];  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda 
Hystaspes  smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly;  [22  days2]  in  the 
month  Viyakna  were  completing  their  course — then  the  battle 
was  fought  by  them. 


Col.  3. 

1.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  I sent  forth  the  Persian 
army  to  Hystaspes  from  Iiaga;  when  this  army  came  to  Ilys- 
taspes,  afterwards  Hystaspes  took  that  army  (and)  went  away; 
there  (is)  a town  Patigrabana  by  name  in  Parthia — here  he  en- 
gaged in  battle  with  the  rebels;  Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid;  by 
the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  Hystaspes  smote  that  rebellious  army 


1avahar[ja].  My  supplement  (Ydt.  Stud.  22)  I regard  as  quite  cer- 
tain; cf.  herz,  leave  in  Turfan  MSS.  e.  g.  kados  Yis6‘  manAstar  herza  bag 
mari  Mani  maua  ravan  boz,  Holy  Jesus,  release  my  sins;  God,  lord,  Mani, 
redeem  my  spirit. 

2 So  Elam,  and  Bab.  versions. 


18 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


astam  abara  vasna  Auramaz-7)daha  Yistaspa  avam  karam  tyarn 
hami0riyam  ajan  vasiy  Ga-8)rmapadakya  mahya  I rauca  tfakatam1 
aha  avaflasam  hamaranam  ka-9)rtam. 

2.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsayatfiya  pasava  dahyaus  ma-10)na  abava 
ima  tya  mana  kartam  Parftxvaiy 

3.  0!tiy  Darayavau-ll)s  xsayatfiya  Margus  nama  dahyaus 
hauvmaiy  hami0riya2  abava  12)1  martiya  Frada  nama  Margava 
avam  ma0istam  akunava"ta  pasa-13)va  adam  fraisayam  Dadarsis 
nama  Parsa  mana  bandaka  Baxtriy-14)a  xsa0rapava  abiy  avam 
ava0asaiy  a0aham  paraidiy  ava-15)m  karam  jadiy  hya  mana  naiy 
gaubataiy  pasava  Dadarsis  hada  k-16)ara  asiyava  hamaranam 
akunaus  hada  Margavaibis3  Auramazd-17)amaiy  upastam  abara 
vasna  Auramazdaha  kara  hya  mana  avam  karam  18)tyam  hami- 
0riyam  ajan  vasiy  A0riyadiyahya  mahya  XXIII  raucabi-19)s  Sa- 
kata aha"  ava0asam  hamaranam  kartam 

4.  0atiy  Darayavau-20)s  xsaya0iya  pasava  dahyaus  mana  abava 
ima  tya  ma-21)na  kartam  Baxtriya 

5.  0,1  tiy  Darayavaus  xsaya-22)0iya  1 martiya  Vahyazdata  na- 
ma Tarava  nama  vardanam  23)Yautiya  nama  dahyaus  Parsaiy 
avada  adaraya  ha-21)  uv  duvitlyama4  udapatata  Parsaiy  karahva 
ava0a  25)a0aka  adam  Bardiya  arniy  hya  Kuraus  pu0'a  pasava 
2 u) kara  Parsa  hya  v’0apatiy  haca  yadaya  fratarta5  ha-27)uv 
hacama  hamiflbya  abava  abiy  avam  Yahyazdrita-28)m  asiyava 
hauv  xsaya0iya  abava  Parsaiy 

6.  0;l-29)tiy  Darayavaus  xsaya0iya  pasava  adam  karam  Parsa- 
30)m  uta  Madam  fraisayam  hya  upa  mam  aha  Artavard-31)iya 
nama  Parsa  mana  ba"daka  avamsam  rua0istam  aku-32)navam  hya 
aniya  kara  Parsa  pasa  mana  asiyava  Ma-33)dam  pasava  Artavar- 
diya  hada  kara  asiyava  Parsam  34)ya0ii  Parsam  pararasa  Eaxa 
nama  v ardanam  Parsaiy  a-35)vada  hauv  Vahyazdfita  hya  Bardiya 
agaubata  ais6  3G)hada  kara  pads  Artavardiyam  hamaranam 
cartanaiy  pas-37)ava  hamaranam  akunava'1  Auramazdamaiy 
upastam  abara  va-38)sna  Auramazdaha  kara  hya  mana  avam 
karam  tyam  Vahya-39)zdatahya  ajan  vasiy  ©uravaharahya  mahya 
XII  raucabis  0aka-4O)ta  aha"  ava0asam  hamaranam  kartam 

^akatam,  KT.  See  voc. 

2 hami(?riyii,  KT.  Wrongly  hasitiya,  ed. 

3 margavaibis,  KT.  Wrongly  margayaibis,  ed. 

4 duvitlyama,  Bartliolomae.  duvitiyam,  ed. 

fi  yadaya  fratarta,  KT.  ya[u]daya  fratarta,  Foy.  See  voc. 

®aisa,  ed. 


PE  RSI  AX  TEXTS  TR  AX  SLATED 


19 


utterly;  1 day  in  the  mouth  Garmapada  was  completing  its 
course — then  the  battle  (was)  fought  by  them.1 

2.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  it  became  my  province; 
this  (is)  what  (was)  done  by  me  in  Parthia. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king:  There  (is)  a region  Margiana  by 
name;  it  became  rebellious  to  me;  one  man  Frada,  a Margian, 
him  they  made  chief;  afterwards  I sent  forth  Dadarshi  by  name, 
a Persian,  my  subject,  satrap  in  Bactria  against  him;  thus  I said 
to  him;  go,  smite  that  army  which  does  not  call  itself  mine; 
afterwards  Dadarshi  with  the  army  went  away  (and)  engaged 
in  battle  with  the  Margians;  Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the 
grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  my  army  smote  that  rebellious  army  ut- 
terly; 23  days  in  the  month  A0riyadiya  were  completing  then- 
course — then  the  battle  (was)  fought  by  them.2 

4.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  it  became  my  province; 
this  (is)  what  (was)  done  by  me  in  Bactria. 

5.  Says  Darius  the  king:  One  man  Yahyazdata  by  name; 
there  (is)  a town  Tara v a by  name;  there  (is)  a region  Yautiya 
by  name  in  Persia — here  he  dwelt;  he  was  the  second  to  rise 
against  me  in  Persia;  thus  he  said  to  the  people;  I am  Bardiya 
the  son  of  Cyrus;  afterwards  the  Persian  army  which  (was)  in 
the  palace  cast  aside  their  loyalty;  they  became  estranged  from 
me  (and)  went  over  to  that  Yahyazdata;  he  became  king  in 
Persia. 

6.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  I sent  forth  the  Persian 
and  the  Median  army  which  was  by  me;  Artavardiya  by  name, 
a Persian,  my  subject,  him  I made  chief  of  them;  the  rest  of 
the  Persian  army  went  with  me  to  Media;  afterwards  Artavar- 
diya with  the  army  went  to  Persia;  when  he  came  to  Persia — 
there  (is)  a town  Rakha  by  name  in  Persia — here  this  Vahyaz- 
d&ta  who  called  himself  Bardiya  went  with  (his)  army  against 
Artavardiya  to  engage  in  battle;  afterwards  they  engaged  in 
battle;  Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda 
my  army  smote  that  army  of  Yahyazdata  utterly;  12  days  in  the 


1Bab.  version;  he  slew  six  (?)  thousand  five  hundred  and  seventy  and 
took  four  thousand  one  hundred  and  ninety-two  prisoners. 

2 Bab  version;  he  slew  fifty-five  thousand  (sic !)  two  hundred  and  + + three 
and  took  six  thousand  five  hundred  and  seventy-two  prisoners.  The  Kolde- 
wey  fragment  reads;  six  thousand  nine  hundred  and  seventy , + + + pris- 
oners. 


20 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


7.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya0i-41)ya  pasava  hauv  Vahyazdata 
hada  kamnaibis  asabaribis  a-42)mu0a  asiyava  Paisiyauvadam 
haca  avadasa  karam  ayasa-43)ta1  hyaparain  ais2  patis  Artavardi- 
yam  hamaranam  cartana-44)iy  Parga3  nama  kaufa  avada  hama- 
ranam  akunava"  Auramazdama-45)iy  upastam  abara  vasna  Aura- 
mazdaha kara  hya  mana  ava-4G)m  karam  tyam  Vahyazdatahya 
ajan  vasiy  Garmapadahya  ruah-47)ya  V raucabis  0akata  ahan  ava- 
0asam  hamaranam  kartam  uta  ava-48)m  Vahyazdatam  agarba- 
yan  uta  martiya  tyaisaiy  fratam-49)a  anusiya  ahanta4  agarbaya11 

8.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xs-5O)aya0iya  pasava  adam  avam  Vah- 
yazdatam  uta  martiya  51)tyaisaiy  fratama  anusiya  ahanta4 
Uvadaicaya  nama  var-52)danam  Parsaiy  avadasis  uzmayapatiy 
akunavam 

o.  0a-53)tiv  Darayavaus  xsava0iva  ima  tva  mana  kartam 
Parsaiy 

10.  54)0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya0iya  hauv  Vahyazdata  hya  Bar- 
diya  55)agaubata5  hauv  karam  fraisaya  Harauvatim  Vivana 

56) nama  Parsa  mana  bandaka  Harauvatiya  xsa0rapava  abiy  ava- 

57) m  utasam  I martiyam  ma0istam  akunaus  ava0asam  a-58)0aha 
paraita  Vivanam  jata  uta  avam  karam  hya  Dilraya-59)vahaus 
xsaya0iyahya  gaubataiy  pasava  hauv  kara  asiya-60)va  tyam  Va- 
hyazdata  fraisaya  abiy  Vivanam  hamaranam  cartanaiy  K-61)ap- 
isakanis  nama  dida  avada  hamaranam  akunava"  Auramazdamai- 
G2)y  upastam  abara  vasna  Auramazdaha  kara  hya  mana  avam 
karam  tya-63)m  hami0riyam  ajan  vasiy  Anamakahya  miikya  XIII 
raucabis  0akata  aha"  a-64)va0asam  hamaranam  kartam 

11.  0ativ  Darayavaus  xsava0iya  patiy  h-G5)yaparam  hami0riva 
ha"gmata  paraita  patis  Vivanam  hamaranam  cartana-66)iy  Ga”d- 
um(?)ava6  nama  dahyaus  avada  hamaranam  akunava"  Auramaz- 
dama-67)iv  upastam  abara7  vasna  Auramazdaha  kara  hya  mana 
avam  karam  t-6S)yam  hami0riyam  ajan  vasiy  Viva[x]nahya 
mahya  VH  raucabis  0akata  69)aha"  ava0asam  hamaranam  kartam 

12.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsayafliya  70)pasava  hauv  martpya]  hya 
avahya  karahya  ma0[ista  a]ha  tyam  Va-71)hyazdata  fraisaya  abiy 


1ayasata,  Bartholomae.  ayasta,  ed.,  KT. 

2aisa,  ed. 

sparaga,  KT,  ed. 

4ahanta,  KT  as  Rawlinson;  certainly  not  a “ schreibfehler  Rawlinsons. ” 

c agaurata,  text,  stone-cutter's  blunder. 

6gandutava,  KT.  gandumava,  Justi. 

7arara,  text,  stone-cutter's  blunder  for  abaia. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


21 


month  Thuravahara  were  completing  their  course — then  the 
battle  (was)  fought  by  them. 

7.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  this  Vahyazdata  with 
few  horsemen  fled  (and)  went  to  Paishiyauvada;  from  thence  he 
took  an  army  (and)  again  went  against  Artavardiya  to  engage 
in  battle;  there  (is)  a mountain  Parga  by  name — here  they  en- 
gaged in  battle;  Ahura  Mazda  gave  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of 
Ah ura  Mazda  my  army  smote  that  army  of  Vahyazdata  utterly; 
5 da}rs  in  the  month  Garmapada  were  completing  their  course — 
then  the  battle  (was)  fought  by  them  and  they  seized  that  Vah- 
yazdata and  what  men  were  his  foremost  allies  they  seized. 

8.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards — there  (is)  a town  in 
Persia  Uvadaicaya  by  name — here,  that  Vahyazdata  and  what 
men  were  his  foremost  allies,  them  I put  on  the  cross. 

9.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  (is)  what  (was)  done  by  me  in 
Persia. 

10.  Saj's  Darius  the  king:  This  Vahyazdata,  who  called  him- 
self Bardiya,  he  sent  forth  an  army  to  Arachosia — there  (was) 
Viv&na  by  name,  a Persian,  my  subject,  satrap  in  Arachosia — 
against  him  (he  sent  an  army)  and  one  man  he  made  chief  of 
them;  thus  he  said  to  them;  go,  smite  Vivana  and  that  army 
which  calls  itself  of  Darius  the  king;  afterwards  this  army, 
which  Vahyazdata  sent  forth,  went  against  Vivana  to  engage  in 
battle;  there  (is)  a stronghold  Kapishakani  by  name — here  they 
engaged  in  battle;  Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of 
Ahura  Mazda  my  army  smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly;  13 
days  in  the  month  Anamaka  were  completing  their  course — then 
the  battle  (was)  fought  by  them. 

11.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Again  the  rebels  came  together 
(and)  went  against  Vivana  to  engage  in  battle;  there  (is)  a region 
Ga(n)dum(  ? )ava  by  name — here  they  engaged  in  battle;  Ahura 
Mazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  my  army 
smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly;  7 days  in  the  month  Vi- 
vakkna  were  completing  their  course— then  the  battle  (was) 
fought  by  them. 

12.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  this  man,  who  was 
chief  of  that  army  which  Vahyazdata  sent  against  Vivana,  he 
fled  with  a few  horsemen  (and)  went  away — there  (is)  a strong- 
hold Arshada  by  name  in  Arachosia — he  went  thereby;  after- 
wards Vivana  with  an  army  went  in  pursuit  of  them;  here  he 
seized  him  and  what  men  were  his  foremost  allies  he  slew. 


22 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


Vivanam  hauv  amfufe1  ha]da  kamnaib-72)is  asabaribis  asiyava 
Arsada  nama  dida  [Hajrauvatiya  a-73)vapara2  atiyiiis3  pasava 
Vivana  hada  kara  nipadi[y]  t[ya]iy4 *  asiya-74)va  avadasim  agar- 
baya u[t]a  martiya  tyaisaiy  fratama  anusiya  75)aha"ta  avaja" 

13.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsayatfiya  pasava  dahyaus  ma-76)na 
abava  ima  tya  mana  kartam  Harauvatiya 

14.  tfatiy  Darayavaus  xsa-77)ya0iya  yata  adam  Parsai[y]  u[t]a 
Madaiy  aham  patiy  duvitlyam  78)Babiruviya  hami0riya  abava" 
hacama  I martiya  Arxa  nama  [Arm]ini-79)va  Halditahya  pu0ra 
hauv  udapatata  Babirauv  Dubala  nama  [da]hya-80)us  haca  avadasa 
hauv  [kjarahya  ava&i  adurujiya  adam  Nabukud-81)racara  amiy 
Nabunaitahya  pu0ra  pasava  kara  Babiruviya  hacama  ha-82)mi- 
0riya  abava  abiy  avam  Arxam  asiyava  Babirum  hauv  agarbayat- 
83)a  hauv  xsayafliya  abava  Babirauv 

15.  0atiy  Da[rayava]u[s  xs]aya0i-84:)ya  pasava  adam  karam 
fraisayam  Babirum  Vi"dafar[na]  nama  Pa[rsa]  mans,  85)bandaka 
avamsam  matfistam  akunavam  avatfasam  a0aham  para[ita  ava]m 
karam  86)Babiruvi[ya]m6 7  jata  hya  mana  naiy  [gajubataiy6  pasa- 
va  [V]inda[farn]a  hada  kar-87)a  asiyava  Babirum  Auramaz- 
damaiy  upast[am]  a[bara]  vasna  Auramaz-8S)daha  Yi"da[far]na 
Babiruvi[y]a  ajan7  uta  [basta  anaya]8  + + + + + + + mahya  XXII 
ra-89)ucabis  [0aka]ta  aha"  ava&i  avam  A[rxam  hya  Nabukujdra- 
cara  a-90)gauba[ta9  ut]a  martiya  tya,  i + + + + nusi  + + + + + 
91)+  + + + + + [hauv  Arxa  u]ta  [martjiya  t[yaisaiy  f]rata[m]a 
a[n]-92)[u]si[y]a  ahantii  Babira[u]v  [uzmayjapatiy  akariya"ta10 


Col.  4. 

1.  l)0atiy  Daraya[vaus]  xsayafliya  ima  t-2)ya  mana  kartam 
[Babiraujv 

!am[u9a],  KT.  Wrongly  ma&[ista],  ed. 

2avapara,  KT. 

3atiya[i]sa,  ed.  See  voe. 

4t[ya]iy,  KT.  See  voc. 

" babiruvi[ya]m,  KT.  Wrongly  babirauv,  ed. 

c [gajubataiy,  KT.  [gajubataiy,  ed. 

7babiruvi[y]a  ajan,  KT.  Wrongly  babirum  agarbaya,  ed. 

8 [basta  anaya],  Tolman. 

» 11.  90-91,  a-90)gauba[ta  ut]a  martiya  tyai[saiy  fratama  ajnusiya  [aha“- 
ta  agarbaya  pa]-91)sava  [niyajstayam,  Weissbach.  See  voe.  s.  v.  kar. 

10  akariyanta,  Barth olomae,  WB".  asariyata,  KT.  akariyantam,  WB1. 
See  voc. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


23 


13.  Says  Darius  the  kiug:  Afterwards  the  province  became 
mine;  this  (is)  what  (was)  done  by  me  in  Arachosia. 

14.  Says  Darius  the  king:  When  I was  in  Persia  and  in  'Me- 
dia, a second  time  the  Babylonians  became  estranged  from  me; 
one  man,  Arkha  by  name,  an  Armenian  son  of  Haldita,  he  rose 
up  in  Babylon;  there  (is)  a region,  Dubala  byname — from  here 
he  thus  lied  to  the  people;  I am  Nebuchadrezzar,  the  son  of 
Nabu-na’id;  afterwards  the  Babylonian  people  became  estranged 
from  me  (and)  went  over  to  that  Arkha;  he  seized  Babylon;  he 
became  king  in  Babylon. 

15.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Afterwards  I sent  forth  my  army 
to  Babylon;  Intaphernes  by  name,  a Persian,  my  subject,  him  I 
made  chief  of  them;  thus  I said  to  them;  go,  smite  that  Baby- 
lonian army  which  does  not  call  itself  mine;  afterwards  Inta- 
phernes with  an  army  went  to  Babylon;  Ahura  Mazda  bore  me 
aid;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  Intaphernes  smote  the  Baby- 
lonians; and  [he  led  them  bound  to  me];  22  days  in  the  month 
+ + + +1  were  completing  their  course— then  that  Arkha,  who 
called  himself  Nebuchadrezzar,  and  the  men  who  [were  his  fore- 
most allies  they  seized  and  bound];2  [this  Arkha]  and  what  men 
were  his  foremost  allies  were  put  on  the  cross  at  Babylon. 


Col.  4. 

1.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  (is)  what  was  done  by  me  in 
Babylon. 

2.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  (is)  what  I did;  by  the  grace 
of  Ahura  Mazda  in  the  same  year3  after  that  I became  king  I 

1The  Elam,  version  gives  the  month  Markazanash. 

^Supplied  from  Elam,  version;  see  voe.  akariyaDta,  s.  v.  kar. 

8 Weissbach's  interpretation  (see  voc.  s.  v.  Sard)  is  very  probable,  yet  I 
would  note  the  following  objections:  l)The  lacuna  before  Bab.  muanna 
fits  gab-bi,  all,  very  well;  cf.  Oppert's  old  interpretation,  duns  toute  I'anne, 
toujours,  dans  toute  ma  vie,  to  which  I would  add  Turfan  MSS.  hav-sar, 
eius  modi.  So  KT,  always.  2 The  omission  of  the  det.  an  (which  invaria- 
bly occurs  in  expressions  of  time)  from  the  corresponding  Elam,  phrase. 
3)The  congestion  of  all  these  recorded  events  in  one  year.  Weissbach 
in  a personal  letter  to  me  (quoted  in  voc.)  would  avoid  this  difficulty 
by  supposing  that  Darius’  words  are  not  literally  true  here;  that  the  re- 
bellions broke  out  in  one  and  the  same  year  but  putting  them  down  re- 
quired a longer  time,  a difficult  explanation  when  we  read  the  express 
words  of  the  king  who  is  recording  what  he,  not  others,  accomplished. 


24 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


2.  0atiy  D-3)arayavaus  xs[aya0i]ya  ima  tya  adam  akuna-4)vam 
vasnii  Aurafmazdjaka1  hamahyaya  0ar-5)da  pasava  ya0a  x[saya- 
0iya]  abavam  XIX  hamaran-6)a  akunavam  vasn[a  Aura]mazdaha 
adamsim2  a-7)janam  uta  IX  xs[aya0iy]a  agarbayam  I Gaumata 
8)nama  magus  aha  [kauvad]urujiya  ava0a  a0aha  adam  9)Bardiya 
amiy  [hya  Kujraus  pu0ra  hauv  Parsam  ha-lO)mi0riyam  akunau[s 
I A0ri]na  nama  Uvajiya  hauv  adu-ll)rujiya  avafla  a[0aha  adam] 
xsayatfiya  amiy  Uvajaiy  12)hauv  Uvajam  ha[mi0riya]m  akunaus 
[ma]mi  [I  Na]dintabaira  n-13)ama  Babiruviya  hauv  adurujiya 
ava0a  afoha  14)adam  Kabukudra[cara  amiy]  hya  Xabunaitahya 
pu0ra  15)haav  Babirum  [hami]0riyam  akunaus  I Martiya  na- 
16)ma  Parsa  hauv  [ad]u[ruj]iya  avaftx  a0aha  adam  Imani-17)s 
amiy  Uvajaijy  xsaya]0h'a  hauv  Uvajam  kami0ri3’-a-18)in  akunaus 
I Fravar[ti]s  nama  Hilda  hauv  adurujiya  19)ava0a  a0aha  a[da]m 
[X]sa[0r]ita  amiy  Uvaxstrahya  taumay-20)a  hauv  Madam  [hami- 
0rivam]  akunaus  I Ci0raDtaxma  nama  Asa-2 l)gartiya  hauv  [adu]- 
rujiya  ava0a  a0aha  adam  xsaya0-22)iya  amiy  Asaga[rtaiy]  Uvaxs- 
trahva  tauinaya  hauv  23)Asagartam  hami0ri[yam]  akunaus  I 
Frada  nama  24)Margava  hauv  a[d]u[r]ujiya  ava0a  alalia  adam 
25)xsaya0i3’a  a[miy  Mar]gauv  hauv  Margum  hami6iri-26)yam 
akunaus  [I  Yahyajzdata  nama  Parsa  hauv  a-27)dm’ujiya  ava[0a 
a0aha]  adam  Bardiya  amiy  hya  Ku-28)raus  pu0ra  ha[uv  Parjsam 
hami0riyam  akunaus  I Ar-29)xa  nama  Armiu[iva  hauv]  adurujiya 
avada  alalia  adam  Nab-30)ukudracara  ami3r  [hya  Nabu]naitahya 
pu0ra  hauv  Babirum  ham-31  )i0ri3ram  akunaus 

3.  0a[t]iv  Darayavaus  xsa37a0iya  imaiy  32)IX  xsaya0iya  [adajm 
agarbayam  aDtar  ima  hamarana 

4.  33)0iitiy  Darayafvaus  xsa]ya0iya  dahyava  ima  tya  hami0'iy- 
34)a  abava"  drauga  di[s  hami0ri3T]a  akunaus  tya  imaiy  karam 
adur-35)ujiyasa“  pasava  di[s  Auramaz]da  manii  dastaya  akunaus 
ya0a  mam  k-36)ama  avaftl  di[s  akunavam] 

5.  0iltiy  Darayavaus  xsilya0i-37)ya  tuvam  ka  x[saya0iya  htya 
aparam3  aky4  haca  drauga  darsam  38)patipayauva  mart[iya  hya 
drau]jana  ahatiy  avam  ufrastam5  parsa  ya-39)diy  ava0a  man[iyil- 
hav']6  dahyausmaiy  duruva  ahati-40)y 

• 1 aura[mazd]aha,  WB."  a[uramazdaka]  aha,  ed. 

2 adamsim,  KT.  Wrongly  adamsam,  ed. 

3apara-ma,  Bartholomae.  See  voc. 

4ahy,  ed.,  KT.,  wrongly  in  all  places.  See  voc 

5 ufrastam,  KT.  See  voc. 

6ma[niyahy],  ed. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


25 


engaged  in  19  battles;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  I waged 
them  and  I seized  9 Icings;  there  was  one,  Gaumata  by  name,  a 
Magian;  he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I am  Bardiya  the  son  of  Cyrus; 
he  made  Persia  rebellious;  there  (was)  one,  A0rina  by  name,  a 
Susian;  he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I am  king  in  Susiana;  he  made 
Susiana  rebellious  to  me;  there  (was)  one,  Nidintu-Bel  by  name, 
a Babylonian;  he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I am  Nebuchadrezzar  the 
son  of  Nabu-na’id;  he  made  Babylon  rebellious;  there  (was)  one, 
Martiya  by  name,  a Persian;  he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I am  dimin- 
ish, king  in  Susiana;  he  made  Susiana  rebellious;  there  (was) 
one,  Phraortes  by  name,  a Mede;  he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I am 
Khshathrita,  of  the  family  of  Cyaxares;  he  made  Media  rebel- 
lious; there  (was)  one,  Ci0ra(n)takhma  by  name,  in  Sagartia;  he 
lied;  thus  he  said;  I am  king  in  Sagartia,  of  the  family  of  Cy- 
axares; he  made  Sagartia  rebellious;  there  (was)  one,  Frada  by 
name,  a Margian;-  he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I am  king  in  Margiana; 
he  made  Margiana  rebellious;  there  (was)  one,  Vahyazdata  by 
name,  a Persian;  he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I am  Bardiya  the  son  of 
Cyrus;  he  made  Persia  rebellious;  there  (was)  one,  Arkha  by 
name,  an  Armenian;  he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I am  Nebuchadrezzar 
the  son  of  Nabu-na’id;  he  made  Babylon  rebellious. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king:  These  9 kings  I seized  within  these 
battles. 

4.  Says  Darius  the  king:  These  (are)  the  provinces  which 
became  rebellious;  the  Lie  made  them  rebellious  so  that  these 
deceived  the  people;  afterwards  Ahura  Mazda  gave  them  into 
my  hand;  as  was  my  will  so  [I  did}  unto  them. 

5.  Says  Darius  the  king:  O thou  who  shalt  be  king  in  the  fu- 
ture, protect  thyself  strongly  from  Deceit;  whatever  man  shall 
be  a deceiver,1  him  well  punished,  punish,  if  thus  thou  shalt 
think  “ may  my  country  be  secure.” 

6.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  (is)  what  I did;  by  the  grace 
of  Ahura  Mazda  I did  (it)  in  the  same  year;  O thou  who  shalt 
examine  this  inscription  in  the  future,  let  it  convince  thee2  (as 
to)  what  (was)  done  by  me;  regard  it  not  as  lies. 

7.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Ahura  Mazda  is  my  surety  that  this 
(is)  true  (and)  not  false  (which)  I did  in  the  same  year. 

1Cf.  TurfanMSS.,  drozaniy. 

2Cf.  Turf  an  MSS.,  ne  varovad,  is  not  believed;  par  varnu,  by  belief, 
Neutest.  Bruchstucke  in  soghdischer  Spraehe. 


2G 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


6.  ftitiy  Da[raya]va[us]  xsayatfiya  ima  tya  adam  akunavam 
41)vasna  Auramazdaha  [ha]ina[k]yaya  0arda  akunavam  tuvam 
ka  hya  42)aparam  imam  dipi[m]  patiparsahy  tya  mana  kartam 
varnavatam  43)0uvam  matya  [draujjlyahy1 2 

7.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsa-44)ya0iya  Auramazd[am  upava]r- 
taiyniyn2  ya0ii  ima  hasiyam  naiy  duru-45)xtam  adam  akuna[vam 
kamajkyaya  0arda 

8.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya-46)0iya  vasna  Aura[mazdaha  ap]i- 
maiy  aniyasciy  vasiy  astiy  karta-4T)m  ava  ahyaya  d[i]p[iy]a  naiy 
nipistam  avakyaradiy  naiy  n-48)ipistam  mat[ya  hya  apa]ram 
imam  dipim  patiparsatiy  avah-49)ya  paruv  0a [day a3  tya]  mana 
kartam  nais[im]  ima4  varnavataiy  d-50)uruxtam  maniyaftaiy]5 

9.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsayatfiya  tyaiy  51)paruva  xsaya0[iya 
yjata  aha11  avaisam  ava  naiy  astiy  kar-52)tam  ya0a  mana  va[sna] 
Auramazdaha  kamahyaya  0arda  kartam 

10.  0a-53)tiy  Darayavaus  x[sa]ya0iya  nuram6  0uvam  varnav- 
atam tya  man-54)a  kartam  ava0a  ka[rahya  0]a[kv  avahya]radiy7 * 
mii  apagaudaya  yadiy  imam  55)handugam  naiy  [a]pa[gau]da[yak]y 
karahya  0aky  Auramazda  0uvam  56)dausta  blya  uta[ta]iy  tauma 
vasiy  blya  uta  dargam  jlvfi 

11.  5T)0atiy  Darayavaus  [xsaya]0iya  yadiy  imam  haMugam 
apagaudaya-58)hy  naiy  0a by  [k]ara[hya]  Auramazdatay  jata  blya 
utataiy  taum-59)a  ma  blya 

12.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsayatfiya  ima  tya  adam  akunavam 
60)kamakyaya  0arda  [vasnja  Auramazdaha  akunavam  Auramaz- 
damaiy  upas-61)tam  abara  uta  an[iyaha  bajgfiha  tyaiy  hantiy 

13.  0atiy  Darayavau-62)s  xsayafliya  avah[ya]ra[diy]  Auramaz- 
dft  upastam  abara  uta  ani-63)yaha  bagaha  tyai[y  hantiy  ya0]a 
naiy  arai[ka]  aham  naiy  draujana  aham  na-64)iy  zurakara  aham 


1 [drauj]iyahy,  Bartholomae.  [duruj]iyahy,  KT,  WBn.  [duruxtam 
man]iyahy,  ed. 

2Bittography  for  auramazd[am  lipava] rtaiy,  Tolman.  See  voc.  au- 
ramazda  + + + + + rtaiyiya,  KT.  auramaz  [diya]  taiyiya,  WB.  aurama- 
zd[a  vajrtiyaiy,  Bartholomae. 

3 fladaya,  Bartholomae.  0ad!i++,  Jn.  0a[dutiy],  KT.  See  voc. 

4nais[im]  ima,  Tolman.  nais[aiy]  ima,  Weissbach.  nais  + + im,  KT. 

smaniy  [atiy],  ed. 

6 nuram,  KT,  Jn.  + + + nuram,  ed.  wrongly. 

7sa  + + + + d + + + + + adiy,  KT.  ka[rahya  fljafk}7  avahya] radiy,  Tol- 

man. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


27 


8.  Says  Darius  the  king:  By  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  much 
else  (was)  done  by  me  that  (is)  not  written1  on  this  inscription; 
for  this  reason  it  (is)  not  written  lest  whoever  shall  examine 
this  inscription  in  the  future,  to  him  what  has  been  done  by  me 
should  seem  too  much;  and  it  should  not  convince  him,  but  he 
should  think  (it)  false. 

9.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Who  were  the  former  kings,  while 
they  lived,  by  these  nothing  (was)  thus  done  as  (was)  done  by 
me  through  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  in  the  same  year. 

10.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Now  let  it  convince  thee  (as  to) 
what  (was)  done  by  me;  thus  [tell  it  to  the  people];2  do  not  con- 
ceal (it);  if  thou  shalt  not  conceal  this  record  (but)  tell  (it)  to  the 
people,  may  Ahura  Mazda  be  a friend  to  thee  and  may  there 
be  unto  thee  a family  abundantly  and  mayest  thou  live  long. 

11.  Says  Darius  the  king:  If  thou  shalt  conceal  this  record 
(and)  not  tell  (it)  to  the  people,  may  Ahura  Mazda  be  a smiter 
unto  thee  and  may  there  not  be  unto  thee  a family. 

12.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  (is)  what  I did  in  the  same 
year;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  I did  (it);  Ahura  Mazda 
bore  me  aid  and  the  other  gods  which  are. 

13.  Says  Darius  the  king:  For  this  reason  Ahura  Mazda  bore 
me  aid  and  the  other  gods  which  are,  because  I was  not  an 
enemy,  I was  not  a deceiver,  I was  not  a wrong-doer,  neither  I 
nor  my  family;  according  to  rectitude  [I  ruled]  nor  against  the 
slave(?)  nor  the  lowly(?)  did  I exercise  oppression;3  the  man  who 
helped  my  house,  him  well  esteemed,  I esteemed;  (the  man)  who 
would  destroy  it,  him  well  punished,  I punished. 

14.  Says  Darius  the  king:  O thou  who  shalt  be  king  in  the 
future,  whatever  man  shall  be  a deceiver  or  whoever  shall  be  a 


1 Cf.  nipis,  write , Neutest.  Bruckstucke  in  soghdischer  Sprache,  Muller, 
SB  AW,  1907;  New  Pers.  nivesaek 

2 1 would  read  ava^a  ka[rahya  0]a[hy  avahyajradiy,  tell  it  thus  to  the 
people-,  for  this  reason,  which  can  fit  the  few  traces  of  characters  on  the 
rock.  Since  KT  do  not  give  the  extent  of  the  lacuna,  I feel  some  doubt 
whether  the  space  justifies  the  supplement  of  the  last  word.  KT  however 
read  the  Elam,  as  hu[pentukkime],  wherefore.  I would  add  that  my  read- 
ing is  in  full  accord  with  Weissbach’s  emendation  of  the  Bab.  version,  u 
amat  kit-  turn  a-na  u-ku  ki-[bi ?],  and  declare (?)  the  true  record  to  the  people, 
ZDMG,  61,  729. 

3 See  voc.  s.  v,  + + + 


tunuuvatama 


28 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


[naiy  a]da[m  na]  imaiy  tauraa  upariy  arstam1  upariy-65)[axsa- 
yai}r]2  naiy  sakauri[m3  naiy]  + + tunnuvatamai  zura  akunavam 
martiya  kya  hamata-66)xsata  mana  v^ifya  a]vam  ubartam 
a[ba]ram  hya  viyana[sa]ya5  avam  ufrasta-67)m  aparsam 

14.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsayafliya  tuvam  [ka]  xsayafliya  68)hya 
aparam6  ahy  martiya  [bya]  draujana  ahatiy  hyava  [zu]rakara++T 
ahat-69)iy  avaiy  ma  dausta  [bly]a8  ufrastadiy  parsa 

15.  0atiy  Dara-70)yavaus  xsayafliya  [tujvain  ka  hya  aparam 
imam  dipim  vainahy  ty-71)am  adam  niyapi[sa]m  [ijmaiva  pati- 
kara matya  vikanahy9  yava  da(?)-72)tasa(?)10  ahy  avaflasta11  par- 
i[ba]ra12 

16.  flatiy  Darayavaus  xsayafliya  ya-73)[diy]  imam  di[pim] 
vaina[hy]  imaiva  patikara  naiydis  vikanahy9  uta-74)taiy  yava 
tauma  [ahatiy]  paribarah(i)dis13  Auramazda  fluvarn  dausta  bly- 
7o)a  utataiy  tau[ma]  vasiy  bl[y]a  uta  dargam  jiva  uta  tya  kuna- 
.vahy  76)avataiy  Auramazda  [ukarta]m14  kunautuv 

17.  flatiy  Darayavaus  xsa-77)yafliya  yadiy  im[a]m  dipim  i- 
maiva  patikara  vainahy  vikanah(i)dis15  ut-78)ataiy  yava  tau[m]a 
ahati[y  nai]ydis  paribarahy16  Auramazdataiy  jata  b-79)Iya  uta- 
taiy taum[a  ma  blya]  uta  tya  kunavahy  avataiy  Auramazd-80)a 
nika”tuv 

18.  flatiy  Da[ra]yavaus  xsayafliya  imaiy  martiya  tyaiy  8l)ada- 
kaiy  avada  [a]hanta  yata  adam  Gaumatam  tyam  magum  avaja- 
nam  82)hya  Bardiya  aga[uba]ta  adakai[y]  imaiy  martiya  hama- 
taxsa"ta  anusiya  man-83)a  Vi“dafarna  na[ma]  Va[ya]sp[ara]hya 
puflra  Par[sa  U]ta[na  n]ama  ©uxrah[y]a  84)[puflra]  Parsa  [Gaubr]u- 


1 arstam,  Foy,  Jn.,  KT.  See  voc. 

2 upariy  [ay  am],  ed.,  upariy[axsayaiy],  Tolman.  See  voc. 

3 sakaurai[ma],  KT.  s'kaurai(?)ma,  Jn.  See  voc. 

4 tun°uvatama,  KT.  manuuvatama,  Jn.  See  voc. 

5 viyana[sa]ya,  KT.  viyana[0a]ya,  Foy. 

6apara-ma,  Bartholomae. 

7[zu]rakara,  KT,  Muller,  Foy.  See  voc. 

8[bly]a  (Opt.  2 sg.),  Tolman,  Weissbach.  + + + a,  KT. 

9vikanahy,  Jn.  visanahy,  KT.  See  voc. 

10da(?)tas(?)  ahy,  KT.  amata ahy, Tolman.  tava  ahy,  HotTmann-Kutsclike. 

11  avafti  sta,  Hollmann-Kutschke. 

12  pari[  ba]ra,  KT.  Wrongly  parikara,  ed.  See  voc. 

13  wrongly  parikarah[i]dis,  ed. 

14  [ukarta]m,  Tolman.  [vazarkajm,  Oppert,  Foy.  See  voc. 
^vikanahtijdis,  Jn.  visanahadis,  KT. 

16  wrongly  parikarahy,  ed. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


29 


wrong-doer  (be)  not  a friend  to  these;  punish  (them)  with  severe 
punishment. 

15.  Says  Darius  the  king:  O thou  who  shalt  see  this  inscrip- 
tion in  the  future  which  I have  written  or  these  sculptures, 
thou  shalt  not  destroy  (them)  as  long  as  thou  shalt  be  powerful(?); 
thus  thou  shalt  guard  them. 

16.  Says  Darius  the  king:  If  thou  shalt  see  this  inscription  or 
these  sculptures  (and)  shalt  not  destroy  them  and  shalt  guard 
them  as  long  as  thy  family1  shall  be,  may  Ahura  Mazda  be  a 
friend  to  thee  and  may  there  be  unto  thee  a family  abundantly 
and  mayest  thou  live  long  and  whatever  thou  shalt  do,  this  for 
thee  (let)  Ahura  Mazda  make  [successful]. 

17.  Says  Darius  the  king:  If  thou  shalt  see  this  inscription  or 
these  sculptures  (and)  shalt  destroy  them  and  shalt  not  guard 
them  as  long  as  thy  family  shall  be,  may  Ahura  Mazda  be  a 
smiter  unto  thee  and  may  there  not  be  unto  thee  a family  and 
whatever  thou  shalt  do,  this  let  Ahura  Mazda  destroy  for  thee. 

18.  Says  Darius  the  king:  These  (are)  the  men  who  were 
there  then  when  I slew  Gaumata  the  Magian,  who  called  himself 
Bardiya;  then  these  men  cooperated  as  my  allies;  Intaphernes 
by  name,  the  son  of  Vayaspara,  a Persian;  Otanes  byname,  the 
son  of  Thukhra,  a Persian;  Gobryas  by  name,  the  son  of  Mar- 
donius,  a Persian ; Hydarnes  by  name,  the  son  of  Bagabigna,  a 
•Persian;  Megabyzus  by  name,  the  son  of  Datuhya,  a Persian; 
Ardumanish  by  name,  the  son  of  Yahauka,  a Persian. 

19.  Says  Darius  the  king:  O thou  who  shalt  be  king  in  the 
future,  preserve  [the  family  of]  these  men. 

20.  Says  Darius  the  king:  By  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  this 
inscription  + + + + which  I made  + + + + + + + + + I have 
written;  this  inscription  + + + me  afterwards  the  inscription 
+ + + + + throughout  the  provinces  + the  people.2 


1Here  and  in  the  following  section  Bartholomae  renders  tauma,  by 
-power  (i.  e.  as  long  as  will  be  possible),  connecting  the  word  with  the  root 
*tu,  to  be  strong,  Av.  tu.  Cf.  Foy.  KZ.  35,  47;  WZKM.  24,  288;  Bang. 
ZDMG.  43,  533;  Reichelt,  KZ.  39,  74.  The  Elam,  translates  the  word  by 
patta,  which  Foy.  interprets  possibility.  See  voc.  s.  v.  tamnan. 

2 For  Hoffmann-Kutschke’s  interpretation  of  Elam,  version  (Bh.  L.)cf. 
Or.  Lit.  Ztg.,  Sept.,  190G;  also  Jensen,  ZDMG,  55. 


30 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


va  nama  Marduniyahya  [pu0ra]  [P]arsa  [Vijdarna  nama  Ba- 
83)g[a]bignak[ya  p]u0ra  Parsa  Ba[gab]uxsa  nama  [Datujhyahya, 
pu0ra  Parsa  86)Ar[duina]n[is  nama]  Vahau[kahya  p]u$ra  Parsa 

19.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya0-87)iya  tuvam  [ka]  xsaya[0]iya 
hya  aparam1  ahy  tyam  imaisam  martiya  u-8S)+  + + + + + imam 
+ + + a + + + + par[ibar]a2^ 

20.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsayafliya  vasna  [A]u-_89)[ramaz]da[ha] 
i[yam]  dipi  + + + j.  + [ty]am3  akunavam  + + tisarn  a++a++t+ 
avast-90)[a]ya[m]  + + + + axar  + + + + [niyapjisam  iya  [djipi  + + + 

nani  a0aha\  aja  is  j j ] j ada  91)-t.  4.  _j 1 4_  m uta  j_  1 

+ + i + + “a  + + + taiy  + + + + ya  + i + iya  ma[m]  pasava  ima 
d-92)ipi  + + + ima  + + + avata  + + + + + + + + antar  dahya[va 
k]ara  hama  amaxamata4 


Col.  5. 

1.  l)0at[iy  D]arayava[us  x]saya0iya  2)ima  t[ya  ada]m  aku[na- 
vam]+  + + + tiya  a + +-3)mca  0r[itlyam]5  tiardam  + j.  [pasava  ya]0a 
xsaya-4)0iya  [abavam  Ujvaja  [nama  dajhyaus  hau-5)v  ha- 
[cama  hami^iya]  abava  [I  martiya]  + mamaita  nama  U-6)vaji[ya 
avam  ma0]ista[m  akunavaB]ta  pasava  ada-7)m  ka[ram  fraisa]yam 
U[vajam  I martiya]  Gaubruva  8)nama  [Parsa  man]a  bandaka 
[avamsam]  matfistam  aku-9)navam  pa[sava  hauv  Gau]bruva  [hada 
kar]aasiyava  10)Uvajam  [hamaranam  a]kuna[us  hada]  Uvajiyai- 
bis6  pas-ll)ava  Ga[ubr]uva  + + + + + + [av]ajan  uta  daiy7  marda 
12)uta  [tyamsam]8  ma0[istam]  agarbaya  anaya  abi-13)y  ma[m 
utasi]m  ada[m  ava]janam  pasava  dahya-14)us  [rnana  abava] 

2.  0:lt[iy  Da]rayavaus  xsaya0i-15)ya  afdakaiy  Uvaj]iya  [atar- 


1 apara-ma,  Bartholomae.  See  voc. 

2 tyam  imaisam  martiyfina-88)m  taumam  [ubart]a[m]  par[ibar]a,  Weiss- 
bach. 

3 [ariyjam,  WBn. 

4 [k]ara  hama  amaxahyata,  Weissbach.  See  voc.  11.  88-90  are  supposed 
to  correspond  to  Elam.  Bh.L.  referring  to  duplicate  copies  sent  to  all  lands. 
Cf.  fragment  BE.  8627  found  by  Dr.  Koldewey  at  Babylon  = Bh.  55-58; 
69-72. 

5 ^[itiyam],  WB11.,  better  read  0r[itiyam].  KT  record  traces  of  first  char- 
acter as  0^  or  p;  the  latter  might  be  initial  of  Persian  word  for  fifth. 

6 uvajiyaibis,  KT.  hamiflnyaibis,  ed.  wrongly 

7 uta  daiy,  KT.  uta  sis,  Tolman.  utasim,  Foy. 

8 [tyamsam],  WBn. 


PE  RSI  AX  TEXTS  TRAX  SLATED 


31 


Col.  5. 

1.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  (is)  what  I did  [in  the  third?] 
year  [when  I became]  king;  (there  is)  a province  Susiana  [by 
name];  this  became  estranged  from  me;  [one  man]  + + + mam- 
aita  by  name,  a Susian,  him  they  made  chief;  afterwards  I sent 
forth  (my)  army  to  Susiana;  [one  man]  Gobryas  by  name,  [a 
Persian]  my  subject,  [him]  I made  chief  [of  them];  afterwards 
this  Gobryas  with  an  army  went  to  Susiana;  he  engaged  in 
[battle]  with  the  Susians;  afterwards  Gobryas  smote  + + + and 
annihilated  them  (?)  and  seized  their  chief  and  brought  him  to 
me  and  I slew  him;  afterwards  the  province  [became  mine]. 

2.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Then  the  Susians  [feared]  and  Ahura 
Mazda  gave  them  [into  my  hand];  I offered  thanks;  by  the  grace 
of  Ahura  Mazda,  as  was  my  will,  thus  I did  unto  them. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Whoever  shall  worship  Ahura 
Mazda,  as  long  as  [his  family]  shall  be,  and  life  + + + + + + 

4.  Says  Darius  the  king:  With  (my)  army  I went  to  Scythia; 
unto  Scythia  + + + + the  Tigris1  + + + + + + + + + + unto 
the  sea  + + + I crossed  in  rafts  ( ?);  the  Scythians  I smote;  one 
part  I seized  [and  they  were  brought]  bound  to  me  and  [I  slew] 
them;  + + + Sku(n)kha  by  name,  him  I seized  + + + + there 
another  I made  chief  as  was  my  will;  afterwards  the  province 
became  mine. 

5.  Says  Darius  the  king:  + + + + + not  Ahura  Mazda  + + + + 
I gave  thanks  to  Ahura  Mazda;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda, 
as  was  my  [will,  thus]  I did  unto  them. 

6.  Says  Darius  the  king:  [Whoever]  unto  Ahura  Mazda  shall 
give  worship  [as  long  as  his  family  shall  be]  + + + 

Bh.  a. 

Persian  and  Elamite  over  the  figure  of  Icing  Darius;  Daly  Io- 
nian wanting. 

1.  I (am)  Darius,  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  in  Per- 
sia, king  of  the  countries,  the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  grandson 
of  Arsames,  the  Achaemenide. 


1 KT's  record,  sak'im,  makes  hardly  possible  Foy’s  attractive  supple- 
ment; see  voc.  s.  v.  tigra. 


32 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


sa11]1  uta[s]am  Aurama-16)zda  [mana  dastaya]  a[kunaus]  ayadaiy 
vasna  A-17)urama[zdaha  ya0a]  ma[m  kama  aha  ava]0adis  aku- 
navam 

3.  18)0[atiy  Darayajvaus  [xsaya0]iya  hya  Auramazda-19)m 
ya[dataiy]2  ya[va  tauma  ajhatiy  uta  jlvah-20)ya  + + + + + + + + + + 

ya  + + 

4.  [0ati]y  Darayavaus  xs-21)aya[0iya  hada  kar]a  Sa[kam3 4  adam 
as]  iy  a vara  abiy  Sak-22)am  + + + + + + + + i+  + + + + + m Tigram 
barata-23)ya4  + + + + + + + + ++  + + ++  + iya  abiy  draya5 *  a-24)va 
+ + + + + + + + ah  + + + + + + a pisa  viyatara-25)yam  + + + + + + + + 
Sak[a  av]ajanamG  aniyam  aga-26)rb[ayam  + + + + + bajsta  [anayata 
a]biy  mam  ut-27)as[im  avajanam]  + + sn  + + + + S[kun]xa  nama 
avam  aga-28)rb[ayam]  + + + + y + + + + + + avada  aniyam  ma0- 
29)is[tam  akjanavam  ya[0a  mam  k]ama7  aha  pasava  da-30)h[yaus 
ma]ntl  [abajva 

5.  [0ati]y  Darayavaus  xsaya-31)0i[ya]  + + + + +s  + +a+  + + + + 
,[a  naiy  Auramazd-32)a  + + i + + [A]ura[mazdam  a]yadaiy8  vasna 
Aurama-33)z[daha  ya0a  m]am  [kama  aha  ava0adi]s  akunavam 

6.  0at-34r)i[y  Darayavaus  xs]a[ya0iya  hya]  Auramazdam9 
yadata-35)i[y  yava]  t[auma  ahatiy10  u]ta  jlvahya  uta  36)+  + + + 
++++++ 


Bh.  a. 

1.  l)Adam  Darayavaus  xsaya0iya  vazarka  xsaya-2)0iya  xsaya- 
0iyanam  xsaya0iya  Parsaiy  xs-3)aya0iya  dahyunam  Yistaspa- 
hya  pu0ra  4)Arsamahya  napa  Haxamanisiya 

2.  0atiy  Dara-5)yavaus  xsaya0iya  mana  pita  Y'staspa  V'- 
6)staspahya  pita  Arsama  Arsamahya  pi-7)ta  Ariyaramna  Ariya- 
ramnahya  pita  8)Cispis  Cispais  pita  Haxamanis 

3.  9)0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya0iya  avahya-10)radiy  vayam  Haxa- 


1 [atarsan],  KT. 

2ya[dataiy],  Tolman. 

s [hada  kar]a  sa[kam],  KT. 

4saka  t[yaiy  haumavarga  uta  tyaiy  xauda]m  tigram  bara“t[i]y,  Foy,  hut 
text  confirmed  by  KT. 

5 daraya,  KT.  darayam,  ed.  wrongly.  See  voc. 

°sak[iya  av]ajanam,  KT. 

7ya  + 4.  +[n]ima,  KT. 

8[a]ura[mazdam  ajyadaiy,  Tolman.  + + ura  + + [a]yadaiy,  WB". 

9 [hya]  auramazdam,  WB". 

10  [uta  yava]  t[auma  ahatiy],  WB". 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


33 


2.  Sa3rs  Darius  the  king:  My  father  (is)  Ilystaspes;  the  father 
of  Hystaspes  (is)  A r sanies;  the  father  of  Arsames  (is)  Ariaram- 
nes;  the  father  of  Ariaramnes  (is)  Teispes;  the  father  of  Teispes 
(is)  Achaemenes. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Therefore  we  are  called  Achaemen- 
ides;  from  long  ago  we  have  been  of  ancient  lineage;  from  long 
ago  our  family  have  been  kings. 

4.  Says  Darius  the  king:  8 of  my  family  (there  were)  who 
were  formerly  kings;  I am  the  ninth  (9);  long  aforetime  we  are 
kings. 

Bh.  b. 

Persian , Elamite,  Babylonian  under  prostrate  form. 

This  Gaumata  the  Magian  lied;  thus  he  said:  I am  Bardiya, 
the  son  of  Cyrus;  I am  king. 


Bh.  c. 

Persian , Elamite  over  first  standing  figure;  Babylonian  below. 
This  Afl'ina  lied;  thus  he  said:  I am  king  in  Susiana. 


Bh.  d. 

Persian , Elamite  over  second  standing  figure;  Babylonian  below. 

This  Nidintu-Bel  lied;  thus  he  said:  I am  Nebuchadrezzar,  the 
son  of  Nabu-na’id;  I am  king  in  Babylon. 


Bh.  e. 

Elamite  above  third  standing  figure;  Persian  on  the  garment; 
Babylonian  below. 

This  Phraortes  lied;  thus  he  said:  I am  Khshathrita  of  the 
family  of  Cyaxares;  I am  king  in  Media. 


Bh.  f. 

Persian , Elamite  above  fourth  standing  figure;  Babylonian 

below . 

This  Martiya  lied;  thus  he  said:  I am  Imanish,  king  in  Su- 
siana. 

Bh.  g. 

Persian , Elamite  above  fifth  standing  figure;  Babylonian  below. 

This  Ci0ra(n)takhma  lied;  thus  he  said:  I am  king  in  Sagartia, 
of  the  family  of  Cyaxares. 

3 


34 


PE  RSI  AX  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


manisiya  0ahya-ll)mahy  hacii  paruviyata  a[m]ata  12)amahy 
haca  paruviyata  hya  ama-13)xam  tauma  xsaya0iya  alia 
4.  0a-14)tiy  Darayavaus  xiaya0iya  VIII  ma-15)na  taumaya 
tyaiy  paruva-16)m  xsaya0iya  alia"  adarn  ua-17)vama  IX  duvita- 
paranam1  vayam  x-18)saya0iya  arnahy 


Bh.  b. 

l)Iyam  Gauma-2)ta  hya  magus  a-3)durujiya  4)ava0a  a0aha 
adam  Ba-5)rdiya  amiy  hya  K-6)uraus  pu0ra  adam  xs-7)ava0iya 
amiy 

Bh.  c. 

l)Iyam  A0r-2)ina  adu-3)rujiya  4)ava0a  5)a0aha  a-6)dam  x-7)sa- 
ya0-8)iya  am-9)iy  U-10)vajaiy 

Bh.  d. 

l)Iyam  Xadi"tabaira  2)adurujiya  ava-3)0a  a0aha  adam  Nab- 
4)ukudracara  ami-5)y  hya  Xabunaita-6)hya  pu0ra  adam  x-7)sa- 
ya0iya  amiy  B-8)abirauv 

Bh.  e. 

l)Iyam  Fra-2)vartis  3)aduru-4)jiya  ava-5)0a  a 0a ha  adam  6)Xsa- 
0rita  amiy  7)Uvaxstrahya  8)taumaya  adam  9)xsaya0iya  amiy 
10)Ma-ll)daiy 

Bh.  f. 

l)Iyam  Martiya  a-2)durujiya  a-3)va0a  a0aha  a-4)dam  Imanis 
am-5)iy  Uvajaiy  x-6)s:Iya0i-7)ya 

Bh.  g. 

l)lyam  Ci0ran-2)taxma  ad-3)urujiya  4)ava0a  a-5)0aha  adam 
6)xsaya0i-7)ya  Asaga-8)rtaiy  Uva-9)xstrahya  10)taumay-ll)a2 

Bh.  h. 

l)Iyam  Vahya-2)zdata  adu-3)rujiya  ava-4)0a  a 0a ha  ada-o)m 
Bardiya  a-6)miy  hya  K-7)uraus  pu0ra  8)adam  xsa-9)ya0iya  amiy 

Bh.  i. 

l)Iyam  Arxa  2)aduruj-3)iya  ava0a  4)a0aha  adam  5)Xabuku[dj- 
ra-6)cara  amiy  7)hya  Xabuna-8)itahya  pu-9)0ra  adam  xsa-10)ya- 
0iya  amiy  ll)Bab[i]rauv 

1 duvitaparanam.  See  critical  note  to  Bh.  1,  1.  10. 

2 Reading  of  KT's  cuneiform  text.  Their  transliteration,  however,  has 
ami-8)y  asaga-9)rtaiy  uva-10)xstrahya  ll)taumay-12)a» 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


35 


Bh.  h. 

Persian , Elamite  above  sixth  standing  figure;  Babylonian  below. 

This  Vahyazdata  lied;  thus  he  said:  I am  Bardiya,  the  son  of 
Cyrus;  I am  king. 

Bh.  i. 

Persian , Elamite  above  seventh  standing  figure;  Babylonian 

below. 

This  Arkha  lied;  thus  he  said:  I am  Nebuchadrezzar,  the  son 
of  Nabu-na’id;  I am  king  in  Babylon. 

Bh.  j. 

Persian , Elamite  above  eighth  standing  figure;  Babylonian 

below. 

This  Fr&da  lied;  thus  he  said:  I am  king  in  Margiana. 


Bh.  k. 

Persian , Elamite  above  ninth  standing  figure. 
This  (is)  Sku(n)kha,  the  Scythian. 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  PERSEPOLIS 
Dar.  Pers.  a. 

On  the  door-posts  of  the  tacara , above  sculpture  of  the  king;  Per- 
sian, Elamite , Babylonian. 

Darius  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the  countries, 
the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide,  who  built  this  tacara. 

Dar.  Pers.  b. 

On  the  garment  of  the  king. 

Darius  the  great  king,  the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide. 

Dar.  Pers.  c. 

Repeated  on  the  window  cornice. 

Stone  window  cornice  made  in  the  royal  house  of  King  Darius. 


36 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


Bh.  j. 

l)Iyam  Frada  2)aduru-3)jiya  avaftl  a0aha  4)adam  xsaya0-5)iya 
aruiy  Marga-6)uv 


Bh.  k. 

l)Iyam  Skun-2)xa  hya  Saka 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  PERSEPOLIS 

Dar.  Pers.  a. 

l)Darayavaus  xsayafliya  2)vazarka  xsayatfiya  xsa-3)ya<9iyanam 
xsayafliya  4)dahyunam  Yistaspahy-5)a  pu0ra  Haxamanisiya 
b-6)ya  imam  tacaram  akunaus 

Dar.  Pers.  b. 

Darayavaus  XS  vazarka  Vistaspahya  pu0ra  Haxamanisiya 

Dar.  Pers.  c. 

Ardastana  a0angaina  Darayavahaus  XSbya  vi0iya  karta 

Dar.  Pers.  d. 

x.  1)  Auramazda  vazarka  bya  matfista  bag-2)anam  bauv  Dara- 
yavaum  xsaya0i-3)yam  adada  bausaiy  xsa0ram  fraba-4)ra  vasna 
Auramazdaha  Darayavau-5)s  xsayafliya 

2.  0atiy  Darayavaus  6)xsaya0iya  iyam  dahyaus  Par-7)sa  tyam 
mana  Auramazda  fraba-8)ra  bya  naiba  uvaspa  umarti-9)ya  vasna 
Auramazdaha  manac-10)a  Darayavahaus  xsaya0iyahy-ll)a  baca 
aniyana  naiy  tarsat-12)iy 

3.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsaya-13)0iya  mami  Auramazda  upastam 
14)baratuv  hada  vi0aibis  bagai-15)bis  uta  imam  dahyaum  Aura- 
16)mazda  patuv  baca  hainav-l7)a  baca  dusiyara1  baca  dra-lS)uga 
abiy2  imam  dahyaum  ma  19)ajamiya  ma  ba[i]na  ma  dus-20)iya- 
ram3  [m]a  drauga  aita  adam  21)yanam4  jadiyamiy5  Auramazd- 

1 dusiyara,  Jn. 

2 abiy,  Stolze. 

3dusiyaram,  Jn. 

4yanam,  Jn.  Wrongly  yan  + + in,  ed.  Stolze’s  Phot,  shows  defect  in 
stone,  not  lacuna. 

5 jadiya[m]iy,  Stolze’s  Phot,  jadiyamiy,  Jn.  See  voc. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


Dar.  Pers.  d. 

On  the  south  retaining  wall  of  terrace. 

1.  The  great  Ahura  Mazda,  who  (is)  the  greatest  of  the  gods,1 
he  made  Darius  king;  he  gave  him  the  kingdom;  by  the  grace 
of  Ahura  Mazda  Darius  (is)  king. 

2.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  (is)  the  country  Persia  which 
Ahura  Mazda  gave  me,  which,  beautiful,  possessing  good  horses, 
possessing  ^ood  men,  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  and  (by  the 
achievements)  of  me  Darius  the  king,  does  not  fear  an  enemy. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Let  Ahura  Mazda  bear  me  aid  with 
the  royal2  gods  and  let  Ahura  Mazda  protect  this  country  from 
an  evil  host,  from  famine,3  from  Deceit;  may  not  an  evil  host 
nor  famine  nor  Deceit  come  upon  this  country;  this  favor  I 
pray  of  Ahura  Mazda  with  the  royal2  gods;  this  let  Ahura  Mazda 
give  me  with  the  royal2  gods. 

Dar.  Pers.  e. 

On  the  south  retaining  vjall  of  terrace. 

1.  I (am)  Darius  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  many 
countries,  the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide. 

2.  Says  Darius  the  king:  By  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  these 
(are)  the  countries  which  I have  brought  into  my  possession  with 
the  help  of  this  Persian  army,  (and)  which  feared  me  (and) 
brought  to  me  tribute;  Susiana,  Media,  Babylonia,  Arabia,  As- 
syria, Egypt,  Armenia,  Cappadocia,  Sparda,  the  Ionians  who 
(are)  of  the  main  land  (and)  those  who  (are)  on  the  sea,  and  the 
countries  which  (are)  on  the  east,  Sagartia,  Parthia,  Drangiana, 
Aria,  Bactria,  Sogdiana,  Chorasmia,  Sattagydia,  Arachosia, 
India,  Ga(n)dara,  Scythia,  the  Macae. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king:  If  thus  thou  shalt  think,  “May  I 
not  fear  an  enemy,”  protect  this  Persian  people;  if  the  Persian 
people  shall  be  protected,  Welfare  for  a long  time  undisturbed 
will  through  Ahura  descend  upon  this  royal  house. 


JCf.  Turfan  MSS.,  bagan  bagiystom;  also  smai  bayfiniq  'azunt  ’ista, 
ve  are  sons  of  God,  Neutest.  Bruchstiicke  in  soghdischer  Spraclie,  Muller, 
SBAW,  1907. 

2 See  voc.  s.  v.  vii0aibaisa. 

3Cf.  Turfan  MSS.,  dusyariy,  need. 


38 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


22)amhada  vi^ibis1  bagaibis  a-23)i[tamai]y2  [Aujramazda  dadat- 
24)u[v  hada  vi]0“[i]bis  bagaibis 

Dar.  Pers.  e. 

1.  l)Adam  Darayavaus  xsayafliya  vaz-2)arka  xsayafliya  xSaya- 
0iyana-3)m  xsayatfiya  dahyunam  tvai-4)sam  parunam  Vistaspa- 
hya  5)pu0ra  Haxamanisiya 

2.  0atiy  Dara-6)yavaus  xsayatfiya  vasna  Aurama-7)zdaha  ima 
daliyava  tya  adam  8)adarsiy3  hada  ana  Parsa  ka-9)ra  tya  hacarna 
atarsa11  mana  biij-10)im  abaran  Uvaja  Mada  Babiru-ll)s  Arabaya 
A0ura  Mudray-12)a  Armina  Katpatuka  Sparda  Ya-13)una  tyaiy 
uskahya  uta  tya-14)iy  drayahya4 *  uta  daliyava  t-15)ya  parau- 
[va]iya5  Asagarta  Parflava  Zran-16)ka6  Haraiva  Baxtris  Sug[u]da 
Uv-17)arazmiya  ©atagus  Harauvatis  H-18)indus  Gandara  Saka 
Maka 

3.  0iltiy  19)Darayavaus  xsayafliya  yadiy  2O)ava0a  maniyahay7 
haca  aniya-21)nii  ma  [ta]rsam  imam  Parsam  karam  padi-22)y 
yadiy  kara  Parsa  pata8  ahatiy  hya  23)duvais[ta]m  siyatis  axsata 
hauvci-24)y  Aura  nirasatiy  abiy  imam  vi0am 

Xerx,  Pers.  a [aa,  ab,  ac,  ad]. 

1.  l)Baga  vazarka  Auramazda  hya  imam  bumim  a-2)da  hya 
avam  asmanam  ada  hya  martiyam  3)adfi  hya  siyatim  ada  marti- 
yahya  hya  4)Xsayarsam  xsayafliyam  akunaus  aivam  5)parunam 
xsayafliyam  aivam  parunam  fram-6)ataram 

2.  adam  Xsayarsa  xsayafliya  vazarka  7)xsaya0iya  xsayafliva- 
nam  xsayatfiya  dahy-8)unam9  paruv  zananam  xsayafliya  ahyay- 
9)a10  biimiya  vazarkaya  duraiy  apiy  Da-l0)rayavahausn  xsayatfi- 
yahya  pu0ra  Haxamanis-ll)iya12 

1 vilMbis  read  vi^aibis  or  viflibis.  See  voo. 

2ai[tamai]y,  Ja. 

8adarsiy,  Bartliolomae.  See  voc. 

4 darayahya,  ed.  wrongly. 

6 Stone-cutter’s  blunder  for  paravaiy.  J n.  records  a blank  space  as  oc- 
cupying the  lacuna;  so  Westergaard. 

6zaranka,  ed. 

7 maniyahay,  Bartholomae.  maniyahy,  ed. 

8 Jn.  records  traces  of  the  word-divider  after  pata,  where  Westergaard 
believed  was  a blank  space;  cf.  Stolze’s  Phot. 

®da-8)hyunam,  ac,  ad. 

Mahya-9)ya,  ac,  ad. 

11d-10)arayavahaus,  ac,  ad. 

12 written  wrongly  for  haxamanisiya.  -ll)Siya,  ac,  ad. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


39 


Xerx.  Pers.  a [aa,  ab,  ac,  ad]. 

Four  times  repeated  on  propylaea  of  Xerxes,  above  the  scidptured 
winged  bulls / Persian , Elamite , Babylonian. 

1.  A great  god  (is)  Ahura  Mazda  who  created  this  earth,  who 
created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who  created  welfare 
for  man,  who  made  Xerxes  king,  one  king  of  many,  one  lord 
of  many. 

2.  I (am)  Xerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the 
countries  possessing  many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great 
earth  far  and  wide,  the  son  of  Darius  the  king,  the  Achaemenide. 

3.  Says  Xerxes  the  great  king:  By  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda, 
this  colonnade  (for  the  representatives)  of  all  countries  I made; 
much  else  (that  is)  beautiful  (was)  done  throughout  Persia  which 
I did  and  which  my  father  did;  whatever  work  seems  beautiful, 
all  that  we  did  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda. 

4.  Says  Xerxes  the  king:  Let  Ahura  Mazda  protect  me  and 
my  kingdom  and  what  (was)  done  by  me  and  what  (was)  done 
by  my  father,  (all)  this  let  Ahura  Mazda  protect. 


Xerx.  Pers.  b. 

On  wall  beside  the  magnificent  seal ptured  staircase  of  the  Column 
Ilall  of  Xerxes. 

1.  A great  god  (is)  Ahura  Mazda  who  created  this  earth,  who 
created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who  created  welfare 
for  man,  who  made  Xerxes  king,  one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of 
many. 

2.  I (am)  Xerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the 
countries  possessing  many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great 
earth  far  and  wide,  the  son  of  Darius  the  king,  the  Achaemenide. 

3.  Says  Xerxes  the  great  king:  What  (was)  done  by  me  here 
and  what  (was)  done  by  me  afar,  all  this  I did  by  the  grace  of 
Ahura  Mazda;  let  Ahura  Mazda  protect  me  with  the  gods,  and 
my  kingdom  and  what  (was)  done  by  me. 


40 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


3.  0atiy  Xsayarsa  xsayafliya  vasna  12)Auramazdaha  imam  du- 
var0im  visadahyum1  13)adam  akunavam  vasiy  aniyasciy  naibam2 
14)kartam  ana  Parsa  tya  adam  akunavam  15)utamaiy  tya  pita 
akunaus  tyapatiy  ka-16)rtam3  vainataiy  naibam  ava  visam  vasna 
A-17)uramazdaha4  akuma 

4.  0atiy  Xsayarsa  18)xsaya0iya5  mam  Auramazda  patuv  uta- 
mai-19)y  xsa0ram6  uta  tya  man  a kartam  uta  tyamai-20)y  pi0ra7 8 
kartam  avasciy  Auramazda  patuv. 

Xerx.  Pers.  b. 

1.  l)Baga  vazarka  Auramazda  2)kya  imam  bumim  3)ada  hya 
avam  asma-4)nam  ada  hya  martiya-5)m  ada  hya  siyati-6)m  ada 
martiyahya  7)hya  Xsayarsam  xsa-8)ya0iyam  akunaus  ai-9)vam 
parunam  xsaya$-10)iyam  aivam  parunam  ll)framataram 

2.  adam  X-12)sayarsa  xsayafliya  13)vazarka  xsayafliya  xs- 
14)aya0iyanam  xsaya0-15)iya  dahyunam  paruvza-16)nanam  xsa- 
yatfiya  17)ahiyaya  bumiya  va-18)zarkaya  duraiy  a-19)piy  Dara- 
yavahaus  xs-2O)aya0iyahya  pu0ra  Hax-21)amanisiya 

3.  0atiy  X-22)sayarsa  xsayafliva  va-23)zarka  tya  mana  kartam 
24)ida  uta  tyamaiy  25)apataram  kartam  ava  v-26)isam  vasna 
Auramazda-27)ha  akunavam  mam  Aura-28)mazda  patuv  hada 
ba-29)gaibis  utfimaiy  xsa0ra-3O)m  uta  tyamaiy  kartam 

Xerx.  Pers.  ca,  cb.s 

1.  l)[l]Baga  vazarka  Auramazda  hya  [2]imam  bumim  2)ada 
hya  [3]avam  asmanam  ada  hya  [4]marti-3)yam  ada  hya  siy[5]a- 
tim  ada  martiyahya  4)[6]hya  Xsayarsam  XSm  aku[7]naus  aivam 
pa-5)runam  XS[8]m  aivam  parunam  fram[9]ataram 

2.  6)adam  Xsayarsa  [toJXS  vazarka  XS  XSanam  XS  7)[ll]da- 
hyunam  paruv  zana[12]nam  XS  ahyaya  b-8)uini[13]ya,  vazarkaya 
duraiy  a[14]piy  Darayava-9)haus  XShv[15]a  pu0ra  Haxamanisiya 

3.  0[lG]atiy  X-10)sayarsa  XS  vazar[17]ka  vasna  Aurahya  maz- 
daha  [18]i-ll)ma  hadis  Daravavaus  XS  [19]akunaus  hya  mana 

1 visadahyu-13)m,  ac,  ad. 

2naiba-14)m,  ac,  ad. 

3 kar-16)tam,  ac,  ad. 

4au-17)ramazdaha,  ac,  ad. 

5 xs-18)ayafliya,  ac. 

6 utamaiy  19)xsadram,  ac.  utama-19)iy,  ad. 

7 tyamaiy  20)piflra,  ac.  tyama-20)iy,  ad. 

8 Square  brackets  [ ] inclose  the  line-numbers  of  Xerx.  Pers.  cb,  db,  eb, 
and  Art.  Pers.  b. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


41 


Xerx.  Pers.  ca,  cb. 

Repeated ca  on  huge  door-jamb  andcb  beside  the  south  stairs  of 
tacara  of  Darius / Persian , Elamite , Babylonian. 

1.  A great  god  (is)  Ahura  Mazda  who  created  this  earth,  who 
created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who  created  welfare 
for  man,  who  made  Xerxes  king,  one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of 
many. 

2.  I (am)  Xerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the 
countries  possessing  many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great 
earth  far  and  wide,  son  of  Darius  the  king,  the  Achaemenide. 

3.  Says  Xerxes  the  great  king:  By  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda 
this  dwelling  Darius  the  king  made  who  (was)  my  father;  let 
Ahura  Mazda  protect  me  with  the  gods,  and  what  (was)  done  by 
me  and  what  (was)  done  by  my  father  Darius  the  king,  (all)  this 
let  Ahura  Mazda  protect  with  the  gods. 

Xerx.  Pers.  da,  db. 

Repeatedda  on  two  slabs  and dh  on  wall  beside  the  steps  in  the 
palace  of  Xerxes;  Persian , Elamite , Babylonian. 

1.  A great  god  (is)  Ahura  Mazda  who  created  this  earth,  who 
created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who  created  welfare 
for  man,  who  made  Xerxes  king,  one  king  of  many,  one  lord 
of  many. 

2.  I (am)  Xerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the 
countries  possessing  many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great 
earth  far  and  wide,  son  of  Darius  the  king,  the  Achaemenide. 

3.  Says  Xerxes  the  great  king:  By  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda 
this  dwelling  I made;  let  Ahura  Mazda  protect  me  with  the 
gods,  and  my  kingdom  and  what  (was)  done  by  me. 

Xerx.  Pers.  ea,  eb. 

Above  the  sculpture  of  the  king , repeated  on  door-posts ea  on  north 
andeb  on  east ; Persian , Elamite , Babylonian. 

Xerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  the  son  of  Darius  the 
king,  the  Achaemenide. 


42 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


12)pit[20]a  mam  Auramazda  patu[21]v  hada  baga-13)ibis  uta 
t[22]yamaiy  kartam  uta  tyamai[23]y  14)pi0ra  Darayavahaus 
XShy[24]a  kartam  avasciy  15)Auramaz[25]da  patuv  hada  bagaibis 

Xerx.  Pers.  da,  db.1 

1.  l)[l]Baga  vazarka  Auramazda  [2]hya  i-2)mam  bumirn 
[3]ada  hya  ayam  3)asma[4]nam  ada  hya  martiya-4)[5]m  ada  hya 
siyati[6]m  ada  mar-5)tiyahya  [7]hya  Xsayarsam  x-6)sa[8]yafliyam 
akunaus  ai[9]vam  par-7)unam  xsaya0[lO]iyam  aiyam  paru-8)nam 
[lljframataram 

2.  adam  X[12]sayars-9)a  xsayafliya  [13]yazarka  xsayatfiya 
lO)xs[14]aya0iyanam  xsaya0[15]iya  dahy-ll)unam  paruvza[16]na- 
nam  xsayafliya  12)[17]ahiyaya  bumiya  va[lS]zarkaya  13)duraiy 
a[19]piy  Darayavahaus  xs-14)[2O]aya0iyahva  pu0ra  IIax[21]a- 
mani[s]iya 

3.  15)0atiy  X[22]sayarsa  xsayafliya  [23]va-16)zarka  vain  a 
Auramaz[2  t]daba  ima  had-17)is  adam  [25]akunavam  mam  Au- 
ramaz-18)[26]da  patuv  hada  bagai[27']bis  utama-19)iv  xsatf'am 
[28] uta  tyamaiy  kartam 

Xerx.  Pers.  ea,  eb.1 

l)[l]Xsayarsa  xsayafliya  vazar-2)[2]ka  xsayafliya  xsfiyafliya- 
3)[3]nam  Darayavahaus  xsaya0-4)iya[4]hya  pu0ra  Haxamanisiya 

Art.  Pers.  a [aa,  ac,  ad],  b.1 

1.  1)[1]  Baga  vazarka  Auramazd[2]a  hya  2)imam  bumam  [3]a- 
da  hya  a-3)vam2  asman[4]am  ada  hya  marti-4)yam  [5]ada  hya 
sayatam3  a[6]da  mart-5)ihya4 5  hya  ma[7]m  Artaxsa0ra  xsaya-6)0i- 
[8]ya6  akunaus  aivam  parnuva[9]naama6  7)xsava0iyam  aiva[10]m 
p“ruuvanaama  6 8)framataram7 

2.  [ll]0atiy  Artaxsa0ra  9)xs[12]aya0iya8  vazarka  xsaya[13]0iya 
lO)xsaya0iyanam  [14]xsaya0iya  ll)DAHyunam  [15]xsaya0iya 

1 Square  brackets  [ ] inclose  the  line-numbers  of  Xerx.  Pers.  cb,  db,  eb, 
and  Art.  Pers.  b. 

2 hya  3)avam.  ac. 

ssaytam  (for  syatam).  Marquart,  Foy. 

4 thus  written  for  martiyahya.  -5)ya,  ac. 

5xsaya0i-6)ya,  ac. 

6 thus  written  for  parunam.  See  voc. 

7 written  thus  for  framataram. 

8x-9)saya0iya,  ac. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


43 


Art.  Pers.  a [aa,  ac,  ad],  b. 

Repeated  on  three  slabs  at  north  of  palace  of  Artaxerxes  and 
beside  the  westei'n  steps  of  tacara  of  Darius. 

1.  A great  god  (is)  Aliura  Mazda  who  created  this  earth,  who 
created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who  created  welfare 
for  man,  who  made  me,  Artaxerxes,  king,  one  king  of  many, 
one  lord  of  many. 

2.  Says  Artaxerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of 
countries,  king  of  this  earth:  I (am)  the  son  of  Artaxerxes,  the 
king;  Artaxerxes  (was)  the  son  of  Darius  the  king;  Darius  (was) 
the  son  of  Artaxerxes  the  king;  Artaxerxes  (was)  the  son  of 
Xerxes  the  king;  Xerxes  (was)  the  son  of  Darius  the  king; 
Darius  was  the  son  of  Hystaspes  by  name;  Hystaspes  was  the 
son  of  Arsames  by  name,  the  Ackaemenide. 

3.  Says  Artaxerxes  the  king:  This  stone  staircase  (was)  made 
by  me. 

4.  Sa}rs  Artaxerxes  the  king;  Let  Aliura  Mazda  and  the  god 
Mithra  protect  me  and  this  country  and  what  (was)  done  by  me. 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  NAKS-I-RUSTAM 

On  one  of  four  similar  Achaemenidan  tombs  at  NaTcs-i-  Rustam 
near  Persepolis , cruciform  with  the  entrance  in  the  tetrastyle 
transverse  sect  ion / above  is  a double  row  of  fiejures  supporting 
platform  where  Darius  stands  before  a burning  altar ; higher 
up  is  the  divine  symbol ; Persian , Elamite , Babylonian: 

Dar.  NRa. 

1.  A great  god  is  Aliura  Mazda  who  created  this  earth,  who 
created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who  created  welfare 
for  man,  who  made  Darius  king,  one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of 
many. 

2.  I (am)  Darius  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the 
countries  possessing  all  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great  earth 
far  and  w ide,  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide,  a Persian,  the 
son  of  a Persian,  an  Aryan,  of  Aryan  lineage. 


44 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


ahyaya  [16]BU  Aliya  ada-12)m  Artaxsa0ra  x[17]saya-13)0iya1 
puC'a  Artaxsa0ra  [18]Darayavau-14)s  xsayafliya  [19]pu0ra  Dara- 
yavaus A-15)rtaxsa[2OJ0ra2  xsayafliya  pu0ra  Arta[21]xsa-16)0ra3 
Xsayarsa  xsava[22]0iya  pu0ra  X-17)sayarsa  Dara[23]yavaus  xsii- 
ya0-18)iya  pu0ra  [24]  Darayavaus  Yistaspa-19)hy[25]a  nfima  pu0ra 
V ‘staspahy [26] a 20)Arsama  nama  pu0ra  Ha[27]xamanisi-21)ya 

3.  0atiy  A[28]rtaxsa0ra  xsaya0i-22)ya  [29]imam4 *  ustasanam 
a0a”ga[3O]nam6  ma-23)m  upa6  mam  [31]karta 

4.  0atiy  Arta-24)xsa0r[32]a7  xsaya0iya  mam  Aura[33]mazda8 
25)uta  AP0ra  baga  pa[34]tuv  uta  ima-26)m9 10 11  DAHyum  [35] uta 
tya  mam  karta 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  NAKS-I-RU  ST  AM 

Dar.  NRa. 

1.  l)Baga  vazarka  Auramazda  hya  im-2)am  bumim  ada 
hya  avam  asm-3)anam  ada  hya  martiyam  ada  k-4)ya  siyatim  ada 
martiyahya  5)hya  Dfirayavaum  xsaya0iyam  ak-6)unaus  aivam 
paruuvanaama  10  xsaya0-7)iyam  aivam  paruuvanaama  10  framata- 
8)ramn 

2.  adain  Darayavaus  xsaya0iya  va-9)zarka  xsaya0iya  xsaya0i- 
yanam  lO)xsaya0iya  dahyunam  vispazana-ll)nam  xsaya0iya 
ahyaya  bumi-12)ya  vazarkaya  duraiapiy12  Yist[a]s-13)pahya  pu0ra 
Ilaxamanisiya  Parsa  [P]-14)arsahya  pu0'a  Ariya  Ariya  c[i]-15)0ra 

3.  0atiy  Darayavaus  xsii[ya]-16)0iya  vasna  Auramazdaha  im[a] 
17)dahyava  tya  ada[m]  agarbayafm]  18)apataram  haca  Parsa 
adamsam  19)patiyaxsayaiy13  mana  bajim  aba[ra"]  20)tyasfun14  ha- 
cama  a0ah[ya  ava  a]-21)kunavan  datam  tya  mana  ava[d]is  22)ada- 

1 xsa-13)ya0iya,  ac. 

2arta-15)xsa0ra,  ac-. 

8artaxsa/?ra  16)xsayarsa,  ac. 

422)imam,  ad. 

fi  thus  written  for  aflangainam. 

6 mam  23)upa,  ad. 

7 artax-24)sa^a,  ad. 

8 auramazd-25)a,  ad. 

9i-26)mam,  ad. 

10  thus  written  for  parunam.  See  roc. 

11  thus  written  for  framataram. 

12  duraiapiy,  Stolze’s  Phot. 

18  patiyaxsayaiy,  Stolze's  Phot.  See  voc. 

14  h(?)  tyasam,  Stolze's  Phot.,  showing  a careless  stroke  of  stone-cutter. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


45 


3.  Says  Darius  the  king:  By  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  these 
(are)  the  provinces  which  I seized  afar  from  Persia;  I ruled 
them;  they  brought  tribute  to  me;  what  was  commanded  to 
them  by  me,  [this]  they  did;  the  law  which  (is)  mine^  that  was 
established  for  them;  Media,  Susiana,  Parthia,  Aria,  Bactria, 
Sogdiana,  Chorasmia,  Drangiana,  Arachosia,  Sattagydia,  Ga(n)- 
dara,.  India,  the  Amyrgian  Scythians,  the  pointed-capped  Scy- 
thians, Babylon,  Assyria,  Arabia,  Egypt,  [Armenia],  Cappa- 
docia, Sparda,  Ionia,  the  Scythians  beyond  the  sea,  Skudra, 
the  sea-fai’ing  (?)x  Ionians,  the  Pu(n)tians,  Kushians,  Maxyes, 
Ivarkians. 

4.  Says  Darius  the  king:  Ahura  Mazda,  when  he  saw  this 
earth  in  commotion,  afterwards  gave  it  to  me;  he  made  me  king; 
I am  king;  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  I established  it  on  (its) 
foundation;  what  I commanded  to  them,  this  they  did  as  was 
my  will.  If  thou  shalt  think:  “something  limited  in  number 
are  these  countries  which  Darius  the  king  held,”  look  at  the 
picture  (of  those)  who  are  bearing  my  throne,  thus  thou  wilt 
know'  them;  then  it  will  be  known  to  thee  (that)  the  spear  of  a 
Persian  man  hath  gone  forth  afar;  then  it  will  be  known  to  thee 
(that)  a Persian  man  fought  his  foe  far  from  Persia. 

5.  Says  Darius  the  king:  This  (is)  what  (was)  done;  all  this  by 
the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  I did;  Ahura  Mazda  bore  me  aid 
while  I was  doing  my  deeds;  let  Ahura  Mazda  protect  me  from 
evil  and  my  royal  house  and  this  country;  this  I pray  of  Ahura 
Mazda;  this  let  Ahura  Mazda  give  me. 

• 6.  O man,  what  (is)  the  precept1 2  of  Ahura  Mazda,  may  it  not 
seem  to  thee  repugnant;  do  not  leave  the  true3  path;  do  not  sin. 


Dar.  NRb. 

1.  A great  god  is  Ahura  Mazda  who  + + + + + + + created 
welfare  for  man  + + + made  + + + + + + + + + + Darius  the 
king  + + + + + + + + + + + 


1See  voc.  s.  v.  takabara. 

3Cf.  Turf  an  MSS.,  Qatriyonan  v&  ‘istratiyot&n  ’aj  Pilatis  fram;tn  ’oh 
padgrift,  as  for  the  centurions  and  soldiers  a command  was  received  for 
them  from  Pilate. 

3Cf.  Turf  an  MSS.,  rast,  true:  rSsteft  bagpuhar  ’ast,  the  son  of  God  is 
truth,  M.  18. 


46 


PE  RSI  AX  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


riy1  Mftda  Uvaja  Parflava  [Harai]-23)va  Baxtris  Suguda  Uvara- 
[zm]-24)is  Zranka2  Harauvatis  ©atagu[s  Gan]-25)dara  Hindus  Saka 
Haumavar[ka3  Sa]-26)ka  Tigraxauda  Babir[us  A]-27)0ura  Ara- 
baya  Mudraya  [Armina]  28)Katpatuka  Sparda  Yauna  Saka  tyai[y 
ta]-29)radraya  Skudra  Yauna  Takabara  Pun[tiy]-30)a4  Kusiya 
Maciya  Karka 

4.  0atiy D-31)arayavaus  xsayafliya  Auramaz[da  ya0]-32)a  avaina 
imam  bumim  yau  + + + +5  33)pasavadim  mana  frabara  ma[m 
xsa]-34)ya0iyam  akunaus  adam  xsa[ya0]iya  35)amiy  vasna  Au- 
ramazdah[a]  a-36)damsim  gadava  niyasadayam  [tya]sa-37)m  adam 
aflaham  ava  akunava"6  [ya0a]  mam  38)kama  aha  yadipatiy7  man- 
iya[ha]-39)y8  ciyakaram9  a[va10  dahy]a[va]  40)tya  Daraya[va]us 
[x]saya[0]iya  41)adaraya  patikaram  clidiy  [tya]i[y  mana]  g-42)a0- 
um  barantiy  [avadja11  xsnas[ah(i)dis]  43)adataiy  azda  bava[t]iy 
Par[sa]h[ya]  44)martiyahya  duraiy12  ar[sti]s  pa-45)ragmata  ada- 
taiy  azda  ba[v]ati-46)yParsa  martiya  durayapiy13  [hacja  Pa-47)rsa 
hamaram  patiyajata 

5.  0a[t]iy  Da-48)rayavaus  xsayafliya  aita  t[ya]  karta-49)m  ava 
visam  vasna  Auramazdaha  ak-50)unavam  Auramazdamaiy  up- 
a[s]tam  aba-51)ra  yilta  kartam  akunafvam  ma]m  A-52)uramazda 
patuv  haca  sara+14  utama-53)iy  vi0am  uta  imam  dahyaum  aita 
ada-54)m  Auramazdam  jadivamiy  aitama-55)iy  Auramazda 
dadatuv 

6.  56)martiya  hya  Auramazdak-57)a  framana  hauvtaiy  gas- 
58)ta  ma  0adaya  pa0im  59)tyam  rastam  ma  60)avarada  ma 
star ava1 5 


iadaraya,  Foy. 

2zara,ika,  ed. 

8 haumavar[ka],  see  voc. 

4pu[tiy]a,  ed. 

syau[dantim],  Bartholomae.  yu[diya],  WB>.  yauf*  + +,  WB".  See  voc. 

6akunavan,  Bartholomae.  akunavanta,  ed. 

7yadipatiy,  Stolze’s  Phot.  yadipad[i]y,  ed.  wrongly. 

8maniya[ha]y,  Stolze’s  Phot.  mani[yahy  t]ya,  ed. 

9 ciyankaram,  ed.  See  voc. 

10a[va],  ed. 

11  [avad]a,  Stolze’s  Phot. 

^duraiy,  Stolze’s  Phot. 

18  durayapiy,  Stolze’s  Phot. 

14  sara,  J11.  sarana,  Justi.  gasta,  Foy.  See  voc. 

lsstarava,  Bartholomae,  WB".  stakava,  WB«.  See  voc. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


47 


2.  Says  Darius  the  king:  By  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  + + 
+ + done  by  me  4.  + + + ++  + + ++  + ++  + + + + + + + + 

Dar.  NRc. 

Gobryas,  a Patischorian,  spear-bearer  of  Darius  the  king. 

Dar.  NRd. 

Aspathines,  bow-bearer  (?),*  a server  of  the  arrows  (?)1 2  of 
Darius  the  king. 

Dar.  NRe. 

These  (are)  the  Maxyes. 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  SUSA 
Dar.  Sus.  a. 

On  tablet  now  in  Louvre. 

[Iam  Darius  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  countries,  ] 
son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide.  Says  Darius  the  king  + + 
+ + + + this  I did  + + + + I give  due  reverence  ( ?). 

Dar.  Sus.  b. 

On  tablet  now  in  Louvre. 

[I  am  Darius  the  great  king,  king  of]  kings,  king  of  coun- 
tries, king  of  this  earth,  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide. 

Art.  Sus.  a. 

On.  four  pedestals  of  Column  LLallj  Persian , Elamite , 
Babylonian. 

Says  Artaxerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  coun- 
tries, king  of  this  earth,  the  son  of  Darius  the  king:  Darius 
(was)  the  son  of  Artaxerxes  the  king;  Artaxerxes  (was)  the 


1 va0rabara,  see  voc. 

2 See  voc.  s.  v.  darayanta. 


48 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


Dar.  NRb. 

1.  l)Baga  vazarka  Auramazda  hya  ada  + + + + + + + 2)+  + + + 
+ tya  + + + + + ada  si-3)yatim  martiyahya  + + [ak]u[naus]  +-4)+ 
aruvastam  upariy  [Daraya]vau[m]  xsa-5)ya0iyam  + + + + + 

2.  0atiy  D[arayava]us  x[sa-6)ya]0iya  vasna  Auramazd[aha]  + + 
+ + ^ai  [tam]  + + i )[ma]iy  tya  + + j.  + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 
+ + + 4.  darsam  + + + + + + + Aujramazda]  + + + + + + + darsam  + + + + 


Dar.  NRc. 

l)Gaubruva  Patisuvaris  Dara-2)yavahaus  xsayatfiyahya  arsti- 
bara 

Dar.  NRd. 

l)Aspacana  va0rabaraa  Darayavahaus  xs-2)aya0iyahya  isu- 
varu2  darayanta3 

Dar.  NRe. 

Iyam4  Maciya 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  SUSA 

Day.  Sus.  a. 

l)[Adam  Darayavaus  XS  vazarka  XS  XSya]na[m  2)X§  dah- 
yunarn  Visjtaspahya  pu0ra  Ha-3)[xamanisiya  0a]tiy  Darayavaus 
X§4)+  + + + + + + ++  t + + + + + + ava  akunavam  tya  5)+  + + + 
+ + + + + + + + uhaya  fraSam  y(  ?)adayamaiy5 

Dar.  Sus.  b. 

l)[Adam  Darayava-2)us  xsayatfiya  3)vazarka  xs]a[ya-4)0iya  xs]- 
aya0i-5)[yanam]  xsaya-6)[0iya]  dahyuna-7)[m  xsa]ya0iya  8)[ahya]- 
yay6  9)[bumiy]a  Vi[st]a-10)[spahy]a  pu0ra  ll)[Haxama]nisiya 

Art.  Sus.  a. 

V V V V 

l)©atiy  Artaxsa07i  XS  vazarka  XS  XSyanam  XS  DAHyunam 
XS  ahyaya  EUMIyil  Daravavausahya7  XShya  pu0ra  D-2)araya- 
vausahya  Artaxsa0rahya  XShya  pu0ra  Artaxsa^ahya  Xsayarca- 

1 vaD#rabara,  Justi. 

2isuvam,  Bartholomae.  isunarn.  WB. 

8darayata,  Foy.  dasyama,  Justi. 

4imaya  = imaiy,  Bartholomae. 

s0adayamaiy,  Weissbach.  y(?)adayamaiy,  Tolman. 

6[ahya]yay  [bumiy]a,  Foy;  stone-cutter's  blunder  for  ahyaya. 

7 darayavaus-hya,  artaxsa^a-hya,  etc.,  Marquart. 


PE  RSI  AX  TEXTS  TR  AX  SLATED 


49 


son  of  Xerxes  the  king;  Xerxes  (was)  the  son  of  Darius  the 
king;  Darius  was  the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide;  this 
apadana  Darius,  my  ancestor  made;  [later  under  Artaxerxes  my 
grandfather  it  was  burned;  By  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda,  Ana- 
hita  and  Mithra  I built  this  apadana;  may  Ahura  Mazda,  Ana- 
hita  and  Mithra  protect  me].1 

Art.  Sus.  b. 

On  'pedestal  of  column , noio  in  Louvre. 

I (am)  Artaxerxes,  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,2  the  king, 
the  son  of  Darius  the  king. 

Art.  Sus.  c. 

On  stone  f ragment,  now  in  Louvre. 

+ + + + the  Achaemenide.  Says  Artaxerxes  the  great  king, 
king  of  kings,  king  of  countries,  king  of  this  earth:  this  dwell- 
ing and  this  + + + + stone  window-cornice  ? + + + + 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  SUEZ 

^Memorial  of  completion  of  canal  from  A7  le  to  Red  Sea / on  stele 
found  near  Shaluf  et-Terraheh  at  the  133d  Jdlometer  of  Suez 
Carnal. 

Sz.  a. 

Between  two  standing  figures. 

Darius. 


Sz.  b. 

Persian  at  right  of  the  figures,’  at  left  Elamite  and  Babylonian . 

Darius  the  great  king,  [king  of  kings,  king  of  countries,  king 
of]  this  great  [earth],  the  son  [of  Hystaspes],  the  Achaemenide. 


1 Supplied  from  Elam,  version;  cf.  Foy,  Die  Neuelamische  Inschrift, 
Art.  Sus.  a,  WZKM,  19,  277  ff. 

2 In  1895  I copied  the  original  and  my  notes  show  XSyana  for  XSyanam 

4 


50 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


hya  XShya  pu0ra  Xsayarcahya  Dara-3)yavausahya  XShya  pu0ra 
Darayavausahya  Vistaspahya  pu0ra  Haxamanfijsiya1  imam  apa- 
dana  Darayavaus  apanyakama  ak-4)unas  ab(i)ypara  [u]pa  Arta- 
[xsafl'am  nyajkam2  + + + + [An(a)]h(i)ta[hya  u]ta  [M‘]0ra[hya] 
+ + + + da  + + + m + a + + + AURAMAZDA  A-5)n(a)h(i)ta  ut[a 
M’]0ra  + + + + + + + + 

Art.  Sus.  b. 


Adam  Artaxsa0ra  XS  vazarka  XS  XSyana  XS  Darayavaus 
XShya  pu0ra 

Art.  Sus.  c. 


+++++++++++++++++++  + + + + + + + + + + + + 
l)[Hax]amanisi[ya  flatiy  Artaxsa0ra]  2)xsaya0iya  va[zarka  xsa- 
yatfiya  x]-3)saya0iyanam  xsaya[0iya  dahyun]-4)am  xsayafliya 
ahyaya  [bumiya  i]-5)mam  kadis  uta  imam  + + + + 6)canam3  tya 
a0a”gainam  taJ.  + + + T)+  + + + + + + Au[ramazda]  + + + + 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  SUEZ 

Sz.  a. 

D [a]ra[ya]  vau[s] 

Sz.  b. 

V V V V 

l)[Dara]yavaus  XS  vazarka  2)[XS  XSyanam  XS  dahy-3)unam 
XS  ahyajya  4)[bumiya  vazarkajya  5)[Vistaspahya]  pu-6)[0ra] 
Haxa[manisi]ya 

Sz.  c. 

1.  l)[Baga]  vazarka  Auramazda  hya  avam  asmanam  ada  hya 
imam  bu-2)mim4  ada  hya  [marjtiyam  ad[a]  h[ya  s]iyatim  ada  mar- 
tiyaky-3)a  hya  Darayavaum  XSyam  akunaus4  hya  D[a]rayava- 
haus  XSyahya  xsa0ra-4)m  frabara  tya  vazarkam  tya  [uvaspam 
u]mar[ti]yam 

2.  adam  Darayavaus  5)XS  vazarka  XS  XSyanam  XS  dahyu- 
nam  v[ispazan]anam4  [XS]  ahyay-6)a4  bumiya  vazarka ya  duraiv 
apiy  Vistas[pahya4  p]u0ra  Ha-7)xamanisiya 

Mims  written  for  haxiimanisiya. 

2abyapara  [ujpa  arta[xsa0ram  nyajkam  [+  + + vasna  AURA  MAI)  Alia 
An(a)]h(i)ta[hya  u]ta  [M(i)]0ra[hya  imam  apa]da[na  adajm  a[kuna]  AU- 
RAMAZDA  An(ii)h(i)ta  ut[a]  M(i)0ra  [mam  patuv  haca  gasta  uta  imam  tya 
akuna],  Foy.  I would  rather  supply  [vayajm  a[kunauma?j  [utamaiy 
xsa0ramj. 

3[usta]canam  = ustasanam,  Foy. 

4 so  Daressy,  Revision  des  Textes  de  la  Stele  de  Chalonf. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


51 


Sz.  c. 

The  Persian  with  Elamite  and  Babylonian  ( latter  obliterated ) 
covers  the  remaining  space ; on  other  side  hieroglyphics , not 
bearing  however , on  Persian  text. 

1.  A great  [god  is]  Ahura  Mazda  who  created  yonder  heaven, 
who  created  this  earth,  who  created  man,  who  created  welfare 
for  man,  who  made  Darius  king,  who  gave  the  kingdom  to  Da- 
rius, which  (is)  great,  which  possesses  good  horses  (and)  good 

men. 

2.  I (am)  Darius  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  coun- 
tries possessing  all  people,  [king]  of  this  great  earth  far  and 
wide,  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king:  lam  a Persian;  from  Persia  I seized 
Egypt;  I commanded  to  dig  this  canal  from  the  Nile  by  name  a 
river  which  flows  in  Egypt,  to  the  sea  wdiich  goes  from  Persia; 
afterwards  this  canal  [was  dug]  thus  as  I commanded,  and  [ships] 
passed1  from  Egypt  by  this  canal  to  Persia  as  was  my  [will]. 


INSCRIPTION  OF  KERMAN 
Dar.  Kr. 

On  three  sides  of  small  tetragonal  pyramid;  Persian , Elamite , 

Babylonian. 

I am  Darius,  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  countries, 
king  of  this  earth,  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide. 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  EL  VEND 
Dar.  Elv. 

On  steep  rock  in  niche  to  left;  Persian , Elamite , Babylonian . 

1.  A great  god  (is)  Ahura  Mazda  who  created  this  earth,  who 
created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who  created  welfare 
for  man,  who  made  Darius  king,  one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of 
many. 


Jayanta;  for  transfer  to  them,  conjugation  cf.  New  Pers.  ayao  < a + 
'ayatiy.  Cf.  Horn.  NS,  19,  2. 


52 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


Y 

3.  <9;I tiy  D;I r a [ya]  vans  Xb  ada[m  PJarsa  ami[y  hacjii  Pa-8)[rs]a 
Mudrayam  agarbayain1  adarn  ni[yas]tayam  imam  [yuviya] -Ojm1 
kautanaiy  haca1  Pirava  nfima  rauta  tya  Mudrayaiy  danu[vatiy2 
ab]-10)iy  draya3  tya  haca  Parsa  aitiy  pafsava]4  iyam  yuviya 
[akaniy]5 6  ll)ava[0a  ya]0aG  adam  niyastayam  ut[a]  + + j.  + +7  aya^ta1 
haca  [Mudra]-12)ya  ta  + + + m8 9  yuviyam  [ajbiy1  Par[sa]m  [ava0]a 
yafti  ma[m  kama  aha]:) 


INSCRIPTION  OF  KERMAN 
l)Adam  Darayavaus  x-2)saya0iya  vazarka  x-3)saya0iya  xsaya- 
#-4)iyanam  xsaya0-5)iya  dahyunam  xs-6)aya0iya  ahyaya  7)bumi- 
ya  Yista-8)spahya  pu0ra  Haxa-9)manisiya 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  ELYEND 

Dar.  Elv. 

1.  l)Baga  vazarka  Auramazda  2)hya  imam  bumim  3)ada  hya 
avam  asma-4)nam  ada  hva  martiya-5)m  ada  hya  siyati-6)m  ada 
martiyahya  7 )hya  Darayavaum  xstlya-8)0iyam  akunaus  aiva-i))m 
parunam  xsaya0-lO)iyam  aivam  parunam  ll)framataram 

2.  adam  12)Darayavaus  xsaya0i-13)ya  vazarka  xsayafliya 
14)xsaya0iyanam  xs-15)tiya0iya  dahyunam  pa-16)ruzananam  xsa- 
ya0-l7)iya  ahyaya  bumiy-18)a  vazarkaya  duraiy  19)apiy  Vistas- 
pahy-20)a  pu0ra  Haxamanisiya 

Xerx.  Elv. 

1.  l)Baga  vazarka  Auramazda  2)hya  matfista  baganam  3)hya 
imam  bumim  ad-4)a  hva  avam  asmanam  5)ada  hya  martiyam 
ad-6)a  hya  siyatim  ada  7)martiyahya  hya  Xsa-8)yarsam  xsayafli- 
yam  9)akunau§  aivam  parun-10)am  xsayafliyam  aivam  ll)paru- 
nam  framataram 

1 so  Daressy,  Revision  des  Textes  de  la  Stele  de  Chalouf. 

2danu[taiyl,  cf.  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.  683. 

8 daraya,  ed.  wrongly. 

4 aitiy  pasava,  Bartholomae.  aitiy  iyam  yuviya,  ed. 

6 The  supplement  akaniy  seems  quite  certain;  cf.  Daressy. 

6ava0aya0a,  Bartholomae.  ava  + +,  Daressy.  pasava,  ed. 

7naviya,  WB11.,  a very  doubtful  supplement  and  hardly  justified  from 
the  use  of  the  word  in  Bh.  I,  18;  I would  rather  read  *niiva,  ships;  cf.  Skt. 
navas. 

8ta[ra  imajm,  WB". 

9ma[m  kama  aha],  WB". 


PE  RSI  AX  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


53 


2.  I (am)  Darius  the  great  kiug,  king  of  kings,  king  of  coun- 
tries possessing  many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great  earth 
far  and  wide,  the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide. 


Xerx.  Elv. 

On  same  rock  in  niche  to  right;  Persian , Elamite , Babylonian. 

1.  A great  god  (is)  Ahura  Mazda  who  (is)  greatest  of  the 
gods,  who  created  this  earth,  who  created  yonder  heaven,  who 
created  man,  who  created  welfare  for  man,  who  made  Xerxes 
king,  one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of  many. 

2.  I (am)  Xerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  coun- 
tries possessing  many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great  earth 
far  and  wide,  the  son  of  Darius  the  king,  the  Achaemenide. 


INSCRIPTION  OF  VAN 
Xerx.  Van 

On  niche  in  'perpendicular  rock  of  citadel;  Persian , Elamite , 

Babylonian. 

1.  A great  god  (is)  Ahura  Mazda  who  (is)  the  greatest  of  the 
gods,  who  created  this  earth,  who  created  yonder  heaven,  who 
created  man,  who  created  welfare  for  man,  who  made  Xerxes 
king,  one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of  many. 

2.  I (am)  Xerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of 
countries  possessing  many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great 
earth  far  and  wide,  the  sou  of  Darius  the  king,  the  Achaemenide. 

3.  Says  Xerxes  the  king:  Darius  the  king,  who  (was)  my 
father,  he  by  the  grace  of  Ahura  Mazda  did  much  which  (was) 
beautiful  and  he  commanded  to  dig  out  this  place  where  he  did 
not  make  an  inscription  written;  afterwards  I commanded  to 
write  this  inscription;  [let  Ahura  Mazda]  protect  [me  with  the 
gods,  and  my  kingdom  and  what  (has  been)  done  by  me]. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLITERATED 


5 i- 


2.  12)adam  Xsayarsa  xsa-13)ya0iya  vazarka  xsaya0i-14)ya 
xsaya^iyanam  xs-15)aya#iya  dahyunam  par-16)uzananam  xsaya- 
^iya  17)ahiyaya  bumiya  va-18)zarkaya  duraiy  apiy  19)Darayava- 
haus  xsaya0iya-2O)hya  pu0ra  Haxamanisiya 


INSCRIPTION  OF  VAN 

1.  l)Baga  vazarka  Auramazda  hva  ma0i-2)sta  baganam  hya 
imam  bum-3)im  ada  hya  avam  asmanam  4)ada  hya  martiyam  ada 
hya  5)siyatim  ada  martiyahya  6)hya  Xsayiirsam  xsayatfiyam 
7)akunaus  aivam  parunam  x-8)sayafliyam  aivam  parunam  9)fra- 
mataram 

2.  adam  Xsayarsa  10)xsayafliya  vazarka  xsayafliya  ll)xsaya#i- 
yanam  xsayafliya  da-12)hyunam  paruv  zananam  xs-13)aya0iya 
ahyaya  bumiya  va-llzarkaya  duraiy  apiy  Dilraya-15)vahaus  xsa- 
yafliyahya  pu0ra  Ha-16)xamanisiya 

3.  0atiy  Xsayarsa  17)xsaya0iya  Diirayavaus  xsaya-18)#iya  hya 
mana  pita  hauv  va-19)sna  Auramazdaha  vasiy  tya  20)naibam 
akunaus  uta  ima  st-21)anam  hauv  niyastaya  ka"tanaiy  22)yauaiy1 
dipim  naiy  nipist-23)am  akunaus  pasava  adam  ni-24)yastayam 
imam  dipim  nip-25)istanaiv  [mam  Auramazda  p]a-26)tu[v  hada 
bagaibis  utamai-27)y  xsa0ram  uta  tyamaiy  kartam] 


INSCRIPTION  OF  IIAMAD AN 
Art.  Ham. 

l)©atiy  Artaxsafl'a  XS  vazarka  XS  [XSyanam  XS  DAHyunam 
XS  ah]-2)yaya  BUMIya  Darayavasahya2  XShya  [pu0ra  Daraya- 
vasahya Artaxsa0ra]-3)hya  XShya  pu0ra  A r taxsaflr ah y a3  X[sa- 
yarsahya  XShya  pu0ra  Xsayar]-4)sahya  Darayavasahya  XShya 
pu[0ra  Darayavasahya  Yistaspahya  pu0ra]  5)IIaxamanisiya  imam 
apadana  vasn[a  AURAMAZDAha  An(a)h(i)tahya  uta  MTrahya 
akuna  m]-6)am4  AURAMAZDA  An(a)h(i)ta  uta  M'tra  ma[m 
utilmaiy  xsa^am5  ut]-7)a  imam  tya  akuua  ma6  + + + + + 

1 yana  naiy,  Bollensen. 

2 darayava[u]sahva,  Tolman. 

s artaxsa0raliya,  Bartholomae,  but  the  copy  I made  of  the  original  shows 
traces  of  0ara. 

4 [akunpm,  Foy. 

®[utamaiy  xsafem],  Tolman.  [haca,  gastii],  WB. 

®akunauma(?)  Tolman.  akuna vam,  Bartholomae.  See  voc. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


55 


INSCRIPTION  OF  HAMAD  AN 
Art.  Ham. 

On  moldings  of  pedestals,  now  in  British  Museum;  Persian , 
Elamite , Babylonian. 

Says  Artaxerxes,  the  great  king,  king  [of  kings,  king  of 
countries,  king]  of  this  earth,  [son]  of  Darius  the  king:  [Darius] 
was  the  son  of  Artaxerxes  the  king;  Artaxerxes  (was)  [the  son 
of]  Xerxes  [the  king];  Xerxes  (was)  the  son  of  Darius  the  king; 
[Darius  (was)  the  son  of  Hystaspes],  the  Achaemenide;  this 
apadana  by  the  grace  [of  Ahura  Mazda,  Anahita  and  Mithra 
we  (?)  made];  let  Ahura  Mazda,  Anahita  and  Mithra  [protect] 
me  [and  my  kingdom]  and  this  which  we  (?)  have  done. 


INSCRIPTION  OF  MURGHAB 

On  monolith,  above  vying ed  figure  clad  in  long  garments,  repeated 
on  other  pillars ; Persian,  Elamite,  Babylonian. 

I (am)  Cyrus  the  king,  the  Achaemenide.1 


SEAL  INSCRIPTIONS 
Dar.  Seal 

On  small  cylinder  in  British  Museum;  the  king  in  chariot 
attacking  lion;  Persian , Elamite,  Babylonian. 

I (am)  Darius  the  king. 


Seal  Inscr.  a. 

Arsaces  by  name,  [the  son]  of  Athiyabaushna. 


1Cf.  Herzfeld’s  Pasargadae,  Klio,  1908;  Hoffmanu-Kutschke,  Philol. 
Nov.,  Nov.  1907. 


56 


PE  RSI  AX  TEXTS  TRAXSLITERATED 


INSCRIPTION  OF  MURGIIAB 
l)Adam  Kurus  xsaya-2)0iya  Haxamanisiya 


SEAL  INSCRIPTIONS 

Dar.  Seal 

Adam  Darayavaus  XS 


Seal  Inscr.  a. 

l)Arsa-2)ka  n-3)ama  I)A0i-5)yaba-6)usna-7)hya1  8)[pu0ra] 
Seal  Inscr.  b. 

l)Hadaxaya2  2)+  + + + + + + + + + 3)0ada0a  j.  f 


Yasdasaka3 


Seal  Inscr.  c. 


Seal  Inscr.  d. 

V ahyav'sdapaya4 

Seal  Inscr.  e. 

l)ma  Xa-2)rsa-3)dasya5 


WEIGHT  INSCRIPTION 

1)11  karsa  2)adam  Dara-3)vavaus  xs-4)aya0iya  va-5)zarka  Vis- 
6)taspahya  7)pu0ra  Hax-8)amanisiya 


VASE  INSCRIPTIONS 
Xerx.  Vases 

Xsayarsa  XS  vazarka 

Art.  Vases 

y 

Artaxsa0ra  XS  vazarka 

The  Venice  Vase  reads  ardaxcasca,  see  voc. ; the  Berlin  Vase 
lias  simply  xsayafliya  after  the  name  of  the  king. 

1 affiyabausnahya.  Bartholomae. 

2liadaxya,  WB. 

*vasda  saka.  WB. 

4 vahyav[i]5da  paya,  WB. 

5 xisyarsa,  Justi. 


PERSIAN  TEXTS  TRANSLATED 


57 


Seal  Inscr.  b. 

Hadakhaya  ( ?). 

Seal  Inscr.  c. 

Vashdasaka  (?). 

Seal  Inscr.  d. 


Vahyavishdapaya  ( ?). 

Seal  Inscr.  e. 

Seal.  Xerxes 


WEIGHT  INSCRIPTION 
Dar.  Weight  Inscr. 

Green  basalt;  British  Museum;  Persian , Elamite , Babylonian. 

2 Karsha-weight.  I (am)  Darius,  the  great  king,  the  son  of 
Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide. 


VASE  INSCRIPTIONS 
Xerx.  Vases 

On  several  alabaster  specimens  ( London , Paris , Philadelphia) ; 
Persian , Elamite , Babylonian , and  Hieroglyphics. 
Xerxes  the  great  king. 


Art.  Vases 

Now  in  Philadelphia , Berlin , Venice;  the  Venice  Vase  is  of  por- 
phyry ; Persian , Elamite , Babylonian,  and  Hieroglyphics. 
Artaxerxes  the  great  ldng. 


FRAGMENTS  OF  VASES  FOUND  AT  SUSA 
(trilingual) 


J.  tie  Morgan,  D<5l6gation  en  Perse, 


Vol.  1,  p.  130. 


xsayars[a],  Xerxes 


artax  [sa0ra] , A rtaxerxes 


(58) 


[xs]aya0[iya],  Icing 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


A,  A 

a,  l)Verbal  prefix,  to,  unto;  e.  g.  ayanta  = a -f-  ayanta  (them, 
to  i),  Dar.  Sz.  c.  3;  cf.  New  Pers.  ayaS  < a -f-  *ayatiy.  Note  Turfan 
AISS.  a-gad  (better  than  agad,  Aluller).  2)Postpos.  prep,  with 
loc.,  in,  on,  by j e.  g. , ga0ava,  in  place,  dastaya,  at  hand,  arbairaya, 
in  Arbela,  drayahya,  by  the  sea.  Cf.  Jackson,  Av.  Gram.  736; 
Schulze,  KZ,  29,  264;  Brugmann,  Grundr2.,  619;  Bartholomae, 
Grundr.  d.  iran.  Philol. , 21 7-9.  In  Av.  also  with  ace. , abl. , gen. , 
dat. ; e.  g.  Av.  xvafa§a,  Skt.  svapnad  a;  Av.  ahurai  a,  Skt.  asuraya. 
Av.  a,  Skt.  a. 

a-  (before  consonants;  an-  before  vowels),  neg.  prefix;  a-xsata, 
inviolate , unhurti  a-namaka,  {month)  of  the  nameless  {god),  an-ahita, 
without  blemish.  I.  E.  *n-,  *nn-,  Av.  a-,  an-  (Aliddle  Pers.  a-,  an-), 
Skt.  a-,  an-,  Gr.  a-,  av-,  Lat.  in-  (for  en-),  Goth,  un-;  Gr.  va-,  vtj-  (I. 
E.  *n);  cf.  Schulze,  KZ,  27,  606. 

a,  demon,  pron.  this.  Gen.  sg.  f.  abyaya  (written  [ahya]yay 
by  stone-cutter’s  blunder  in  Dar.  Sus.  b.),  abiyaya.  Loc.  sg.  f. 
ahyaya,  ahiyaya.  In  both  gen.  and  loc.  the  stem  a has  been  in- 
creased by  hy  (from  gen.  sg.  ?),  to  which  is  added  an  ending 
analogous  to  that  of  nouns.  Cf.  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  239,  2; 
Foy,  KZ,  35,  9.  I.  E.  *o-,  Av.  a,  Skt.  a,  Gr.  e-l,  Cret.  y. 

aita,  demon,  pron.  this.  Ace.  sg.  n.  aita.  I.  E.  *eito,  YAv. 
aeta  (Turfan  MSS.  ’ed),  Skt.  eta. 

aina[ira]  (Elam,  ainaira;  Bab.  a-ni-ri-’),  m.  name  of  a Babylonian, 
father  of  Nidintu-Bel.  The  word  is  clear  in  Elam,  and  Bab. 
texts.  KT  record  space  for  about  two  characters.  Gen.  sg. 
aina[ira]bya,  Bh.  1.  16. 

aiva,  num.  one.  Acc.  sg.  m.  aivam.  I.  E.  oiuo,  Av.  aeva  (Alid- 
dle Pers.  ev,  New  Pers.  yak  <.  *aivaka,  cf.  Horn,  NS,  19,  4.), 
Gr.  o?os,  Cypr.  olpo%. 


(59) 


GO 


AXCIEXT  PE  RSI  AX  LEXICOX 


autiyara  (Elam,  autiyarus;  Bab.  u-ti-ia-a-ri),  m.  name  of  a district 
in  Armenia.  Nom.  sg.  autiyara. 

aura,  m.  god.  Instr.  sg.  aura,  Dar.  Pers.  e,  3.  siyatis  axsata 
hauvciy  aura  nirasatiy;  cf.  Foy,  KZ,  37,  561.  Gen.  Sg.  (with  mazdah), 
aurahya  mazdaha;  cf.  Jackson,  Zoroaster,  171;  Tolman,  PAPA,  33, 
68.  Ay.  ahura,  Skt.  asura. 

auramazdah  (Elam,  uramasta;  Bab.  u-ra-ma-az-da),  m.  name  of  the 
supreme  god,  Almra  Mazda.  Nom.  sg.  auramazda.  Acc.  sg. 
auramazdam.  In  the  mutilated  passage,  Bh.  4.  1.  11,  auramazda  + + 
+ + + rtaiyiya,  KT  plainly  record  da,  thus  making  impossible  the 
supplement  auramazdiya  of  WB,  which  otherwise  might  receive 
some  support  from  the  Elam,  ankirir  anuramasta-ra,  I state  as  a fol- 
lower of  Ahura  Mazda.  I have  proposed  the  supplement  aura- 
mazdfam  upavajrtaiy  (Vdt.  Stud.  1,  31),  regarding  + + + + rtaiyiya 
as  dittography  for  + + + + rtaiy  (cf.  tyana  mana,  Bh.  1,  8),  and 
translating,  1 turn  unto  Ahura  Mazda  (i.  e.  I appeal  to  him). 
For  this  meaning  of  upa  -f-  a -f-  vart  in  Skt.,  cf.  MBh.  5,  1679 
and  examples  quoted  in  PWb.  KT  give  space  for  four  or  live 
characters  in  the  lacuna.  See  other  proposed  supplements  s.  v. 
+ + + + rtaiyiya.  For  former  discussions  of  the  passage  cf.  Foy, 
KZ,  37,  539,  (ibid.  35,  44),  ZDMG,  52,  565;  Gray,  JAOS,  23,  61; 
Fr.  Muller,  WZKM,  1,  59.  Gen.  sg.  auramazdaha  (frequently 
written  auramazdaha  in  Dar.  Pers.  d,  e,  NR;  Xerx.  Pers.  a), 
aura  (q.  V.)  -}-  mazdah,  the  lord  knowing  all , Ay.  mazdah,  name  of 
supreme  god  (with  and  without  ahura),  Ar.  *ma(n)Sdha-;  cf.  Bar- 
tholomae,  BB,  13,  80.  Phi.  ohrmazd,  New  Pers.  hormizd;  cf.  Horn, 
NS,  37,  21. 

axsata,  adj.  unhurt , inviolate , undisturbed.  Nom.  sg.  f.  axsa- 
ta, Dar.  Pers.  e,  3.  hya  duvais[ta]m  siyatis  axsata,  prosperity  for  a 
long  time  undisturbed.  Thumb  (Tolman,  O.  P.  Inscr.  148,  n) 
regarded  the  preceding  hya  as  3 sg.  opt,  of  ah.  For  Bartholo- 
mae’s  view  see  s.  v.  hya.  a(neg.)  -(-  xsata,  ppl.  of  xsan,  Skt.  ksan, 
Gr.  Kretvoj;  cf.  Kretschmer,  KZ,  31,  428. 

agar  [tar],  m.  supplement  which  I proposed  (Ydt.  Stud.  1,  9) 
for  agara  + +,  KT,  who  record  space  for  twyo  characters.  I take 
the  word  as  nom.  ag.  of  a -}-  *gar,  to  wake  (YAv.  gar,  Skt.  gr),  a 


AX  Cl  ENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


61 


watcher,  wakeful , zealous.  This  meaning'  tits  the  Bab.  pi-it-ku-du, 
watchful.  Weissbaeh  (ZDMG,  61,  725)  makes  the  same  conjec- 
ture; “leh  vermute  eine  Ableitung  von  der  Wurzel  gar,  wach 
vein  -f-  a.”  He  writes  me  under  date  of  May  19,  1908;  “leh. 
freue  mich  dass  wir  hinsichtlick  agara  + +,  1.  21,  und  [biyja,  4. 
69,  einer  Ansicht  sind.”  Bartholomae,  WZKM,  22,  72,  com- 
pares Skt.  gurta,  Av.  agramaitis,  translating  willig , w'illfdhrig, 
folgsam.  The  emendation  dausta  of  ed.  is  impossible,  [akka 
kannas],  who  was  friendly,  of  Weissbaeh  and  KT  can  hardly  be 
the  correct  supplement  for  the  corresponding  Elam.  Should 
we,  however,  restore  the  verb  kanne,  its  form  would  be  kannes, 
aor.  3 sg.,  not  kannas.  Nom.  sg.  agar[ta].  Note  Turfan  MSS. 
vigaraned. 

autar,  prep,  with  acc.  within , among , in.  Bh.  4.  3.  antar  ima 
hamarana.  Bh.  2.  13.  [anta]r  didam  fraha"jam.  Av.  antara  (Turfan 
MSS.  ’andar),  Skt.  antar. 

t 

atiy,  verbal  prefix,  beyond , across , past.  I.  E.  *eti,  YAv.  aiti 
(Turfan  MSS.  ’ad,  ed),  Skt.  ati. 

a6a”gaina  or  a0a"gaina,  adj.  of  stone.  Nom.  sg.  m.  a$angaina, 
Dar.  Pei'S.  C.  ardastana  a$a"gaina.  Acc.  Sg.  f . a6a"gainam,  Al’t.  Sus. 
c;  a0a"ganam  for  a$angainam,  Art.  Pers.  a,  b,  3.  YAv.  asanga  (New 
Pers.  sang,  Horn,  NS,  38,  2).  Cf.  KZ.  39,  69. 

a^ahavaja,  a doubtful  word  read  by  KT  in  Bh.  4.  1.  90.  Hoff- 
mann-Kutschke  would  connect  with  pepraka  of  Elam.  Bh.  L.  1.  8. 

a0iy,  thus  to  be  read  in  place  of  a[b]iy  of  WB1  in  Bh.  1.  1.  91. 
This  old  reading  is  confirmed  by  KT,  who  remark;  “The  read- 
ing of  the  sign  0 is  certain.  ’ a$iy  babiru[m  ya#a  naiy  upjayam,  when 
I had  not  come  to  Babylon. 

adiyabausna,  m.  name  of  the  father  of  Arsaces.  Gen.  sg. 
a$iyabausnahya.  *a#iya,  true  (cf.  hasiya,  q.  V.)  -f-  *bausna,  fl’.  buj,  to 
free , YAv.  buj  (Middle  Pers.  bdxtan);  cf.  ZDMG,  51,  248.  Bar- 
tholomae reads  aftvabausna,  but  against  his  etymology  cf.  Justi, 
IF,  17,  Anz.  106,  who  gives  the  meaning  of  the  compound, 
wahrluftige  Erlbsung  liabend. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


f>2 

a<9ura  (Elam,  assura;  Bab.  as-sur;  Gr.  ' Aaavpiaj^  f.  Assyria. 
Nom.  sg.  a^ura.  Loc.  sg.  atfuraya;  cf.  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  413. 

afi'ina  or  a<9'ina  (Elam,  assina;  Bab.  a-si-na),  m.  name  of  a Susian 
rebel.  Nom.  sg.  afl'ina.  Ace.  sg.  a0rinam.  The  Persian  name  is 
quite  likely  a transcription  of  the  Elam.;  cf.  Fo}r,  KZ,  37,  498. 
Justi,  on  the  other  hand,  suggested  a possible  connection  with 
Av.  atar  (New  Pel's.  aSar),  fire;  cf.  YAv.  atara-data,  fire-given , 
Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  324. 

a^’iyadiya  (Elam,  assiyatiyas;  Bab.  kislimu,  ninth  month),  n. 
name  of  a Persian  month,  Nov.-Dee.  Gen.  sg.  a0riyadiyahya  (sic 
KT,  not  afl'iyadiyahya  of  the  ed. ; cf.  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  412, 
n.  1).  *atar , fire,  Av.  atar  (Turfan  AISS.  ’adur,  New  Pers.  aSar) 
-}-  *yadiya,  worship,  fr.  yad  (q.  V.). 

ada,  adv.  then.  GAv.  ada,  1 Av.  aSa,  Skt.  adha.  a -j-  da;  cf. 
Jackson,  Av.  Gr.  729;  Whitney,  Skt.  Gr.  1103. 

adakaiy,  adv.  then,  ada  + kaiy,  loc.  sg.  to  I.  E.  *ko,  Gr.  ?roi; 
cf.  Thumb,  KZ,  33,  22.  Bartholomae  (Grundr.  218,  3)  reads 
ada-kiy,  instr.  sg.,  Skt.  kim  in  makim,  Lat.  qui  in  atqul.  Note  Tur- 
fan MSS.  ’eg. 

[[adjata,  adj.  noble.  Nom.  pi.  m.  [adjata,  emendation  (Andreas- 
Htising)  in  Bh.  1.  7,  for  which  Bab.  [mar]-banuti  gave  some  sup- 
port, is  now  impossible  because  of  clear  record  of  [ajmata  in  KT; 
also  Jackson’s  conjecture  (JAOS,  24,  89)  in  Bh.  4.  1.  51  in  place 
of  [y]ata  of  KT  and  [yat]a  of  ed.  The  old  reading  [y]ata  aha",  as 
long  as  they  lived , seems  more  in  accord  writh  Elam,  and  Bab. 
versions.  Jackson’s  view  would,  of  course,  connect  the  word 
with  YAv.  azata  (New  Pers.  azad).] 

adam,  pers.  pron.  /.  Nom.  sg.  adam,  Av.  azam  (Turfan  MSS. 
’az),  Skt.  aham.  AcC.  Sg.  mam,  Av.  mam,  Skt.  mam,  Abl.  Sg.  ma, 
GAv.  mat,  Skt.  mat,  Gen.  Sg.  mana,  maiy,  YAv.  mana,  me,  GAv. 
moi,  Skt,  mana,  me.  Nom.  pi.  vayam,  Av.  vaem,  Skt.  vayam.  Gen. 
pi.  amaxam,  YAv.  ahmakam,  Skt.  asmakam. 

adiy,  prep,  with  loc.  in.  Bh.  4.  14.  ufrastadiy  parsa.  Cf.  Bar- 
tholomae, IF,  12,  110.  Skt.  adhi.  Cf.  Turfan  MSS.  ’adiydvar. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


63 


adukanisa  (thus  read  for  adukani  of  ed. ; cf.  KT,  35.  Elam, 
atukanuas),  f.  name  of  a Persian  month,  Oct. -Nov.,  Oppert;  June- 
July,  Foy;  May-June,  Justi.  Gen.  s g.  aduka[ni]sahya,  Bh.  2.  12. 
kan,  to  dig  (q.  v.),  Graben , Ausstechen  der  Bewasserungskanale, 
Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  61. 

ana,  demon,  pron.  this.  Instr.  sg.  ana,  Dar.  Pers.  e.  hada  ana 
parsa  kara.  Av.  ana,  Skt.  ana. 

ana,  prep,  with  instr.  along , throughout.  Xerx.  Pers.  a.  ana 
parsa.  YAv.  ana,  Gl’.  ava. 

anamaka  (Elam,  anamakkas;  Bab.  tebetu,  tenth  month),  adj. 
name  of  a Persian  month,  Dec. -Jan.  Gen.  sg.  anamakahya  (Bar- 
tholomae, Grundr.  412,  n.  1).  a -f-  namaka,  Skt.  anamaka;  Jifonat 
des  namenlosen , d.  i.  des  hochsten  Gottes,  Bartholomae,  Altiran. 
Wb. ; cf.  Justi,  ZDMG,  51,  248. 

anahita,  name  of  a goddess;  written  in  text  anahata,  Art.  Sus. 
a;  Art.  Ham.  YAv.  an-ahita,  spotless;  cf.  Wilhelm,  ZDMG,  40, 
105;  Foy,  KZ,  35,  63;  Tolman,  PAPA,  33,  69. 

aniya,  adj.  l)other , another.  Nom.  sg.  m.  aniya.  Acc.  sg.  m. 
aniyam.  Nom.  pi.  m.  aniya,  aniyaha  (thus  read  ill  Bh.  4.  1.  63  and 
probably  in  1.  61;  “From  the  traces  which  exist  the  form  aniyaha 
is  more  probable  than  aniya”  KT).  Nom.  pi.  f.  aniya.  Loc.  pi. 
f.  aniyauva.  tythe  one — the  other.  Acc.  Sg.  m.  aniyam,  Bh.  1. 
18.  aniyam  usabarim  akunavam,  one  part  I put  on  camels.  Gen.  Sg. 
m.  aniyahya,  Bh.  1.  18.  aniyahya  asam  franayam,  for  the  other  1 
brought  horses.  2>)strange , hostile , an  enemy.  Nom.  sg.  m. 

aniya,  Bh.  1.  19.  aniya  apiya  [ahyatja  (Kern,  [aharatja,  Oppert,  KT). 
Instr.  Sg.  m.  aniyana,  Dar.  Pers.  d.  haca  aniyana  (Jackson,  JAOS, 
27,  191).  4)with  ciy,  Nom.  Sg.  n.  aniyasciy.  Av.  anya  (Turfan 
MSS.  ’ani,  Middle  Pers.  an,  Oss.  inna,  Paz.  ban),  Skt.  anya. 

anuv,  prep,  with  instr.  (according  to  reading  ufratuuva,  KT,  in 
Bh.  1.  19);  otherwise  Bartholomae,  AVZKM,  22,  71.  along , after. 
Av.  anu,  Skt.  ami. 

anusiya,  adj.  devoted  to , ally,  follower.  Nom.  pi.  m.  anusiya. 
anuv  (q.  v.)  + Ar.  suffix  tia. 


04 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


apa,  verbal  prefix,  from,  away.  YAv.  apa,  Skt.  apa,  Gr.  an 6. 

apatara,  adj.  Acc.  sg.  n.  as  adv.  apataram,  away  from,  outside 
of,  elsewhere.  apa(q.  V.)  -f-  comp,  suffix  tara.  Skt.  apataram. 

apadana,  n.  palace.  Acc.  sg.  apadana,  Art.  Ham.  imam  apadana. 
Cf.  Skt.  apadha,  concealment ; apa  (q.  v.)  -f-  "da  (q.  v.). 

apanyaka,  m.  ancestor.  Norm  sg.  apanyaka  (with  eucl.  ma,  abl. 
or  = maiy;  cf.  Fov,  KZ,  35,  59),  Art.  Sus.  a.  imam  apadana  dar- 
ayavaus  apanyakama  akunas.  apa  (q.  V.)  + nyaka  (Phi.  nyak). 

apara,  adj.  Acc.  sg.  n.  as  adv.  aparam,  afterwards.  The  Bab. 
sa  be-la-a  ar-ki-ia,  who  shalt  rule  after  me,  leads  Bartholomae  to 
suggest  apara-ma, posterior  me,  in  Bh.  -4.  5,  14,  19,  hya  aparama  ahy. 
Comp,  of  apa,  Av.  apara,  Skt.  apara. 

api,  f.  water.  Noill.  Sg.  apis,  Bh.  1.  19.  apisim  (i.  e.,  apis-sim; 
cf.  KZ,  35,  36;  ibid.  40,  134)  parabara;  as  loc.  Pedersen,  KZ,  40, 
134,  es  riss  ihn  fort  im  wasser.  Loc.  sg.  apiya,  Bh.  1.  19.  aniya 
apiya  [ahyatja  (Kern;  [aharat  ja,  Oppert,  KT).  Av.  ap  (Turf an  MSS. 
’ab,  ’ap,  New  Pers.  ab,  Gil.  ov,  Afy.  oba,  Geiger,  SA,  4),  Skt.  nom. 

pi.  apas. 

apiy,  adv.  on,  upon,  tlie'reto,  still,  duraiy  apiy , far  and  wide. 
Probably  apiy  is  to  be  read  in  Bh.  4,  1.  46.  [apjimaiy  aniyasciy  vasiy 
kartam,  still  much  else  was  done  by  me  (cf.  KT,  68),  thus  setting 
aside  Gray’s  theory  (ava  as  abl.  sg.).  Av.  aipi,  Skt.  api,  Gr.  ini. 

abiy,  prep,  with  acc.  to,  against.  GAv.  aibi.  YAv.  aiwi,  Skt. 
abhi. 

■ abicaris.  The  reading  abacaris  with  which  the  critics  have  op- 
erated, Spiegel,  Darmesteter  (Etud.  Iran.  2.  130),  Justi  (IF,  IT, 
Anz.  105),  is  superseded.  “ My  inference  from  the  absence  of  a 
note  is  that  the  text  stands  as  first  given  by  Rawlinsou,  i.  e., 
abicaris.”  Jackson,  JAOS,  24,  85.  The  word  is  thus  recorded  by 
KT  who  translate  pasture-lands.  The  Elam,  and  Bab.  give  no 
assistance.  Some  of  the  various  proposed  meanings  are:  Weide- 
plutze  (Spiegel),  cf.  New  Pers.  caridan,  to  pasture / Uilfsmittel 
OYB);  commerce  (Tolman,  O.  P.  Inscr.  121);  i pascoli  (Rugaxli); 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


65 


en  sauveur  (Oppert);  servitium  = servos  (Gray,  AJP,  21,  17); 

Weide  (Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  89). 

ab(i)ypara,  an  uncertain  word  in  Art.  Sus.  a;  according  to  Foy 
abyapara  [u]pa,  later  under  ( Artaxerxes ). 

abis,  adv.  thereby.  Bh.  1.  18.  abis  naviya  aha.  Cf.  abiy,  Brug- 
mann,  KZ,  27,  417  vs.  Schmidt,  Pluralb.  352;  Foy,  ZDMG,  54, 
371;  Pedersen,  KZ,  40,  129,  on  opposite  side / Bartholomae,  Zum 
Altiran.  Wb.,  suggests  possibly  abi-sa  (abl.). 

ama,  pron.  stem,  Av.  ahma;  see  adam. 

amutfa,  see  mu 0. 

ayadaiy,  see  yad. 

ayadana,  n.  sanctuary , place  of  worship).  Acc.  pi.  ayadana. 
Elam.  auziyan  ’“‘nappanna;  Bab.  bitati  sa  ilani.  a -f-  *yadana,  fr.  yad 
(q.  v.).  ayadana  (Bh.  1.  14)  can  hardly  be  the  temples  of  foreign 
gods;  cf.  Tolman,  PAPA,  33,  70  against  the  view  of  Foy,  KZ, 
35,  23. 

ayasata,  for  ayasta  of  ed.  and  KT;  see  yam. 

ar  (Inchoative  pres,  rasa-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.,  135),  to  set 
in  motion , go , come,  arrive.  Pret.  1 sg.  arasam.  Av.  ar  (Turfan 
MSS.  ’avar,  New  Pers.  rasaS),  Skt.  r. 

with  prefix  para,  come  to , arrive.  Pret.  1 sg.  pararasam.  3 sg. 

pararasa. 


with  prefix  niy,  come  down , descend.  Pres.  subj.  ■ 3 sg. 

nirasatiy. 

araika  (or  arika,  cf.  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  189.),  adj. 
hostile.  Nom.  sg.  m.  araika. 

arabaya  (Elam,  arpaya;  Bab.  a-ra-bi;  Gr.  ' A pa.  (i  la),  m.  Arabia. 
Nom.  Sg.  arabaya. 

arakadri  (Elam,  arakkatarris;  Bab.  a-ra-ka-ad-ri-’),  m.  name  of  a 
mountain.  Nom.  sg.  arakadris.  Perhaps  *ara,  mountain  -f-  *kadri, 
5 


60 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


ravine.  Against  the  reading  and  etymology  of  Foy  and  Bar- 
tholomae,  cf.  Justi,  IF,  17,  Anz.  106.  Note  also  Bartholomae, 
Zum  Altiran.  Wb.,  116. 

arxa  (or  araxa,  Elam,  arakka;  Bab.  a-ra-hu),  m.  name  of  an  Ar- 
menian rebel.  Norn.  Sg.  arxa.  Acc.  Sg.  arxam. 

ariya,  adj.  Aryan.  Norm  sg.  ariya.  Members  of  compound 
separated,  ariya  c[i]0ra,  of  Aryan  lineage , Dar.  NR.  a.  1.  14.  YAv. 
airya  (New  Pel’s,  eran,  Horn,  NS,  103),  Skt.  arya. 

ariyaramna  (wrongly  ed.,  ariyaramna;  cf.  KT,  2.  Elam,  arriya- 
ramna;  Bab.  ar-ia-ra-am-na-’;  Gr.  ’Aptapd/xv^s),  m.  Ariaramnes , name 
of  the  great-grandfather  of  Darius.  Nom.  sg.  ariyaramna.  Gen. 
sg.  ariyaramnaliya.  ariya  (nom.  pi.,  q.  v.;  otherwise  Foy,  KZ,  35, 
9)  *ramna,  fl’.  *ram,  to  be  or  cause  to  be  at  2>eace,  YAv.  ram, 
Skt.  ram. 

aruvastam?  Dar.  NR.  b.  aruvastam  upariy  [daraya]vau[m]  xsaya- 
0iyam. 

artaxsa^ra  (Elam,  irtaksassa;  Bab.  artaksassu;  Gl'.  'ApraAp^s;  cf. 
Lycian  artaxssirazaha  on  Xanthos  stele),  m.  Artaxerxes.  1 )Arta- 
xerxes  I.  Gen.  Sg.  artaxsaAahya,  artaxsa#rahya  (written  artaxsaSrahya  in 
Art.  Ham.  SeeTolman,  Reexamination  of  Columns,  PAPA,  36, 
33),  artaxsa#ra  (for  gen.  Sg.),  Art.  Pers.  a,  b.  darayavaus  artaxsa^’a 
xsayaftya  puA'a  artaxsa#ra  xsayarsa  xsaya^iya  pu#'a;  cf.  Marquart, 

ZDMG,  49,  665;  Thumb,  KZ,  32,  130;  Foy,  IvZ,  35,  55.  2 )Ar- 
taxerxes  II.  For  nom.  sg.  artaxsa^’a,  Art.  Sus.  a.  #atiy  artaxsa#ra 
X§  vazarka;  also  Art.  Pers.  a,  b,  2;  Sus.  b;  cf.  Foy,  KZ,  35,  57. 
For  gen.  Sg.  artaxsaAa,  Art.  Pers.  a,  b.  adam  artaxsafl'a  xsaya^iya  pu$ra. 
3)  Artaxerxes  III.  For  nom.  sg.  artaxsa0ra,  Ai’t.  Pers.  a,  b,  2,  3,  4. 
0atiy  artaxsa#ra.  For  acc.  Sg.  artaxsa0ra,  Art.  Pei’S,  a,  b,  1.  hya 
mam  artaxsafl’a  xsayaftya  akunaus.  4) Artaxerxes  !(?),  HO,  HI(?), 
cf.  Weissbach,  Iran.  Gr.  II,  60, 18;  Longperier,  RA,  2,  446;  Foy, 
KZ,  35,  58.  Nom.  sg.  ardaxcasc(?)a,  Yase  of  Artaxerxes  (Venice). 
This  is  the  reading  of  the  editions  and  generally  accepted  (cf. 
Foy,  KZ,  37,  565;  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  192),  sc  being  re- 
garded as  a phonetic  representation  of  0T  (Elam.  §§;  Bab.  ts). 
The  vase,  however,  as  far  as  I can  infer  from  the  photographs 
which  I have  seen,  clearly  gives  ardaxcasda,  showing  an  uncut 


AXCIEXT  PERSIAX  LEXICON 


67 

space  between  da  and  the  mutilated  word-divider.  Either  we 
must  suppose  that  the  engraver  omitted  the  small  horizontal 
wedge  which  differentiated  ca  and  da,  or  we  must  accept  the  read- 
ing ardaxcasda.  *arta,  lair,  Av.  arata  -(-  xsa#ra,  kingdom  (q.  V.). 

artavardiya  (Elam,  irtumartiya;  Bab.  ar-ta-mar-zi-ia),  m.  name  of 
one  of  the  generals  of  Darius.  Nom.  sg.  artavardiya.  Acc.  sg. 
artavardiyam.  *arta,  law , Av.  arata  -f-  *vard,  to  increase , Av.  varsd 
(New  Pei’S,  balidan),  Skt.  vrdh. 

ardaxcasc(?)a,  see  artaxsa0ra. 

ardastana,  m.  window-cornice  (?).  Nom.  sg.  ardastana,  Dar. 
Pers.  C.  ardastana  a#angaina  darayavahaus  XShya  vi0iya  karta.  *arda, 
half. \ YAv.  arada  -f-  stana,  YAv.  -stana  (New  Pel’s,  stan),  Skt.  sthana; 
cf.  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  193.  Foy,  KZ,  35,  48.  connects 
the  first  member  of  the  compound  with  Av.  arazo,  bright , Skt. 
rira. 

O 

ardumanis  (Elam,  [artumannis] ; Bab.  a-ar-di-ma-ni-is),  m.  name  of 
one  of  the  allies  of  Darius  against  Gaumata.  Nom.  sg.  ar(duma]- 
n[is].  'fardu,  right , GAv.arazu,  Skt.  rju  -(-  "'manis,  mind , Av.  manah, 
Skt.  manas.  ^ 

arbaira  (Elam,  arpera;  Bab.  ar-ba-’il),  f.  Arhela.  Loc.  sg.  arbai- 
raya. 

armina  (Elam,  arminiya;  Bab.  u-ra-as-tu;  Gr.  ’A p/j-cvla),  m.  Arme- 
nia. Nom.  Sg.  armina.  Acc.  Sg.  arminam.  Loc.  Sg.  arminaiy. 

arminiya,  adj.  as  subs.  1 ) Armenian.  2) Armenia.  Nom.  sg. 
m.  arminiya.  Loc.  Sg.  m.  arminiyaiy  (thus  read  in  Bh.  2.  11.  34,  39, 
44  in  place  of  armaniyaiy  of  ed.,  and  to  be  supplied  in  Bh.  2.  11. 
48,  63;  cf.  KT,  29).  Written  armhiiyaiy  in  Bh.  2.  11.  34,  39,  44. 

arsaka,  m.  Arsaces.  Nom.  sg.  arsaka.  "*arsan,  man , YAv. 
arsan,  Gr.  aparjv  -f-  suffix  ka. 

arsada  (Elam,  irsata),  f.  name  of  a fortress.  Nom.  sg.  arsada. 
Cf.  Justi,  IF,  17,  Anz.  106. 


OS 


AXCIEXT  PERSIA'. V LEXICOX 


arsama  (Elam,  irsama;  Gr.  ’A po-d/x^s),  m.  Arsames , name  of 
the  grandfather  of  Darius.  Norn.  sg.  arsama.  Gen.  sg.  arsama- 
hya.  ’"arsan,  man,  hero  (cf.  arsaka)  -f-  *ama,  might , T Av.  ama. 

arsta  (for  arstata;  “the  sign  is  quite  clearly  r and  not  b on  the 
rock ” KT),  f.  Rectitude.  Acc.  sg.  arstam,  Bh.  4.  13.  upariy  ars- 
tam upariy  + + + + ; Elam,  sutur  ukku  bupa  git,  1 ruted  in  accordance 
with  the  ordinance ; Bab.  ina  di-na-a-tu  a-si-ig-gu,  in  accordance  with 
the  laws  I governed.  The  old  reading  of  Rawlinson  abastam  was 
nearer  correct  than  the  later  abistam,  as  Jackson  (JAOS,  24,  91) 
and  IvT  clearly  indicate  the  absence  of  i in  the  word,  arsta  was 
first  conjectured  by  Foy  (KZ,  35,  45)  and  later  confirmed  by 
Jackson's  reexamination  of  the  Behistan  Rock.  We  cannot, 
however,  accept  Foy’s  further  conjecture  apariyayam,  ich  verehrte 
die  aufrichtigheit , as  Jackson  and  KT  record  the  presence  of  the 
second  upariy  on  the  stone;  cf.  Tolman  (V dt.  Stud.  1,  32).  The 
emended  reading  has  an  important  bearing  on  the  religion  of  the 
Achaemenidan  kings:  cf.  Jackson,  JAOS,  21, 169;  Foy,  ZDMG, 
54,  341;  Wilhelm,  ibid.  40, 105;  Tolman,  PAPA,  33,  67.  Weiss- 
bach  (ZDMG,  61,  733)  would  emend  the  Bab.  u-sa-as-gu-u.  YAv. 
arstat,  goddess  of  rectitude,  fr.  arsta,  upright. 

arsti,  f.  spear.  Mom.  sg.  arstis.  YAv.  arsti,  Skt.  rsti. 

arstibara,  m.  spear-hearer.  Mom.  sg.  arstibara.  arsti  (q.  v.)  + 
*bara,  fr.  bar  (q.  V.). 

ava,  demon,  pron.  that.  Acc.  sg.  m.  avam.  Gen.  sg.  m.  ava- 
hya.  Acc.  sg.  n.  ava,  avas-ciy.  Mom.  pi.  m.  avaiy.  Mom.  pi.  f. 

ava,  MRa.  4.  As  acc.  pi.  rn.  avaiy,  Bh.  2.  13.  avaiy  fra- 

hanjam.  Gen.  pi.  m.  avaisam  (cf.  Turf  an  MSS.  ovesan).  I.  E. 
ouo,  Av.  ava  (Mew  Pers.  6,  Kurd.  af). 

ava,  verbal  prefix,  down , e.  g.  ava  jan,  to  strike  down.  Av. 
ava  (Middle  Pers.  6),  Skt.  ava. 

ava,  adv.  thus.  Correlative  to  ya#a,  Bh.  4.  1.  51.  ava  naiy  astiy 
kartam  ya0a,  reading  confirmed  by  KT.  Cf.  Tolman,  \ dt.  Stud. 
1,  32. 

avakanam,  a reading  confirmed  by  KT  in  Bh.  1.  IS.  maskauva 
avakanam,  I plowed  ( my  army)  on  foots  of  shins y cf.  Tolman,  Vdt. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


69 


Stud.  1,  15.  Pedersen,  KZ,  10,  133,  translates,  Ic-h  setzte  das 
heer  auf.  The  attempted  emendation  avakamam,  fr.  kart,  to  cut , 
divide , is  superseded. 

avajam,  Ph.  2.  13,  11.  utasaiy  [ujcasma  avajam  (a-vajam  or  a-vanjam, 
Bartholomae),  I put  out  his  eyes.  Cf.  KZ,  37,  551.  Jackson 
(JAOS,  21,  88)  remarks:  “The  sight  is  destroyed  by  means  of 
a red-hot  iron  brought  near  the  ball.  This  latter  observation 
may  throw  some  additional  light  on  the  meaning  of  avajam.  The 
reading  of  this  word  is  beyond  question.”  See  ucasma.  The 
sense  of  both  Elam,  and  Bab.  version  is  as  given  above. 

avatfa,  adv.  1 )thusJ)  2)then.  Bh.  1.  10.  nuram  (Jackson,  JAOS, 
21,  90;  KT,  69)  0uvam  varna  vatam  tya  mana  kartam  ava$a  sa  + + + d 
+ + + adiv,  let  it  now  convince  thee  what  has  been  done  by  me,  so 
+ + +.  In  Dar.  XRa.  1 Stolze’s  photograph  shows  [avad]a  or  [ava0]a 
where  For,  KZ,  35,  51  reads  [ava]da.  Bartholomae,  b}7  reference 
to  Menant  and  Daressy  (Recueil  de  trav.)  reads  ava#a  ya0a  for 
pa[s]ava  of  ed.  in  1.  11  of  Dar.  Sz.  c,  3.  YAv.  avatfa. 

ava0asta  pari[ba]ra,  thus  preserve  them  (i.  e.  the  sculptures), 
reading  of  KT  for  ava  avaiy  parikara  of  ed.  in  Bh.  1.  1.  72.  See 
bar.  Hoffmann-Kutschke  would  take  the  first  word  as  avafe  sta, 
stand  thou  (as  I stand  with  subdued  rebels  before  me). 

avada,  adv.  V) there,  2) thither , 3)haca  avadasa  (i.  e.  avada  -f-  sa, 
abl.  sg.  pron. ; cf.  Bartholomae,  BB,  11,  217.  Foy,  KZ,  35,  29, 
on  the  other  hand  compares  Lat.  sed,  e.  g.,  sed  fraude),  therefrom , 
thence,  [ajvada  for  [a]da[raya]  of  ed.  is  to  be  read  in  Bh.  2.  1.  29, 
followed  by  a lacuna  affording,  as  KT  record,  ‘‘scarcely  room 
for  more  than  two  signs.  The  traces  of  the  last  sign  seem  to  be 
those  of  na  or  ha.”  Can  we  supply  aha,  there  he  did  not  abide  ? 
Cf.  Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud.  1,  18.  YAv.  avaSa  (Turfan  MSS.  ’6od, 
Bal.  oda). 

avapara,  adv.  there  along , there  before.  Read  thus  in  Bh.  2. 
1.  72  for  avada  of  ed. ; cf.  KT,  35.  Bh.  3,  12.  arsada  nama  dida 
[ha] rauvatiya  avapara  atiyais  (Bartholomae,  Gl’undr.  360).  KT 
plainly  record  the  reading  avapara,  thus  setting  aside  Foy’s  con- 
jecture avadapara.  ava  (acc.  sg.  n.)  -f-  *para,  before , Av.  para,  Skt. 
pura. 


70 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


avast[a]ya[m],  reading  of  KT  in  Bk.  1.  1.  91,  in  which  Weiss- 
bach  (ZDMG,  61,  730)  sees  a possible  reference  to  the  Avesta. 

avahana,  n.  dwelling  place.  Mom.  sg.  avahanam.  Skt.  vasana. 
a -j-  *vah,  to  dwell , YAv.  vah,  Skt  . vas. 

avahya,  to  ask  aid , implore.  Denominative  of  *avah,  Av. 
avah;  cf.  Skt.  avasya. 

with  prefix  patiy,  seek  for  help,  supplicate.  Mid.  pret.  1 

Sg.  patiyavahyaiy,  Bh.  1.  13.  adam  auramazdam  patiyavahyaiy,  I prayed 
Ahura  JSLazda  for  help.  “The  true  reading  of  the  radical  part 
of  the  word  is  • — vahyaiy  ( — vahayaiya,  with  hy,  not  y)  as  is  plainly 
shown  in  a photograph  which  I took  of  it  when  I examined  the 
Behistan  Bock  in  1903.  The  verb  patiyavahyaiy  is  therefore  nat- 
urally to  be  connected,  as  a denominative,  with  Av.  avah-,  avahya-, 
aid,  assistance,  support,  cf.  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  179, 
and  see  especially  Friedrich  Muller  in  WZKM,  1,  122,  and  Tol- 
man,  OP.  Insc.  p.  167;  and  it  is  precisely  the  Iranian  equivalent 
of  the  Sanskrit  denominative  avasya-,  seek  for  aid,  take  refuge 
with,  in  Rig  Veda,  I,  116.  23  (avasyate,  dat.  pres,  ptcpl.).”  Jack- 
son,  JAOS,  27,  190.  IvT  confirm  Jackson’s  reading  thus  re- 
moving all  possible  connection  with  the  root  van  (Bartholomae, 
ZDMG,  4S,  156;  Foy,  KZ,  37,  518).  For  Bartholomae’s  later 
view,  see  Zum  Altiran.  Wb.,  217.  The  same  scholar  writes  me 
in  a personal  letter:  ‘‘Die  Turf anhandschrif ten  bieten  padvahld, 
padvaham,  padvahisn,  u.  s.  w,  alle  im  Sinn  des  lat.  supplicari 

avahyaradiy,  adv.  for  this  reason,  therefore,  avahya  (for  avah- 
yaya,  loc.  sg.  f . ; cf.  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  239,  2)  + *radiy,  loc. 
sg.  cause,  Mew  Pers.  ra;  cf.  Justi,  IF,  17,  Anz.  91. 

avaha[r  + +]  thus  read  in  place  of  av[arada]  of  ed.  in  Bh.  2.  1. 
94.  a[va]m  kara  avaha[r  + +],  the  people  forsook  him.  The  Elam, 
version  makes  the  sense  certain.  The  Bab.  is  wanting.  KT 
record:  “The  traces  of  the  sign  following  h are  probably  those 
of  r.  There  is  room  for  one  more  sign  in  this  word."  In  Ydt. 
Stud.  1,  22,  I suggested  the  supplement  avahar[ja],  Skt.  avasrjat, 
(the  people)  cast  off  allegiance  to  him , which  seems  quite  certain 
when  we  compare  Turfan  MSS.  herz.  Weissbach  (ZDMG,  61, 
726)  suggests  avahar[ta],  part.  perf.  to  *har,  Skt.  sar,  weggelavfen 
seiend. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


71 


asa,  in.  horse.  Acc.  s g.  asam  (in  collective  sense),  Bh.  1.  IS. 
aniyahya  asam  franayam,  for  the  rest  I "brought  horses.  This  is 
plainly  the  reading  of  the  stone.  Jackson  records:  “The  read- 
ing asm  + + of  Spiegel,  Kossowicz,  and  Tolman,  or  tasma[kam]  of 
Fr.  Muller,  WZKM,  1,  222,  and  as[pa]  of  Weissbach  and  Bang, 
though  the  latter  were  on  the  right  track,  must  be  abandoned. 
The  word  is  simply  asam,  horse .”  KT  confirm  Jackson’s  reading. 
The  conclusion  of  Gray  (AJP,  21,  7)  concerning  a double  repre- 
sentation by  sp  and  s of  Iranian  sp  is  hereby  shown  to  be  cor- 
rect; cf.  Horn,  Grundr.  d.  neupers.  Etym.,  160,  719.  See  s. 

V.  aspa. 

asagarta  (Elam,  assakartiya;  Bab.  sa-ga-ar-ta-a-a),  m.  Sagartia. 
Norm  Sg.  asagarta.  Acc.  Sg.  asagartam.  Loc.  Sg.  asagartaiy.  Against 
Bartholomae’s  etymology  cf.  Justi,  IF,  17,  Anz.  Ill,  asa  (q.  v.) 
-f-  *garta,  Skt.  garta,  vmgon.  Note  also  Bartholomae,  Zum  Alti- 
ran.  AVb. , 120. 

asagartiya,  adj.  Sagartian.  Nom.  sg.  m.  asagartiya. 

asabari  (thus  read  since  Jackson’s  and  KT’s  confirmation  of 
asa  against  Bartholomae’s  asbari  for  aspabari,  Altiran.  AYb. , 219; 
Htibschmann,  ZDMG,  36,  133;  Justi,  IF,  17,  Anz.  Ill;  Peder- 
sen, KZ,  10,  133),  adj.  mounted  on  horses , horsemen.  Iustr.  pi. 
asabaribis.  New  Pei’S,  suvar.  asa  (q.  v.)  -f-  bari,  fr.  bar  (q.  V.). 

[aspa,  in  composition,  horse.  YAv.  aspa  (New  Pers.  asp,  Afy. 
aspa,  f.,  Oss.  afsa,  Kurd,  hasp,  Socin,  SK,  9),  Skt.  acva]. 

aspacanah,  name  of  Persian,  Aspathines.  Nom.  sg.  aspacana, 
Dar.  NRd.  *aspa  (q.  v.)  4-  *canah,  n.,  desire , YAv.  -cinah,  Skt. 
canas. 

asman,  m.  1 )stone,  2) -firmament , heaven.  Acc.  sg.  asmanam 
(written  asmanam  in  Art.  Pers.  a,  b).  YAv.  asman  (Turfan  MSS. 
’asman,  New  Pers.  asman,  Gab.  asban),  Skt.  acman.  Cf.  KZ,  39, 
69;  Wackernagel,  Ai.  Gram.  71. 

asnaiy,  a doubtful  word  in  Bh.  2.  1.  adam  asnaiy  aham  abiy  uva- 
jam.  The  Elam,  renders  kanna  enni  git.  IV B and  KT  translate 
both  Persian  and  Elam.,  I was  friendly  with  Susiana.  I think 


AXCIEXT  PERSIAN  LEXICOX 


it  doubtful  if  Elam,  kanna  means  friendly , for  it  is  not  likely 
that  [akka  kannas]  is  the  correct  supplement  for  the  Elam,  corres- 
ponding to  Persian  agara  + +,  Bh.  1,  8;  cf.  Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud.  1, 
9.  Bartholomae  (Altiran.  Wb.,  264)  regards  asnaiy  as  loc.  sg.  to 
asna,  march , i.  e.,  I was  on  the  march  to  Susiana.  The  Elam, 
passage  is  discussed  by  Foy  (KZ,  35,  37),  who  favors  the  inter- 
pretation, auf  dem  marsche.  The  Bab.  gives  no  assistance.  Cf. 
Bartholomae,  Grundr.  1,  31;  Foy,  ZDMG,  52,  567. 

azda,  adv.  known  (Bartholomae,  IF,  9,  279;  nom.  sg.  azda 
Johansson,  IF,  2,  28).  Bh.  1.  10.  karahyfa  naiy]  azda  abava,  it  was 
not  hiown  to  the  people.  GAv.  azda  (Middle  Pers.  azd,  Afy.  zda, 
Geiger,  SA,  7),  Skt.  addha. 

[ah  (text,  + + + + a),  to  throw.  Pass,  indie,  pret.  3 sg.  [ahyatja, 
Bh.  1.  19.  aniya  api[y]a  [ahyatja,  the  enemy  (Foy,  the  other  part)  were 
driven  into  the  water.  Rugarli,  il  nemico  fu  gettato  nelV  acgua. 
Cf.  Kern,  ZDMG,  23,  239;  Foy,  IvZ,  37,  554.  Bartholomae, 
AF,  1,  61,  first  suggested  ahadata  (had  = Skt.  sah),  but  later  (Alt- 
iran. "Wb.,  279)  favors  Kern’s  reading.  "WB,  [a]han[jat]a  (hanj  = 
Skt.  sanj) ; Oppert  (Le  people  — des  M6des,  169  [a]ha[ra]ta  (har  = 
Skt.  sar)  which  Gray  favors  in  AJP,  21,  22,  and  which  KT  sup- 
ply, remarking:  “There  is  room  for  this  restoration  on  the 
rock;”  they  translate  the  Elam.,  I drove  them  into  the  river. 
The  Bab.  gives  no  assistance.  YAv.  ah,  Skt.  as.] 

ah  (Pres,  ah-,  h-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  122),  to  be.  Act.  indie, 
pres.  1 Sg.  amiy.  3 Sg.  astiy.  1 pi.  amahy.  3 pi.  hantiy.  Pret.  1 
Sg.  aham.  3 Sg.  aha.  3 pi.  aha'1.  Subj.  2 sg.  ahy  (for  ahahiy. 
"Wrongly  read  in  ed.  and  KT,  ahy.  The  subjunctive  is  certain  as 
seen  in  such  a phrase  as  tuvam  ka  hya  aparam  imam  dipi[m]  patiparsa- 
hy,  thou  whosoever  shalt  hereafter  read  this  inscription / cf.  Tol- 
man, Ydt.  Stud.  1,  30).  3 sg.  ahatiy.  Mid.  pret.  3 pi.  aha“ta 

(written  aha"ta  in  Bh.  3.  11.  49,  51).  Av.  ah,  Skt.  as. 


I,  I 

i (Pres,  ai-,  i-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  122),  to  go.  Indie,  pres. 
3 sg.  aitiy.  Aor.  3 sg.  aisa  (read  ais  or  aisa  with  thematic  vowel). 
Av.  i (New  Pers.  ayaS),  Skt.  i. 


AX  Cl  EXT  PERSIAX  LEXICOX 


73 


with  prefix  a,  come.  Pret.  3 pi.  ayanta  (thematic),  Dar. 

Sz.  c.  3. 

with  prefix  atiy,  go  beyond , go  along.  Aor.  3 sg.  atiyaisa 

(see  aisa). 

with  prefix  abiy(?)  or  upa(?),  go  unto , arrive.  Pret.  1 sg. 

[abiyjayam  (Foy,  ZDMG,  54,  363),  [up]ayam  (\\  B,  KT),  Bh.  1.  19. 
a$iy  (sic;  cf.  KT,  19)  babiru[m  ya#a  naiy  upjayam. 

with  prefix  upariy(?).  Ill  upariy[ayam],  Bh.  4.  13,  upariy  is 

clearly  seen  on  the  stone  (Jackson  and  KT);  ayam,  however,  is 
very  doubtful.  “Instead  of  ayam  naiy,  it  looks  more  like  a long 
word  ending  in  haiy  or  jaiy — the  former  haiy  is,  however,  better, 
and  it  seems  so  to  be  clear,”  JAOS,  24,  93.  KT  read  without 
comment  + + + + naiy.  The  obliquely  meeting  wedges  initial  in 
the  cuneiform  sign  for  h,  which  alone  differentiate  it  from  that 
for  n,  may  of  course  be  in  the  preceding  lacuna.  In  Vdt.  Stud. 
1,  32, 1 proposed  the  rather  desperate  supplement  upariy  [axsayaiy] 
naiy;  see  xsi.  Weissbach  (ZDMG,  61,  729)  reads  upariy  arstam 
upariy  [ayam],  nach  dem  Gesetze  hade  ich  gelierrscht.  Jackson’s  and 
KT's  confirmation  of  upariy  makes  impossible  Foy’s  conjecture 
apariyayam,  KZ,  35,  45.  For  Rawlinson’s  upariy  mam  Jackson  sug- 
gests the  meaning  beyond  measure. 

with  prefix  nij  (Bartholomae,  Grundr.  269,  2,  n.  1),  go 

forth.  Pret.  1 sg.  nijayam. 

with  prefix  patiy,  to  come  unto , be  one's  possession.  Aor. 

3 pi.  patiyaisa11  (with  thematic  vowel,  Bartholomae,  Grundr'.  329, 
360). 


with  prefix  para,  go  forth , proceed.  Irnpv.  pres.  2 sg. 

paraidiy.  Pret.  2 pi.  (Injunctive,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  166), 
paraita.  Part.  nom.  pi.  paraita. 

apariyaaya  of  ed.  and  KT  (Bh.  1.  8)  is  to  be  read  apariyayaD 

for  ahapariyayan;  see  hapariya. 


ida,  adv.  here.  YAv.  iSa,  Skt.  iha. 


74 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


ima,  demon,  pron.  this.  Acc.  sg.  m.  imam.  Acc.  sg.  n.  ima 
(KT  record  auramazdam[aiy]  ima  for  auramazda  mana  of  ed.  in  Bll.  1. 
1.  25).  Acc.  sg.  f.  imam.  Nom.  acc.  pi.  m.  imaiy  (Bartholomae, 
Grundr.  240).  Acc.  pi.  n.  ima.  Nom.  acc.  pi.  f.  ima.  Gen.  pi.  m. 
imaisam  (thus  read  for  imisam  of  KT;  cf.  Weissbach,  ZDMG,  61, 
730),  Bll.  4.  87.  tyam  imaisam  martiyanam  taumam  [ubart]a[m]  par- 
[ibar]a,  die  Nachho m men sc  haft  dieser  Manner  hehiite  wold , 
Weissbach  (op.  cit.),  who  observes  that  ideogram  GUL,  family, 
is  to  be  supplied  before  appa  (m)rub(id)  appi  ir  kuktas  of  Elam,  ver- 
sion, while  in  Bab.  there  is  preserved  a trace  of  zim  before  sabe. 
Av.  ima  (Turfan  MSS.  eim,  New  Pers.  im-),  Skt.  ima.  Note  Tur- 
fan  MSS.  'imesan  < imaisam. 

imanis  (Elam,  ummannis;  Bab.  im-ma-ni-e-su),  m.  name  assumed 
by  Martiya  in  his  insurrection  in  Susiana.  Bh.  2.  3;  4.  2;  f. 

iyam  (*I-am,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  236),  demon,  pron.  this. 
Nom.  sg.  m.  iyam.  In  Dar.  NRe.  iyam  maciya,  Bartholomae 
suggests  the  emendation  imaya  (imaiy).  Nom.  sg.  f.  iyam.  In  Bh. 
4.  1.  90,  the  form  according  to  KT  seems  to  be  written  iya; 
“This  would  be  certain  if  the  reading  of  the  division  wedge  be- 
fore i were  clear  upon  the  rock;”  cf.  Bartholomae,  WZKM,  22, 
66.  Skt.  ayam,  m.,  iyam,  f. , GAv.  ayam,  111. 

i + + a (text  as  confirmed  by  KT  who  record  space  for  two 
signs  in  the  middle  of  the  word.  i[zar]a,  Tolman,  in  place  of 
[iz]i[tus]  of  the  ed.  which  the  Elam,  izzila,  wrongly  read  before 
izzitu,  makes  impossible;  cf.  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  20),  f.  name  of  a dis- 
trict in  Assyria.  Nom.  sg.  i[zar]a,  Bh.  2.  10.  i[zar]a  nama  dah- 
yaus  a$uraya.  Weissbach  (ZDMG,  61,  726)  proposes  i[zal]a. 

is,  to  put  in  motion , send.  Av.  is,  Skt.  is. 

with  prefix  fra,  send  forth.  Caus.  pret.  1 sg.  fraisayam. 

3 Sg.  fraisaya. 

isunam,  reading  of  WB  in  Dar.  NRd.  isunam  darayanta,  Pfeil- 
hewahrer.  Bartholomae,  isuvam  darayanta.  Hoffmann-Kutschke, 
Iran,  denanam  darayanta  = Elam,  tenim  kuktikra,  Trilger  der  Gesetzes- 
tafeln , Or.  Lit.  Ztg. , Sept.,  1906.  Old  reading  isuvam  dasayama, 
cf.  Justi,  ZDMG,  50, 663;  Gray,  AJP,  21,  2;  Foy,  ZDMG,  55, 514. 


ANCIEXT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


to 


u,  u 

u (before  vowels  uv),  aclv.  (in  composition),  good,  well , e.  g. 
xdxa.sta.rn,  well  punished,  umartiya , poss.  good  men , uvaspa,  poss.  good 
horses.  Av.  hu,  Skt.  su,  Gr.  i-yo/s,  living  (cf.  /3ios;  Brug- 
mann,  Gr.  Gram.3  98,  2). 

[ukartajm,  (+  + + + m,  KT.),  a mutilated  word  in  Bh.  d.  1.  76. 
From  the  traces  of  wedges  given  by  KT  I proposed  (AJP,  under 
date  of  Feb.  1908)  the  reading  [ukartajm  kunautuv,  may  he  male 
it  teell  done  (i.  e.  successful),  which  corresponds  closely  with 
the  Elam,  aiak  kutta  appa  huttanti  huhpe  a“uramasta  azzasne,  and 
whatsoever  thou  doest , this  may  Ahura  Mazda  cause  to  succeed. 
In  case  the  word-divider  is  mutilated  (which  is  quite  likely),  the 
obliquely-meeting  wedges  suggest  initial  u.  The  two  small  hor- 
izontals (if  the  second  be  slightly  lower)  may  be  the  sign  for  k, 
while  the  three  parallel  horizontals  are  probably  what  remains 
of  r.  vazarkam  (Oppert,  Foy)  is  also  possible,  but  the  word  cer- 
tainly did  not  begin  with  m,  as  Rawlinson  supposed  (mazanam, 
WB1;  matfitam,  Bartholomae). 

[u]casama,  eye.  Acc.  sg.  [u]casama,  Bh.  2.  13,  Id.  utasaiy  [u]casama 
avajam,  and  I put  out  his  eyes.  KT  regard  the  sign  § as  quite  clear 
and  c as  fairly  certain,  while  the  first  sign  appears  as  u.  Jack- 
son,  however,  feels  less  certain;  “The  obliterated  word  yielded 
no  new  results.  The  internal  letter  looks  more  like  an  h than  it 
does  like  an  s,  but  the  likeness  between  the  two  letters  in  the 
cuneiform  character  leads  easily  to  misapprehension  ” ( JAOS,  2d, 
88).  Weissbach  (ZDMG,  61,  726)  proposes  the  reading  ucasma, 
=hu-casma,  comparing  the  Av.  hu-xsnao0ra.  Jackson  would  inter- 
pret KT’s  reading  as  word-divider  -j-  casma.  Note  Turfan  MSS. 
casm. 

uta,  conj.  and.  The  tendency  of  vasna  auramazdaha  to  begin  the 
clause  places  that  phrase  before  uta  in  Bh.  2.  1;  d.  8;  but  Bar- 
tholomae’s  proposed  emendation  [utajmaiy  (Bh.  d.  1.  d6)  based  on 
this  principle  is  now  set  aside  by  KT’s  reading  [apjimaiy.  Correl. 
with  ca,  Bh.  1.  Id.  adam  karam  gadava  avastayam  parsam[c]a  madam[c]a 
uta  aniya* dahyava.  uta  — uta,  Ijoth  — and , Bh.  1.  12.  adlna  kanbujiyam 
uta  parsam  uta  madam  uta  aniya  dahyava.  YAv.  uta  (TlU’fan  MSS. 
’ud),  Skt.  uta. 


7G 


AX  Cl  EXT  PERSIAX  LEXICOX 


utana  (Elam,  huttana;  Bab.  u-mi-it-ta-na-’;  Gr.  O ravrjs),  m.  Otanes , 
name  of  one  of  the  allies  of  Darius  against  Gaumata.  Norm  sg. 
[u]ta[na]. 

ud,  us,  adv.  up,  forth,  e.  g.  udapatata,  Bh.  2.  5,  et  passim;  us- 
tasana,  Art.  Pers.  1.  3.  Av.  us  (Middle  Pers.  uz,  New  Pers.  zi;  cf. 
Horn,  Grundr.  d.  neupers.  Etym.  143),  Skt.  ud. 

upa,  l)adv.  unto,  to.  Bh.  1.  19.  afty  (sic)  babiru[m  ya#a  naiy  up]- 
ayam  (WB;  KT).  2)prep.  with  acc.  to,  by.  Bh.  3.  6.  karam  par- 
sam  uta  madam  fraisayam  bya  upa  mam  aba.  Av.  upa,  Skt.  upa.  Cf. 
Jud.  Pers.  awaz  upaca. 

upadaranma  (Oppert,  Le  peuple — des  M6des;  Gray,  AJP,  21, 
19.  Elam,  ukpa  + + ranma),  m.  name  of  the  father  of  A0rina,  Bh. 
1.  16.  Gen.  Sg.  upadaranmabya.  upadarma,  der  Ordnung  (cf.  Skt. 
dharma)  untertan , Bartholomae,  Altiran.  AVb.,  390.  Cf.  Husing, 
Ir.  En.  14,  38. 

upariy,  prep,  with  acc.  above,  over,  upariy  arstam  upariy  + + + + 
(Jackson;  KT),  Bh.  4.  13.  YAv.  upairi  (New  Pers.,  Kurd,  bar), 
Skt.  upari. 

upasta,  f.  help,  aid.  Acc.  sg.  upastam.  YAv.  upasta;  upa  sta 

(q.  V.). 

ufrasta  (thus  read  in  Bh.  4.  1.  38;  cf.  KT,  66:  elsewhere  writ- 
ten ufrasta),  part,  pass.,  well  punished.  Bartholomae  formerly 
read  ufrasata,  part,  with  gerundive  meaning,  Whitney,  Skt.  Gr. 
1176,  e.,  but  has  just  recently  changed  his  view  (WZKAI,  22, 
75),  owing  to  the  corrected  reading  ufrasta.  For  interchange  of 
s and  s note  the  Turfan  manuscripts  (F.  AV.  K.  Muller,  SBAAA', 
1904,  I;  II,  1907).  Acc.  Sg.  m.  ufrastam  (ufrastam).  u -j-  frasta,  fl1. 
fras,  to  ask,  examine , punish , Av.  fras  (New  Pers.  pursad),  Skt. 
prchati. 

ufrasti  (thus  read  in  Bh.  4.  1.  69  in  place  of  abifrasti  of  ed. ; cf . 
KT,  73),  f.  severe  punishment.  Loc.  sg.  ufrasta  -(-  adiy  (q.  v.). 
u frasti,  GAv.  farasti,  fr.  fras;  inchoative  pres,  parsa  (q.  v.). 

ufratu  (Elam.  upra[tu];  Bab.  purattu;  Gr.  Eu^)par7/s),  in.  Eu- 
phrates. ufraCuva  (thus  written  on  the  stone  in  Bh.  1.  1.  92  in 


AXCIEXT  PER8IAX  LEXICOX 


77 


place  of  ufratauva  of  ed. ; cf.  KT,  10.  Bartholomae  (1YZKM.  22, 
71)  regards  the  case  as  gen.  sg.  with  anuv  (cf.  schol.  to  Panini,  2. 
1.  16,  gangaya  anu).  In  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  16,  I cite  this  form  as  a 
possible  instance  of  anuv  with  instr.  sg.  According  to  J usti,  IF, 
17,  Anz.  116,  u (q.  v.)  -{-  *fia.ta.,fre  (cf.  Arm.  hrat),  deni  das  heil- 
ige  Feuer  gut  oder  grdidig  ist.  It  seems  more  probable,  how- 
ever, that  the  last  element  of  the  compound  is  a foreign  word. 
Bartholomae  favors  a “ Yolksetymologie.” 

ubarta,  part,  pass.,  well  esteemed.  Bartholomae  formerly  fa- 
vored ubarata,  part,  with  gerundive  meaning,  but  has  now  re- 
turned to  the  older  view;  see  s.  v.  ufrasta.  Acc.  sg.  ubartam. 
u -(-  bar  (q.  V.). 

umartiya,  adj.  possessing  good  men.  Nom.  sg.  f.  umartiya. 
Nom.  Sg.  n.  umartiyam.  u -f-  martiya  (q.  V.). 

u[yam]a  (supplied  from  Elam,  uiyama),  f.  name  of  a fortress  in 
Armenia.  The  reading  u[hy]ama  of  ed.  is  impossible;  cf.  KT, 
30.  Nom.  sg.  u[yam]a,  Bh.  2.  9. 

uvaipasiya,  n.  own  possession  (Elam,  tuman-e).  Acc.  sg.  uvai- 
pasiyam,  Bh.  1.  12.  hauv  ayasata  uvaipasiyam  akuta,  lie  seized  ( the 
power  and ) made  it  his  own  possession.  KT  give  the  traditional 
translation,  he  did  according  to  his  will , which  is  impossible  as 
the  meaning  is  clear  from  both  Elam,  (see  above)  and  Bab.  + + ti 
a-na  sa  ra-ma-ni-su  ut-te-ir,  he  took  it  for  himself;  cf.  Tolman,  Ydt. 
Stud.  1,  11.  YAv.  x'aepai^ya,  Own,  *uvai,  Av.  xvae-  (as  dat.  to  xva, 
Skt.  sva)  + *pasiya,  Av.  *pai0ya,  fr.  *paiti,  selbst  (Bartholomae) 
gehorig  (Foy;  das , woruber  man  herr  ist). 

uvaxstra  (Elam,  makistarra;  Bab.  u-ma-ku-is-tar;  Gr.  Kua^apj;?),  m. 
Cgaxares;  cf.  Tolman  and  Stevenson,  Hdt.  and  Empires  of  the 
East,  68.  Gen.  Sg.  uvaxstrahya,  uvaxstrahya.  u -j-  *vaxstra,  fr.  *vaxs, 
grove,  Av.  vaxs  (Yliddle  Pers.  vaxsltan),  Skt.  vaks.  Justi  (Iran. 
Namenbuch,  110),  retains  the  old  reading  uvaxsatara,  regarding  it 
a comparative  of  u -)-  vaxsa,  growth. 

uvaja  (Elam,  alpirti;  Bab.  e-lam-mat),  nr.  Susiana.  Nom.  sg. 
uvaja.  Acc.  sg.  uvajam.  Loc.  sg.  uvajaiy.  Hubschmann,  Pers. 
Stud.  214,  (h)uvza;  Foy,  KZ,  35,  62,  comparing  Skt.  aja  translates 
ziegenreich ; cf.  KZ,  37,  542. 


AX  C IE  XT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


uvajiya,  adj.  Susian.  Nom.  sg.  uvajiya.  Nom.  pi.  uvajiya. 
Instr.  pi.  uvajiyaibis,  Bh.  5.  1.  10,  [hamaranam  a]kuna[us  hada]  uvaji- 

yaibis,  ( Gobrya s)  waged  battle  with  the  Susians. 

uvadaicaya  (Elam,  matezis  + +),  m.  name  of  a Persian  town. 
Nom.  sg.  uvadaicaya. 

uvamarsiyu,  adj.  dying  by  one’s  own  hand . Nom.  sg.  uvamar- 
siyus,  Bll.  1.  11.  pasava  kanbujiya  uvamarsiyus  amariyata,  afterwards 
Cambyses  died  by  his  own  band , i.  e.  by  suicide  or  by  accident; 
cf.  Hdt.  3,  62.  “As  he  was  leaping  on  his  horse  the  blade  of 
his  sword  struck  his  thigh.”  See  Marquart,  Philol.  Suppl.  6, 
621.  *uva,  Av.  x'a,  Skt.  sva  -f-  "marsiyu,  Av.  mara^yu,  Skt.  mrtyu,  fr. 
mar  (q.  V.). 

uvarazm  i (Elam,  marasmiya;  Bab.  hu-ma-ri-iz-mu),  f.  Chorasmia. 
Nom.  sg.  uvarazmis.  Cf.  YAv.  x'airizam,  Bartholomae,  Grundr. 
402,  n.  2.  Ir.  -zmi-,  Skt.  jmas,  Gr.  ^a/rai,  Foy,  KZ,  35,  1,  23; 
Justi,  IF,  IT,  Anz.  113,  Schoen-land. 

uvarazm'iya,  adj.  Nom.  sg.  m.  uvarazm'iya  in  collective  sense, 
Chorasmia.  Bh.  1.  6;  Dar.  Pers.  e.  2. 

uvaspa,  adj.  possessing  good  horses.  Nom.  sg.  f.  uvaspa.  Nom. 
sg.  n.  [uvaspam],  Dar.  Sz.  c.  1.  u -f-  aspa  (q.  v.). 

ustasana,  f.  staircase , Bauwerk  (IV B),  Treppe  (Bartholomae). 
AcC.  Sg.  ustasanam,  Al't.  Pers.  a,  b,  3.  imam  ustasanam  a^anganam 
mam  upa  mam  karta.  Foy  (IvZ,  35,  60)  reads  ustacanam  (=  ustasanam, 
cf.  xsayarcahya,  Al't.  Sus.  a,  1)  in  Art.  Sus.  C.  imam  + + + + 4.  + 
canam  tya  a^angainam.  us  (see  ud)  -(-  *tasana,  fr.  "tas,  cut,  fashion , 
Av.  tas,  Skt.  taks. 

usabari  (Jackson;  “An  examination  and  reexamination  of  the 
rock  proves  the  certainty  of  this  reading.”  IvT;  “The  reading 
of  the  signs  usa  is  certain”),  adj.  Jackson  suggests  borne  by 
oxen{  ?),  Av.  uxsan,  Skt.  uksan.  Bartholomae’s  ustrabari,  mounted  on 
camels , possible  on  the  theory  that  the  stone-cutter  failed  to  write 
tV,  agrees  with  the  sense  of  the  Elam,  version;  cf.  Tolman, 
Vdt.  Stud.  1, 15.  AVeissbach  (ZDMG,  61,  725)  suggests  usa  as  a 
“Nebenform”  to  ustra.  The  numerous  conjectures,  several  of 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


79 


which  seemed  plausible  before  this  confirmation  of  Oppert’s 
reading,  must  now  be  set  aside,  e.  g.  asabari  (Muller,  WZKM,  1, 
220),  maisabari  (ibid.  11,  252),  isubari  (Gray,  AJP,  21,  20)  etc.;  cf. 
the  literature  in  IvZ,  38,  259.  Acc.  sg.  in.  usabarim,  Bh.  1.  18. 

aniyam  usabarim  akunavam  aniyahya  asam  franayam,  the  one  (part  of  my 
army)  1 put  on  camels;  for  the  other  1 brought  horses. 

uska,  adj.  dry;  n.  dry  land , mainland.  Gen.  sg.  n.  uskahya, 
Dar.  Pei’S,  e.  2.  yauna  tyaiy  uskahya.  YAv.  huska  (New  Pei'S,  xusk, 
Afy.  vuc). 

uzma,  adj.  what  is  up  from  the  earth ; n.  stake,  pile.  Loc.  sg. 
uzmaya  (i.  e.  — ai  -(-  postpos.  a)  with  patiy.  Bh.  2.  13.  uzmayapatiy 
akunavam,  I crucified  him.  ud  (q.  v.)  -f-  *zam,  earth  (Turfan  MSS. 
zamig);  cf.  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  219,  2;  Foy,  KZ,  37,  529; 
Wackernagel,  Ai.  Gram.  72.  Nearly  the  exact  equivalent  ap- 
pears in  the  Turfan  MSS.  qarend  darobadag  (Bartholomae;  da- 
rubadag,  Muller),  they  will  crucify;  qarend  < kar;  daro,  cf. 
New  Pers.  dar,  wood;  bad  < patiy. 


K 

ka,  particle  giving  to  preceding  tuvam,  thou , an  indefinite  force. 
Bab.  man-nu  at-ta  sarru  sa  be-la-a  ar-ki-ia  = Pei’S,  tuvam  [ka]  xsaya[#]iya 
hya  aparam  ahy,  Bh.  4.  19,  thou  whosoever  shalt  be  king  hereafter. 
Cf.  Gray  (JAOS,  23,  60)  who  rejects  Kern’s  view  in  Caland, 
Synt.  der  Pron.  47,  and  regards  ka  as  correspondent  to  the  Do- 
ric Ka  (I.  E.  qa)  with  a generalizing  power. 

ka,  l)interrog.  pronoun,  who?  2)indef.  with  ciy,  any.  Nom. 
sg.  m.  kasciy.  Acc.  sg.  n.  cisciy.  Cf.  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  415. 
Av.  ka  (New  Pers.  ki,  Oss.  k'a),  Skt.  ka.  Note  Turfan  MSS.  ke. 

kaufa,  m.  hill , mountain.  Nom.  sg.  kaufa.  YAv.  kaofa  (Phi. 
kof,  New  Pers.  kch). 

katpatuka  (Elam,  katpatukas;  Bab.  ka-at-pa-tuk-ka;  Gl’.  KamraSoKia), 
m.  Cappadocia.  Nom.  sg.  katpatuka. 


80 


AXCIEXT  PERSIAX  LEXICOX 


kan,  to  dig , chisel  out.  Pres.  inf.  ka"tanaiy.  The  ed.  supply 
akaniy  (Aor.  pass.  3 sg.)in  the  mutilated  portion  of  Dar.  Sz.  c.  3. 
iyam  yuviya  [akaniy].  YAv.  kan  (New  Pei’S,  kandan),  Skt.  khan. 

with  prefix  niy,  obliterate , cause  to  be  forgotten.  Pi-es. 

impv.  3 Sg.  nika'Huv. 

with  prefix  viy  (thus  I read  in  Bh.  4,  11.  71,  73,  77  against 

XT's  visan-;  cf . Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud.  1,  34.  The  question  involves 
simply  the  absence  of  a medial  wedge  in  the  cuneiform  sign. 
Jackson  in  all  these  places  records  the  k as  fairly  clear.  So  too 
the  Elam,  sari  points  to  the  certainty  of  the  reading — kan-;  cf. 
Weissbach,  ZDMG,  61,  729),  destroy.  Pres.  subj.  2 sg.  vikanahy, 
Bh.  4.  11.  71,  73.  vikanah(i)dis,  Bh.  4.  1.  77.  Pret.  3 Sg.  viyaka11, 
Bh.  1.  14. 

kanpada  (kanpanda,  Foy,  IvZ,  37,  531.  Elam,  kampantas),  m. 
name  of  a district  in  Media.  Norn.  sg.  kanpada.  Cf.  Husing,  Ir. 
En.  38. 

kapisakani  (Elam,  kappissakanis),  f.  name  of  a fortress  in  Ara- 
chosia.  Nom.  Sg.  kapisakanis. 

ka”bu  jiya  (Elam,  kanpuziya;  Bab.  kam-bu-zi-ia;  Gl\  Ka/t/Juaiys),  m. 
Cambyses.  Nom.  Sg.  kanbujiya.  Acc.  Sg.  kanbujiyam.  Gen.  sg. 
ka"bujiyahya.  Abl.  Sg.  kanbujiya,  Bh.  1.  11.  kara  haruva  hami#riya 
abava  haca  kanbujiya,  the  'll' hole  people  became  confederate  from  Cam- 
byses. ka"bu  -f-  jiya,  mit  Sehnen  aus  — ?,  Bartholomae,  Altiran. 
Wb.,  437.  kam,  Skt.  kam  -}-  buj,  Skt.  bhuj,  gUickgeniessende,  Foy, 
KZ,  35,  62.  Cf.  KZ,  37,  543;  Justi,  Iran.  Namenbuch,  490. 

kama,  m.  desire , wish.  Nom.  sg.  kama,  Bh.  4.  4.  ya0a  mam 
kama,  as  teas  my  will.  Av.  kama. 

kamna,  adj.  feio.  Nom.  sg.  n.  kamnam,  Bh.  2.  6.  kara  parsa 
n[ta  mjada  hya  upa  mam  aha  hauv  kamnam  aha,  the  Persian  and  the 
JLedian  army , which  was  by  me,  this  was  small.  For  a like  use 
of  the  neuter  we  can  compare  [t]ya  ciyakaram  a[va  dahy]a[va],  Dar. 
NRa.  4.  Foy  (KZ,  35,  38)  would  read  kamnama  regarding  the 
word  as  a superl.  formation.  I suggested  (Ydt.  Stud.  1, 18)  the 
possible  reading  kamnama  (i.  e.  kamna,  noiXl.  Sg.  m.  -f-  ma  = maiy), 


AXCIEXT  PE  RSI  AX  LEXICON 


81 


though  the  objections  to  assuming  ma  = maiy  cannot  be  denied; 
cf.  apanyakama,  Art.  Sus.  a.  The  Elam,  version  shows  no  pro- 
noun here.  Instr.  pi.  kamnaibis.  YAv.  kamna  (New  Pers.  kam). 

kar  (Pres,  kunau-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  131;  Wackernagel, 
Ai.  Gram.  29),  to  do , make . Act.  pres.  subj.  2 sg.  kunavahy. 
Impv.  3 sg.  kunautuv  (wrongly  transliterated  kunutuv  by  KT  in 
Bh.  1.  16,  for  n%  not  nu,  plainly  appears  in  the  cuneiform  text). 
Pret.  indie.  1 sg.  akunavam.  3 sg.  akunaus  (akunas  is  written  in 
Art.  Sus.  a.  1;  cf.  Foy,  KZ,  37,  540).  1 pi.  akunauma?,  Art. 

Hamadan,  1.  7 (akuna  ma  is  written  on  the  stone).  I examined  in 
1905  these  Moldings  of  Columns  from  Ecbatana  and  noted 
clearly  the  presence  of  the  word-divider.  We  cannot  doubt 
that  we  are  dealing  with  a stone-cutter’s  blunder.  I proposed 
(PAPA,  36,  32)  the  epigraphical  emendation  akunauma,  involving 
the  joining  at  right  angles  of  the  first  perpendicular  wedge  with 
the  horizontal  above  in  the  cuneiform  sign  for  a and  the  raising 
of  the  oblique  word-divider  to  a horizontal  position  above  the 
two  remaining  perpendicular  strokes.  The  restored  form  would 
be  the  first  person  plural  of  the  nu  class,  built,  however,  against 
the  rule  on  the  strong  stem,  as  illustrated  by  akunava11,  akunava’Ha. 
The  Persian  akuma  (Ir.  akr-ma)  is,  of  course,  outside  this  class. 
The  same  form  1 would  supply  in  the  lacuna  of  1.  5,  where  I 
spoke  of  a possible  reference  to  the  combined  work  of  Achae- 
menidan  kings.  Bartholomae  (Altiran.  Wb.,  444)  emends  aku- 
navam. Cf.  Foy,  KZ,  37,  540.  3 pi.  akunava11.  Aor.  1 pi.  akuma 
(Bartholomae  Grundr.  290,  n.  1.  In  Bh.  1.  1.  90  Jackson  records 
that  akuma  “though  defaced,  is  still  legible”  (JAOS,  24,  88) 
against  IvT’s  [akjuma).  Perf.  opt.  3 Sg.  caxriya.  Inf.  cartanaiy  (Fr. 
Muller’s  connection  of  the  form  with  root  car,  go,  is  very  im- 
probable, since  the  Elam,  renders  by  the  same  verb,  hutta,  which 
elsewhere  translates  the  Persian  kar).  Mid.  pret.  3 pi.  akunava’Ha, 
akunavayanta  (Bartholomae,  BB,  12,  68,  for  akunavyata  of  ed. ; cf. 
KZ,  39,  153).  Aor.  3 sg.  akuta  (Skt.  akrta).  Pass.  pret.  3 pi. 
akariya"ta  (Bartholomae)  where  KT  record  the  old  reading  asari- 
yata.  In  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  23,  I adopted  Bartholomae's  conjecture 
because  l)a  small  horizontal  wedge  is  all  that  differentiates  s and 
k,  and  2)Jackson  regards  k as  quite  certain  (JAOS,  24,  89). 
Weissbach,  writing  at  about  the  same  date,  likewise  is  of  this 
opinion,  since  the  Elam,  word  (pela)  renders  Persian  kar  of  the 
6 


82 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


phrase,  uzmayapatiy— kar — , in  Bh.  2.  76,  91;  3.  52.  Both  the  Elam. 
((m)u  sera)  and  Bab.  (anaku  teme  altakan)  versions  of  the  passage 
point  to  an  imperative,  I decreed,  saying , let  them , etc. ; but  there 
is  probably  not  an  exact  correspondence  here,  since  we  have  no 
evidence  of  a final  m in  the  word.  Part.  noru.  n.  kartam  (karta  is 
written  in  the  loose  syntax  of  Art.  Pers.  a,  b,  3,  4).  Av.  kar 
(Turfan  MSS.  qerd,  qar,  New  Pers.  kardan,  Gil.  kudan),  Skt.  kr. 

kara,  m.  1 )the  people.  2) army . Nom.  sg.  kara.  Acc.  sg. 
karam.  Gen.  sg.  karahya  (in  addition  to  its  recorded  occurrences 
[kjarahya  is  to  be  read  for  udapatata  of  the  ed.  in  Bh.  3.  1.  80;  cf. 
KT,  56).  New  Pers.  kar-zar,  battle-field , Bartholomae,  Altiran. 
Wb.,  465. 

karka,  m.  name  of  a people,  Nom.  pi.  karka. 

karsa,  m.  name  of  a Persian  weight.  Nom.  du.  karsa.  Dar. 

Weight  Inscr.  II  karsa  adam  darayavaus , a two  karsha  weight. 

I am  Darius , etc.  Gray  (JAOS,  20,  55)  determines  the  value 
of  this  weight  (2573  grains  Troy  = 15.5  Ind.  karsas;  one  Persian 
karsa  = 7.75  Ind.  karsa.  Gray’s  7.25  Ind.  karsa  is  certainly  a 
‘Druckfehler’).  Skt.  karsa  (s.  v.  karsa  in  PWb).  Cf.  Weissbach, 
ZDMG,  61,  402,  “2  karsa  (bez.  2 kursam,  ^ mana).” 

kuganaka  (Elam,  kukkannakan;  Bab.  ku-gu-na-ak-ka),  f.  name  of  a 
Persian  (according  to  Elam,  version)  town.  Nom.  sg.  kuganaka, 
Bh.  2.  3.  kuganaka  na[ma  vardanam  parsaiy]. 

ku”duru  (anaptyxis  for  kundru,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  300,  6. 
Elam,  kuntarrus;  Bab.  ku-un-du-ur),  m.  name  of  a Median  town. 
Nom.  sg.  kundurus. 

kuru  (Elam,  kuras;  Bab.  ku-ra-as;  Gr.  KCpos),  m.  Cyrus.  Nom. 
sg.  kurus.  I fail  to  see  any  valid  reason  why  the  small  inscrip- 
tion of  Murghab,  adam  kurus  xsaya&ya  haxamanisiya,  should  not  be 
assigned  to  the  reign  of  Cyrus  the  Great;  cf.  Herzfeld,  Pasar- 
gadti,  Klio,  Beitr.  z.  alt.  Gesch.,  8,  1908;  Hoffmann-Kutschke, 
Phil.  Nov.  1907;  Foy,  ZDMG,  54,  361.  Many  scholars  influ- 
enced by  the  fact  that  the  documents  of  Cyrus  are  written  in 
Babylonian,  and  by  Weissbach’s  interpretation  of  a doubtful 
passage  in  the  Elam.  Bh.  L.  that  Darius  was  the  first  to  inscribe 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


83 


in  the  Persian  tongue  (zaumin  ai’uramasta-na  (m)u  (det)tuppime  taie- 
ikki  hutta  arriya-ma)  put  this  in  the  time  of  Cyrus  the  Younger. 
Sayce  goes  to  the  extreme  of  assigning  it  to  a Persian  satrap, 
the  brother  of  Xerxes,  called  Achaemenes  by  Ivtesias.  For  the 
place  of  Cyrus  in  Achaemenidan  dynasty,  see  Cyrus  Cylinder, 
20  (where  Teispes  is  recorded  as  the  common  ancestor  with  Da- 
rius line;  cf.  Tolman  and  Stevenson,  Hdt.  and  Empires  of  East, 
73  fl'.).  Nom.  sg.  kurus,  Cyrus  Inscr.  Gen.  sg.  kuraus,  Bh.  1.  10. 
ka”bujiya  nama  kuraus  pu0ra,  Cambyses  by  name  the  son  of  Cyrus. 
Bh.  1.  11.  adam  bardiya  amiy  hya  kuraus  pu#ra,  I am  Smerdis  the  SOU 
of  Cyrus , et  passim. 

kusiya,  m.  name  of  a people.  Nom.  pi.  kusiya,  Dar.  NRa.  3. 


X 

xarsadasya?  Of  the  fifth  character  only  the  two  perpendicu- 
lar wedges  are  visible,  which  can  represent  i as  well  as  d.  Justi 
taking  signs  in  order  15678231  reads  xisyarsa,  Bab.  form  of  name 
of  Xerxes.  Seal  Inscr.  e.  m xarsadasya.  Cf.  M6nant,  Archives 
des  missions  scientifiques,  3,  118;  Justi,  Iran.  Namenbuch,  173; 
IF,  17,  Anz.  112;  Foy,  KZ,  37,  566;  Bartholomae,  Zum  Altiran. 
Wb.,  163.  See  xsayarsan. 

XS  see  xsayatfiya. 

xsatfrita  (Elam,  sattarrita;  Bab.  ha-sa-at-ri-it-ti),  m.  name  assumed 
by  Phraortes,  the  Median  pretender.  Nom.  sg.  xsatfrita.  Cf. 
Tolman  and  Stevenson,  Hdt.  and  Empires  of  East,  69. 

xsa0ra,  n.  lordship , Mngdom.  Nom.  acc.  sg.  xsa<9’am.  Av. 
xsaGa  (New  Pers.  sahr),  Skt.  ksatra,  fr.  xsi  (q.  v.).  I would  sup- 
ply [utamaiy  xsa#'am]  for  [haca  gasta]  of  WB  in  Art.  Ham.  1.  6. 
See  Tolman,  PAPA,  36,  33. 

xsa0rapavan,  m.  satrap.  Nom.  sg.  xsa(9rapava.  xsa(9ra  (q.  v.)  -f- 
pavan,  fr.  pa  (q.  v.).  Cf.  Lenschau,  Leipz.  Stud.  12,  137. 


xsap,  f.  night.  Gen.  sg.  ? xsapa  (cf.  Slit,  ksapas usras,  night 

and  day , RV.  6.  52,  15;  7, 15,  8),  against  the  view  which  now  gen- 


81 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


erally  regards  xsapa  as  acc.  sg.  after  the  analogy  of  the  following 
neutr.  rauca.  Bh.  1.  T.  xsapava  raucapativa,  either  by  night  or  day. 
TAv.  xsap  (New  Pers.  sab,  Bal.  sap,  Geiger,  SB,  3,  Afy.  spa, 
Kurd,  sav,  Oss.  axsav),  Skt.  ksap.  It  might  be  added  that  Bar- 
tholomae  (Grundr.  219)  formerly  regarded  the  form  as  instr.  sg. 
comparing  Skt.  ksapa,  but  has  now  abandoned  this  view  in  favor 
of  the  acc.  sg. ; cf.  Altiran.  Wb.,  517;  Delbriick,  Ygl.  Syntax, 
1,  124;  3,  105. 

xsayatfiya  (written  as  ideogram  in  Dar.  Pers.  b,  c;  Sus.  a;  Sz. 
b,  c;  Seal  Inscr. ; Xerx.  Pers.  ca,  cb;  Vase  Inscr. ; Art.  Sus.  a, 
b;  Hamadan;  Vase  Inscr.),  m.  king.  Norn.  sg.  xsayaftya.  Acc. 
Sg.  xsayatfiyam.  Gen.  Sg.  xsayafliyahya.  For  gen.  Sg.  xsayaftya  in 
Art.  Pers.  a,  b,  2.  Nom.  pi.  xsaya&ya.  Gen.  pi.  xsayafliyanam 
(written  xsayafliyanam  in  Art.  Pers.  a,  b,  2;  and  xsayafliyana  in  Art. 
Sus.  b,  which  blunder  of  the  stone-cutter  I was  able  to  attest  by 
an  examination  of  the  original  which  I made  in  1895).  The 
royal  title  xsaya&ya  xsaya^iyanam  (New  Pers.  sahansah  for  sabansah), 
king  of  kings , in  Dar.  Pers.  a.  and  Xerx.  Pers.  e.  was  the  first 
expression  translated,  but  not  then  transliterated,  from  the  cu- 
neiform. This  was  done  by  Grotefend  who  later  read  in  part 
the  two  inscriptions;  {l) Darius,  the  great  king , king  of  kings  + 
+ + + son  of  Hystmjpes.  (2 ) Xerxes,  the  great  king , king  of  kings 
+ + + + son  of  Darius,  the  king.  See  the  interesting  account  in 
Rogers,  History  of  Babylonia  and  Assyria,  Yol.  I,  1-84.  Bar- 
tholomae  (Altiran.  Wb.)  recognizes  a survival  of  the  adjectival 
meaning  in  Bh.  1.  3.  bya  amaxam  tauma  xsaya[0iya  a]ha,  i.  e.  Our 
family  was  royal  rather  than  our  family  were  kings.  For  at- 
tributive gen.  in  the  oft-recurring  phraseology,  cf.  Delbriick, 
Vgl.  Syntax,  3,  102.  Phi.  New  Pers.  sab;  fr.  xsi  (q.  v.). 


xsayarsan  (Elam,  kserssa;  Bab.  hi-si-’-ar-si,  Gr.  Sep^s),  m.  Xerxes. 
Nom.  sg.  xsayarsa.  Acc.  sg.  xsayarsam  (Bartholomae,  Grundr.  213, 
2).  Gen.  sg.  xsayarsabya  (Hamadan.  “The  common  xsayarsahya 
instead  of  xsayarcahya  must  be  read  in  1.  3.  That  the  correct 
spelling  appears  here  as  in  the  inscriptions  of  Xerxes  at  Perse- 
polis,  Elvend,  and  Van,  is  shown  by  the  unmistakable  occur- 
rence of  — sahya  at  the  beginning  of  1.  4.”  Tolmau,  Reexami- 
nation of  the  Inscription  of  Art.  II  on  Moldings  of  Columns 
from  Ecbatana,  PAPA,  36/  32.)  In  Art.  Sus.  a,  written  xsayar- 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


85 


cahya.  For  gen.  sg.  xsayarsa,  in  Art.  Pers.  a,  b.  2.  Justi,  Iran. 
Namenbuch  (cf.  IF,  IT,  Anz.  Ill)  would  identify  xarsadasya(q.v.), 
Seal  Inser.  e,  with  xsayarsa.  *xsaya,  king , Av.  xsaya,  Skt.  ksaya 
*arsan,  man , 1 Av.  arsan,  Skt.  rsabha,  Gl'.  apa-qv. 

xsi  (Pres,  xsaya-,  Bartholomae,  Gruudr.  123),  to  rule.  Av.  xsi 
(New  Pers.  sayad),  Skt.  ksi. 

with  prefix  patiy,  hold  lordship  over.  Mid.  pret.  1 sg. 

patiyaxsayaiy,  Dar.  NRa.  3.  adamsam  patiyaxsayaiy.  This  reading 
is  clearly  shown  in  Stolze’s  photograph,  Pers.  II,  109  (cf.  Foy, 
KZ,  35,  49),  thus  setting  aside  patiyaxsaiy  of  ed.  and  all  former 
theories  connecting  it  with  axs,  see. 

with  prefix  upariy(?),  rule.  Mid.  pret.  1 sg.  upariy  [axsayaiy], 

a bold  supplement  which  I suggested  (Vdt.  Stud.  1,  33)  in  Bh. 
4.  1.  65,  upariy  arstam  upariy  [axsayaiy]  naiy,  with  rectitude  \ h ruled\ , 
as  corresponding  to  Elam,  sutur  ukku  hupa  git,  I ruled  in  accord- 
ance with  the  ordinances;  Bab.  ina  di-na-a-tu  a-si-ig-gu,  in  accordance 
with  the  laws  I governed.  Does  the  supplement  answer  in  any 
way  to  the  lithograph  of  Rawlinson,  who  on  the  weathered  sur- 
face of  the  rock  may  have  confounded  the  signs  for  yaiyana  with 
those  for  ya  + + taha?  KT  do  not  remark  on  the  space  in  the  la- 
cuna, but  Jackson  says:  “It  looks  like  a long  word  ending  in 
haiy.”  Weissbach  (ZDMG,  61,  729)  favors  the  old  reading 

upariy  [ay am] . 

xsna,  to  know.  Inchoative  pres.  subj.  2 sg.  xsnasahy.  Dar. 
NRa.  4,  xsnas[ah(i)dis].  3.  sg.  xsnasatiy.  Av.  xsna  (Turf an  MSS. 
‘isnased,  New  Pers.  sinasad),  Skt.  jfia. 


G 

gai0a,  f.  personal  property.  KT  translate  Persian  and  Elam. 
herds.  The  Bab.  word  is  wanting.  Darmesteter,  les  formes ; 
Rugarli,  le  campagne ; WB,  die  Ilerden , Bartholomae,  fahrende 
Habe ; Justi  (IF,  17,  Anz.  108),  Gehbfte.  Ace.  sg.  gai<9am,  Bh, 
1.  14.  Av.  gae«9a,  life , subsistence , vjorld  (New  Pers.  gehan, 
world),  fr.  ji,  live,  Skt.  jl-va-ti.  For  meaning  (as  well  as  ety- 
mology) cf.  (3l-o s,  life,  livelihood  ((31oto<s)-,  cf.  Tolrnan,  Ydt.  Stud. 
1,  13. 


86 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


gaubruva  (Elaill.  gauparma;  Bab.  gu-ba-ru-’;  Gl*.  Tu/SpvoLs),  m.  Go- 
bryas , ally  of  Darias  against  the  pretender  Gaumata.  Nom.  s g. 
gaubruva.  According  to  Justi  (IF,  17,  Anz.  Ill)  *gau,  cattle  + 
“'baruva,  Skt.  bharu,  lord , Hinder  besitzend.  Otherwise  Foy, 
ZDMG,  51,  360.  Cf.  Tolman  and  Stevenson,  Hdt.  and  Empires 
of  East,  87,  n.  4. 

gaumata  (Elam,  gaumatta;  Bab.  gu-ma-a-tu),  in.  the  Median  pre- 
tender who  assumed  the  name  of  Smerdis.  Nom.  sg.  gaumata. 
Acc.  sg.  gaumatam.  The  popular  version,  followed  by  Hdt.  Ill, 
61-61,  which  designated  the  conspirator  by  the  name  “ Smerdis” 
was  doubtless  based  on  a vaticinium  post  eventual  showing  an 
ambiguity  in  the  oracular  vision  as  well  as  a personal  negligence 
in  Cambyses’  failure  to  fathom  its  true  meaning.  Cf.  Tolman 
and  Stevenson,  Hdt.  and  Empires  of  East,  86-88;  Noldeke,  Auf- 
satze  z.  pers.  Gesch.  30;  Muller,  Ztschr.  f.  Assyriologie,  9, 112. 

gausa,  m.  ear.  Acc.  du.  gausa.  YAv.  gaosa  (New  Pers.  gos, 
Oss.  yos,  Kurd,  guh),  Skt.  ghosa,  sound;  fr.  gus,  hear. 

ga#u,  m.  1 )place.  2) throne . Acc.  sg.  ga6W.  Dar.  NRa.  1. 
[tya]i[y  mana]  ga#um  barantiy,  who  bear  my  throne.  Eoc.  sg,  (with 
postpos  a),  ga#ava,  Bh.  1.  11.  adamsim  ga$ava  avastayam,  I settled  it 
in  its  place.  KT’s  ga^va  should  be  read  gaflava;  cf.  Bartholomae, 
BB,  13,  69;  KZ,  30,  510.  Av.  gatu  (Turfan  MSS.  gah,  New 
Pers.  gab,  Afy.yal'ai),  Skt.  gatu. 

gardara  (Bab.  pa-ar-u-pa-ra-e-sa-an-na),  m.  name  of  a region.  Nom. 
Sg.  gandara. 

ga"dutava  (thus  read  according  to  KT  in  place  of  Justi’s  emen- 
dation gandumava.  Elam,  kantuma  + + +),  m.  name  of  a district  in 
Arachosia.  Nom.  sg.  gandutava,  Bh.  3.  11.  Hoffmann-Kutschke 
writes  me  (May  17,  1908)  that  he  still  favors  gandumava  on  the 
ground  of  a possible  error  in  KT’s  record;  “ga"dumava  nach  elam. 
kantuma-[ma]  selbst  verstandlich.”  Justi's  etymology  (ZDMG, 
51,  210)  connecting  gandumava  with  YAv.  gantuma,  wheat , is  possi- 
ble only  on  the  supposition  of  a local  change  of  the  surd  to  so- 
nant after  the  nasal;  cf.  Foy,  KZ,  37,  518. 

gam  (Pres,  jam-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  122),  to  go.  Av.  gam 
(Turfan  MSS.  pra-gamed,  New  Pers.  amadan),  Skt.  gam. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


87 


with  prefix  a,  come.  Pres.  opt.  3 sg.  ajamiya  (=  Skt. 

gamyat,  AA'ackernagel,  Ai.  Gram.  8;  I.  E.  gmm-ie-t). 

with  prefix  para,  go  forth.  Part.  nom.  sg.  f.  paragmata. 

with  prefix  ham,  come  together , assemble.  Part.  nom.  pi. 

m.  hangmata.  KT  have  followed  AY  IPs  hagamata  (even  in  their  ex- 
ception ha"gmata  in  Bh.  3.  11).  In  all  places  the  word  is  better 
read  ha'Vmata;  cf.  Fov,  KZ,  37,  511. 

garmapada,  (Elam,  karmapattas),  m.  name  of  a Persian  month. 
KT  favor  the  identification  of  Garmapada  with  Tammuz  (J une- 
July);  July-Aug.  (Justi);  March-Apr.  (Oppert).  See  s.  v.  mah. 
Gen.  Sg.  garmapadahya  (in  place  of  garmapadahya  of  ed.).  "gar  in  a, 
heat , Skt.  gharma,  Av.  garsma,  warm  (New  Pei’S,  garm,  Oss.  yarm) 
-j-  *pada,  step , station , Skt.  pada,  YAv.  paSa  (New  Pers.  pai);  fr. 
*pad,  go,  YAv.  pad,  Skt.  pad.  For  date  of  Gaumata’s  assumption 
of  royal  power  see  s.  v.  0ard. 

gasta,  adj.  repugnant , advei'se.  Nom.  sg.  f.  gasta,  Dar.  NRa. 
6.  hauvtaiy  gasta  ma  ^adaya,  may  it  (i.  e. , the  law  of  Ahura  Mazda) 
not  seem  to  thee  repugnant.  New  Pers.  gast.  Thumb  (Tolman, 
OP.  Inscr.  117,  n 3)  returned  to  Kern’s  interpretation  (ZDMG, 
23,  222)  respecting  gasta  as  connected  with  Skt.  gad,  speak , and 
the  hya  of  the  preceding  phrase  as  the  opt.  3 sg.  of  ah,  translat- 
ing; Lass  dir  die  lehre  des  Auramazda  gesagt  sein.  That  this 
view  is  incorrect  is  shown  by  the  Elam,  visnika  (AVeissbach)  and 
the  Bab.  bi-i-si,  both  of  which  signify  evil,  hostile;  cf.  Htibsch- 
mann;  er  soil  dir  nicht  iibel  erscheinen. 

gud,  to  conceal.  YAv.  guz,  Skt.  guh. 

with  prefix  apa,  hide  away , conceal.  Caus.  pres.  subj.  2 

Sg.  apagaudayahy.  Pret.  2 sg.  (Injunctive)  apagaudaya,  Bh.  4.  10. 
ava#a  sa  + + + + adiy  ma  apagaudaya,  thus  + + + + conceal  thou  not. 

gub  (Pres,  gauba-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  123),  to  speak.  Mid. 
1 )to  call  one’s  self  take  the  name  of.  2)to  declare  allegiance  to. 
Mid.  indie,  pres.  3.  Sg.  gaubataiy,  Bh.  3.  10.  karam  hya  darayavahaus 
xsayafliyahya  gaubataiy,  the  army  which  declares  allegiance  to  Da- 
rius the  king.  Pret.  3 Sg.  agaubata,  Bh.  3,  10.  hauv  vahyazdata  hya 


88 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


bardiya  agaubata  (written  agaurata  by  stone-cutter’s  blunder;  cf.  KT, 
51),  that  Yahyazdata  who  has  assumed  the  name  of  Smerdis. 
3 pi.  [aga]u[ban]ta,  Bh.  2.  16.  Subj.  pres.  3 sg.  gaubataiy.  Middle 
Pers.  gowet,  New  Pers.  goyad;  cf.  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  IVb.,  182. 

grab  (Pres,  garb-a-ya-,  Skt.  grbh-a-ya-;  cf.  Kretschmer,  IvZ,  31, 
103),  to  Seize.  Act.  pret.  1 Sg.  agarbayam.  3 Sg.  agarbaya.  3 pi. 
agarbaya".  Mid.  pret.  3 Sg.  agarbayata. 

with  prefix  a,  seize.  Part.  pass.  nom.  sg.  m.  agarbita 

(so  Bartholomae,  WZKM,  22,  65,  who  compares  Skt.  agrbbita), 
thus  read  for  agarbayata  of  ed.  in  Bh.  2.  1.  73,  fravartis  agarbita 
anayata,  Phraortes  seized  was  led.  KT’s  view  that  we  have  here 
the  passive  form,  3 sg. , is  not  likely.  Av.  grab,  Skt.  grabh. 


C 

ca,  end.  conj.  and.  Av.  ca  (Middle  Pers.  ca),  Skt.  ca. 

[Word-divider  -f-  casma,  eye.  Jackson’s  reading  for  ucasama 
in  Bh.  2.  13,  11]. 

cincixri  (Elam,  zinzakris;  Bab.  si-in-sa-ah-ri-is),  m.  name  of  the 
father  of  Martiya.  Gen.  sg.  cf'cixrais. 

cita,  adv.  so  long , Bh.  2.  9,  11;  with  yata,  until.  Wrongly 
supplied  in  the  ed.  in  Bh.  2.  1.  28;  cf.  KT,  26.  ci  (cf.  ka)  -f-  ta 

(cf.  -Ta  ill  ’eVeira). 

ci^'a,  n.  seed,  lineage;  second  member  of  the  compound  in 
ariya  c[i]#ra,  of  Aryan  lineage ; see  ariya.  Av.  ci^ra  (New  Pers. 
cihr),  Skt.  citra. 

ci0'antaxma  (Elam,  zissantakma;  Bab.  si-it-ra-an-tah-ma),  m.  name 
of  a Sagartian  rebel.  Nom.  sg.  ci0ra"taxma.  Instr.  sg.  ci#ra"tax- 
ma.  ci^ra  (q.  V.)  -f-  "taxma,  hrave , Av.  taxma  (New  Pers.  tahm) 

ciy,  end.  pel.  l)makes  indefinite  the  interr.  pron.,  e.  g.,  kasciy, 
any  one , cisciy,  anything;  2)emphasizes  slightly  the  word  to  which 
itis  joined,  e.  g. , Bh.  1.  11.  ya^a[par]uvam[ci]y,_7b<.s7a.y  ^'?{.'«*,Z»^/br^. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


89 


Cf.  Delbrtick,  Vgl.  Syntax,  3,  49.  YAv.  cit,  GAv.  cit  (Middle 
Pers.  ci,  New  Pers.  cih,  Oss.  ci,  Kurd,  cl),  Skt.  cit;  Acc.  n.  of  ka 
with  palatalization. 

ciyakara,  adj.  how  many,  restricted  in  number.  Nom.  sg,  n. 
ciyakaram,  Dar.  NRa.  4.  Cf.  Foy,  KZ,  35,  47;  Bartholomae, 
Altiran.  Wb.,  597.  *ciya  (cf.  ka),  Skt.  kiyant  -f-  "kara,  fr.  kar  (q. 
v.).  ciyan  of  ed.  is  better  read  ciya-  (for  ciyat). 

caisapai,  read  cispi  (Elam,  zispis;  Bab.  si-is-pi-is)  or  caispi  (Gr. 
TetWj;?),  m.  Teispes,  common  ancestor  of  Cyrus  (Cyrus  Cylin- 
der, 20)  and  Darius  (Bh.  1.  2;  Bk.  a).  Cf.  Pr&sek,  Forsck.  z. 
Gesch.  d.  Altert.  3,  24,  vs.  the  extreme  view  of  Winckler,  Or. 
Lift.  Ztg.  1898,  43;  Tolman  and  Stevenson,  Hdt.  and  Empires 
of  East,  73-78.  Nom.  sg.  cispis,  Bh.  a (omitted  in  Bh.  1.  2;  KT 
record  that  there  is  room  for  this  restoration  on  the  eroded  sur- 
face of  the  rock).  Gen.  sg.  cispais,  Bh.  1.  2. 


J 

jatar  (nom.  ag.),  m.  smiter,  slayer.  Nom.  sg.  jata,  Bh.  4. 
11.  auramazdatay  jata  blya,  may  Ahura  Mazda  be  thy  slayer,  i.  e. 
may  he  slay  thee;  cf.  the  so-called  Skt.  Periphrastic  Future, 
Whitney,  Skt.  Gram.  942-4.  jata  can  also  be  read  janta;  cf. 
Bartholomae,  IF,  4.  128.  For  this  curse  upon  the  would-be 
destroyer  of  the  royal  memorial,  note  phraseology  of  Inscr.  of 
Asur-nasir-pal  (Schrader,  Iveilinschriftliche  Bibliothek,  Yol.  I. 

122),  asur  bilu  rabu-u  ilu  as-su-ru-u  bit  si-ma-a-ti  s[i-m]a-ti-su  li-ru-ur 
ip-si-ti-su  lu-na[k-ki]-ir,  Ashur  the  great  Lord,  the  Assyrian  God , 
Lord  of  Fate,  may  he  curse  the  fate  of  him  {udw  destroys  this 
monument)  and  amiihilate  his  works.  Cf.  Bang,  Melanges  de 
Harlez,  11;  Tolman,  PAPA,  33,  70.  YAv.  jantar  (Middle  Pers. 
zatar),  Skt.  hantar;  fr.  jan  (q.  V.). 

jad  (Pres,  jadiya-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  147)  to  pray.  Pres. 
1 Sg.  jadiyamiy,  Dar.  NRa.  5.  aita  adam  auramazdam  jadiyamiy,  this  1 
beg  of  Ahura  Mazda.  Dar.  Pers.  d.  3.  yanam  (Jackson,  JAOS, 
27,  191)  jadiyamiy  (The  m of  jadiyamiy,  though  hardly  legible  in 
Stolze’s  photograph,  is  attested  by  Jackson  as  “quite  clear  on 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


90 


the  stone  ’’  and  should  now  be  removed  from  brackets  in  the  ed.). 
T Av.  jad  (Turfan  MSS.  nizay(and). 


jan  (Pres,  jan-,  ja-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  122),  to  smite , slay. 
Indie,  pret.  1 S g.  ajanam,  Bll.  4.  2.  adamsim  ajanam,  I waged  these 
(battles) ; wrongly  KT,  I overthrew  vine  kings.  3 sg.  ajan.  In- 
junctive, 2 pi.  jataa  (jata  or  janta).  Pres.  impv.  2 sg.  jadiy.  Av. 
jan  (isew  Pei'S,  zanad,  Kurd,  zanin),  Skt.  han. 

with  prefix  ava,  smite  down , slay.  Part.  nom.  sg.  avajata. 

This  reading  recorded  by  KT  in  Bh.  1.  1.  32,  sets  aside  Bartholo- 
mae’s  conjecture  avajata  and  confirms  Rawlinson’s  lithograph 
avaietter  jata.  KT’s  cuueiform  text  shows  no  space  between  va  and 
ja;  cf.  Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud.  1,  10. 

with  prefix  ava  -f-  a,  smite  down , destroy.  Indie,  pret.  1 

Sg.  avajanam.  3 Sg.  avaja11.  3 pi.  avajana11  (with  thematic  vowel; 
cf.  Skt.  ahanan,  'Whitney,  PVf.  202).  Opt.  3 sg.  avajaniya;  cf. 
Wackernagcl,  Ai.  Gram.  8. 

with  prefix  patiy,  wage  (battle)  against , fight.  Mid.  pret. 

3 sg.  patiyajata,  Dar.  NKa.  4. 

with  prefix  fra,  cut  off.  Pret.  1 sg.  frajanam. 

ji  (I.  E.  gei-,  Pres,  ji-va-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  141;  cf.  Skt. 
jl-va-ti),  to  live.  Subj.  2 sg.  jlva,  Bh.  4.  10.  dargam  jlva,  mayest 
thoxij  live  long.  Av.  jivaiti  (New  Pers.  zinda,  Kurd,  zin),  Skt.  jivati. 

jiyamna  (thus  read  for  jiyamana  of  KT;  cf.  Weissbach,  ZDMG, 
61,  726.  KT’s  record  supersedes  the  various  emendations  of 
iyamanam  of  ed.)  adj.  waning,  growing  old , as  subs,  completion , 
end.  Acc.  Sg.  jiyamnam,  Bh.  2,  1.  62.  #uravaharahya  mahya  jiyam- 
nam  patiy,  at  end  of  the  month  Th  vravdhara  • or  as  Bartholomae 
(WZKM,  22,  9)  puts  it,  mensem  senescentem  versus.  Elam,  ver- 
sion renders,  at  the  end  of  the  month  Turmarg  Bab.  on  the  thir- 
tieth day  of  the  month  lyyar.  Cf.  Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud.  1,  20. 
YAv.  jyamna,  fr.  jya,  grow  weak. 

jiva,  adj.  living.  Gen.  sg.  jivahya.  Av.  jva,  Skt.  jlva;  fr.  jx 
(q.  v.). 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


91 


T 

taiy  (end.  I.  E.  t(u)ei,  t(u)oi,  Bartholomae,  Stud.  1.  111).  See 
tuvam. 

tauma,  f.  family.  Nom.  sg.  tauma.  Gen.  sg.  taumaya.  Foy 
(KZ,  35,  6)  connects  the  word  with  YAv.  taoxman  (New  Pers. 
tuxm),  Skt.  tokman,  but  such  etymology  becomes  somewhat  un- 
certain when  we  remark  the  retention  of  Ir.  x in  -taxma  (ci#’antax- 
ma),  Av.  taxma  (New  Pers.  tahm).  Jacksons  identification 
(J AOS,  20,  57)  of  the  festival  of  Xerxes’  birthday  (Hdt.  9.  110; 

Ilepcrturt  /Lev  rvxra,  Kara  Se  rrjv  EAAt^voiv  yXuiaaav  reAcor)  with  Iranian 
root  tuk  holds  good  for  YAv.  taoxman,  but  we  are  not  certain  of 
the  comparison  which  he  gives  with  Persian  tauma.  It  would  be 
easy  for  the  Greeks,  of  course,  to  confound  the  foreign  word 
with  tvktix  and  render  it  by  tcAcov. 

[tauman  (Foy,  KZ,  35,  47;  cf.  Bang,  ZDMG,  43,  533;  Reich- 
elt,  KZ,  39,  74;  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  613)  n.  power, 
might.  Nom.  Sg.  tauma,  Bh.  4.  16,  17 ; 5.  3,  6,  yava  tauma  ahatiy,  OS 
long  as  will  he  possible.  Foy  renders  the  corresponding  Elam, 
word,  patta , possibility,  cf.  Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud.  1.  34.  Iloffmann- 
Kutschke  writes  me:  “Es  kann  doch  nicht  bedeuten,  clu  bewahre , 
so  lange  deine  Familie  lebt;  man  kann  doch  nur  schutzen,  so 
lange  man  selbst  lebt.  Ubrigens  steht  in  Elamischen  nicht  das 
Ideogramm  GUL,  Familie.'1'  *tu,  be  strong , Av.  tu,  Skt.  tu.] 

takabara,  adj.  a word  of  doubtful  meaning  and  characterizing 
the  Ionians  in  Dar.  NRa.  3.  Nom.  pi.  m.  takabara.  \\  B retain 
the  old  interpretation,  vjelche  geflochtenes  Hoar  tragen.  Cf.  Foy, 
KZ,  35,  63  and  later  KZ,  37,  545.  Bartholomae  rejects  on  phil- 
ological grounds  the  attempted  connection  with  Arm.  tagavor, 
Krone  tragend.  Could  the  word  signify  swift-  (YAv.  tak,  hasten , 
Skt.  tak)  riding  or  sea-faring  (YAv.  taka,  water-course  + bara, 
cf.  asabari)  ? 

taxmaspada  (Elam,  takmaspata),  m.  name  of  one  of  the  com- 
manders of  Darius.  Nom.  sg.  taxmaspada.  taxma,  brave , Av. 
taxma  (New  Pei'S,  tahm)  + *spada,  army , GAv.  spada,  YAv.  spaSa 
(New  Pers.  sipah,  Horn,  NS,  42,  3). 


92 


AXCIEXT  PERSIAX  LEXICOX 


taxs  (Pres,  taxsa-,  Bartholomae,  Grunclr.  123),  to  be  active. 
Foy  regards  the  root  as  a kompromissbildung  between  *tas  (Skt. 
taks,  Av.  tas  in  tasan)  and  "tvaxs  (Skt.  tvaks,  Av.  #waxs). 

with  prefix  ham,  work  together , cooperate , work.  Pret.  1 

Sg.  hamataxsaiy.  3 sg.  hamataxsata.  3 pi.  hamataxsanta. 

tacara,  paiace.  Acc.  sg.  tacaram,  Dar.  Pers.  a.  New  Pers.  tazar. 
Cf.  Horn,  NS,  31,  2;  Foy,  KZ.  37,  516. 

tar,  to  cross  over.  Av.  tar,  Skt.  tr. 

O 

with  prefix  fra,  depart  from,  abandon.  The  old  reading 

of  Rawlinson  fratarta,  Bh.  3.  5,  part.  nom.  sg.  is  confirmed  by 
KT.  Foy  (KZ,  35,  13)  first  suggested  frarixta,  but  later  (KZ.  37, 
556)  returns  to  the  reading  fratarta;  cf.  Hoftinann-Kutschke,  Or. 
Litt.  Ztg.  Nov.  1905;  Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1.  21. 

with  prefix  viy,  pres,  taraya-  (Bartholomae,  Grundr.  115), 

put  across,  cross.  Pret.  1 sg.  viyatarayam  (confirmed  by  KT), 
Bh.  5.  1.  1 pi.  viyatarayama  (confirmed  by  KT's  cuneiform 

text;  KT's  transliteration  has  the  old  reading  viyatarayama  which 
Bartholomae,  Grundr.  109,  regarded  as  pret.  with  pres,  ending; 
cf.  Skt.  apacyamas),  Bh.  1.  18. 

taradraya,  adv.  across  the  sea.  *tara,  beyond,  YAv.  taro  (New 
Pers.  tar),  Skt.  tiras  -)-  drayah  (q.  V.). 

tarava  (Bab.  ta-ar-ma-’).  f.  name  of  a Persian  town.  Nom.  sg. 
tarava  (confirmed  by  KT);  cf.  Foy,  KZ.  37,  515. 

tarsa-,  inchoative  stem  (Ir.  trs'-a-  for  trs-sx'-a-,  Bartholomae, 
Grundr.  135),  to  fear;  with  haca  followed  by  instr.  or  abl.  Pres. 
3 sg.  tarsatiy,  Dar.  Pers.  d.  2.  haca  aniyana  naiy  tarsatiy,  it  fears  no 
enemy.  Pret.  1 sg.  (Injunctive)  tarsam,  Dar.  Pers.  e.  3.  haca 
aniyana  ma  [tajrsam,  no  foe  will  I fear,  3 Sg.  atarsa,  Bh.  1.  13. 
karasim  haca  darsma11  (Bartholomae)  atarsa  karam  vasiy  avajaniya  hya 
paranam  bardiyam  adana,  the  people  feared  his  tyranny .*  {they  feared) 
he  would  slay  in  great  numbers  the  people  who  had  formerly 
known  Smerdis.  Bartholomae  is  doubtless  right  in  regarding 
the  opt.  clause  as  the  object  of  atarsa;  cf.  Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1, 


AXCIEXT  PE  RSI  AX  LEXICOX 


93 


11.  Otherwise  Foy,  KZ,  37,  518.  Gray,  AJP,  21,  15,  renders, 
the  people  were  mightily  afraid  of  him.  '"lie  woxdd  he  killing 
at  will  the  people.""  KT  entirely  miss  the  force  of  the  opt.  in 
their  translation,  the  people  feared  him  exceedingly , (for)  he  slew 
many.  3 pi.  atarsa".  YAv.  tarasaiti  (Turfan  MSS.  tersad,  Oss. 
t'arsun,  Kurd,  tirsin,  New  Pei'S,  tarsldan),  Skt.  trasati,  Gl'.  rpieiv  (for 
Tpta--f.iv;  cf.  L.  Meyer,  Gr.  Etyrn.  809). 

tigra  (Elam,  tikra),  m.  name  of  a fortress  in  Armenia.  Nom. 

Sg.  tigra. 

[tigra,  a supplement  of  Foy  in  Bh.  5.  1.  22,  [xaudajm  tigram  bara11- 
taya,  (gegen  die  Saken  welche)  den  Ilelmspitz  tragen  (cf . tigraxauda) 
in  place  of  + + tigram  baratya  of  ed.  and  KT.  Hoffmann-Ivutschke 
writes  me:  “Es  wohnen  doch  keine  Saken  am  Tigris.”  KT’s  cu- 
neiform text  records  tigram;  their  transliteration,  tigram.  AVhich 
is  the  reading  on  the  stone?  Foy’s  emendation  is  impossible 
since  KT  attest  the  certainty  of  the  preceding  sakam.] 

tigra  (Elam,  tikra;  Bab.  di-ig-lat),  f.  Tigris.  Acc.  sg.  tigram. 
Kossowicz’s  quotation  from  Eust.  ad  Dionys.  perieg.  5,  981, 
Ti’ypis  ra^us  ok  /SeAos.  M 77801  yap  Tiypiv  Kakovai  to  TO$fvp.a , shows  Only 
a popular  association  of  the  word  with  YAv.  tiyri,  arrow  (New 
Pers.  tir),  but  it  is  of  no  etymological  value.  Cf.  Hiibschmann, 
IF,  16,  121.  Note  Or/p  -n-oTapos  in  Theophanes,  52,  23  (cf.  New 
Pers.  tir)  “mit  volksetymologischer  Umanderung,”  Horn,  NS, 
19,  6. 

tigraxauda,  adj.  with  pointed  cap.  epithet  of  Scythians.  Nom. 
pi.  tigraxauda.  Cf.  Hdt.  7.  61,  2a*ai  Se  ol  ’SkvOol  Trfpl  piv  Trjai  Ktcfia- 
krjaL  Kvp[3aaia<;  es  btii  aTTr/yp-tvas  opdas  et^ov  7re7r^yutas.  So  the  ninth 
standing  figure  opposite  Darius  on  the  Behistan  rock  (over  which 
is  written  iyam  skunxa  hya  saka,  this  is  Skunkha  the  Scythian)  is 
represented  wearing  this  national  head-dress.  *tigra,  pointed , 
YAv.  tiyra  (New  Pers.  tez)  T"  xauda-,  hat , YAv.  xaoSa-  (Oss.  xoda). 

+ + + tunuuvatama,  the  reading  of  IvT  in  Bh.  1.  1.  65  who  re- 
mark; “ Space  for  division  sign  and  two  characters.  It  is  pos- 
sible that  the  break  may  be  restored  mam  stunuvatam,  those  that 
praise  mef  Jackson  recorded  manuuvatama  (q.  v.).  AVeissbach 
(ZDMG,  61,  729)  suggests  a derivation  from  tanu,  weak,  and 


94 


AXCIEXT  PE  RSI  AX  LEXICOX 


translates,  dem  Armen.  The  Bab.  apparently  renders  the  word 
by  mus-ki-nu.  See  s.  V.  sakaurim  and  man11uvatama. 

tuvam  (I.  E.  tu,  tu;  cf.  Waekernagel,  Das  Dehnungsg.  5),  pron. 
2 pers.  thou.  Norn.  Sg.  tuvam.  Acc.  Sg.  0uvam.  Gen.  Sg.  taiy 
(encl.,  written  tay  in  Bh.  4.  11).  Skt.  tvam,  GAv.  tvim,  YAv. 
tum  (New  Pers.  tu). 

tya  (I.  E.  tio,  tia.  Ir.  tia  which  should  become  according  to 
phonetic  laws  *#ia,  Pers.  *siya,  is  probably  due  to  the  analogy  of 
the  demon,  ta;  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  416,  n.),  originally  a 
demon,  pron.,  but  generally  used  as  a relative.  Cf.  hya.  l)The 
demon,  meaning  is  seen  in  the  following:  a)hada  kara  nipadi[y] 
t[ya]iy  asiyava,  he  went  in  pursuit  of  them  with  his  army , Bh.  3. 
12.  This  reading  is  confirmed  by  KT,  thus  making  impossible 
Bartholomae’s  conjecture  avaiy  (Stud.  2.  68);  cf.  Tolman,  Vdt. 
Stud.  1.  26.  b)introducing  a phrase  characterizing  the  preceding 
noun  like  the  Gr.  article  (Tolman,  OP.  Inscr.  42):  pa#im  tyam 
rastam  ma  avarada,  depart  not  from  the  true  way , Dar.  NRa.  6; 
xsa^'am  tya  babirauv,  the  royal  power  at  Babylon , Bh.  1.  16;  karam 
tyam  madam,  that  Median  army , Bh.  2.  6.  etc.  Cf.  Delbruck,  Ygl. 
Syntax,  3,  313.  2)Rel.  pron.  who.  which.  Acc.  sg.  m.  tyam. 
Acc.  sg.  f.  tyam.  Acc.  sg.  n.  tya.  Nom.  acc.  pi.  m.  tyaiy  (Bar- 
tholomae, Grundr.  240).  Nom.  acc.  pi.  f.  tya.  Nom.  acc.  pi.  n. 
tya  (written  on  rock  tyana),  Bh.  1.  8.  ima  dahyava  tya  mana  data 
apariyaya",  these  lands  respected  my  laws;  cf.  Bartholomae,  Alti- 
ran.  Wb.  659;  Foy,  KZ,  37,  501.  The  reading  of  the  stone 
tyana  (confirmed  by  KT)  was  regarded  as  dittography  by  Benfey 
(Pers.  Iveilinschr.  9)  as  early  as  the  year  1847,  who  remarked: 
“Es  ist  aber  wohl  Fekler  des  Steinmetz,  welcher  zuerst  auf  das 
gleich  folgende  mana  abirrte.”  Gen.  pi.  m.  tyaisam.  For.  gen. 
pi.  f.  tyaisam,  Dar.  Pers.  e.  dahyunam  tyaisam  parunam.  Skt.  tya, 
Turfan  MSS.  A Note  article  on  Persian  relative  in  Delbruck, 
Vgl.  Syntax,  3,  311. 

tya  (acc.  sg.  n.  to  tya),  conj.  1 )that.  Bh.  1.  10.  azda  abava  tya 
bardiya  avajata  (sic),  it  VMS  {not)  known  that  Smerdis  teas  murdered. 
2)because.  Bh.  4.  4.  drauga  di[s  hami$riy]a  akunaus  tya  imaiy  karam 
adurujiyasa",  Deceit  made  them  rebellious , because  those  deceived 
the  people.  Cf.  Delbriick,  Vgl.  Syntax,  3,  327. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


95 


© 

0aigarci  (Elam,  saikurrizis;  Bab.  simanu),  m.  name  of  a Persian 
month.  The  Bab.  indicates  agreement  with  Sivan  (third  month) 
i.  e.  May-June;  April-May  (Justi);  May-June  (Oppert).  See 
S.  V.  mah.  Gen.  Sg.  0aigarcais. 

0akataa,  written  0akatama  in  Bh.  3.  1.  The  generally  accepted 
opinion,  until  the  reading  0!,katama  was  attested,  regarded  0akata 
as  loc.  sg.  in  completed  course.  In  Ydt.  Stud.  1.  23,  I shared 
the  view  of  KT  that  0nkatama  was  simply  a stone-cutter’s  blunder. 
Bartholomae  writes  me  concerning  this:  “Das  0akatam  ‘a  blun- 
der’ sei  fur  ’ta  glaube  ich  nicht.  Bh.  3.  1,  ist  die  einzige  Stelle 
da  es  sich  um  nur  einen  Tag  des  Monats  handelt.”  The  same 
scholar  (WZKM,  22,  90)  now  takes  Sakata  (nom.  pi.)  and  tfakatam 
(n.  sg.)  as  adjectival  predicates  either  of  a part.  fut.  pass,  or 
part.  pres.  act.  0aka”ta,  0aka"tam.  In  every  passage  save  Bh.  3.  1, 
the  instr.  pi.  is  used  as  subject  of  the  following  aha11,  a use  of 
the  case  occasional  in  YAv.  (Schmidt,  Pluralbld.  98;  Jackson, 
Av.  Gr.  229;  Bartholomae,  AF,  2,  104;  Caland,  GGA,  401  for 
year  1893;  Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1.  10).  Bh.  1.  13.  bagayadais 
mahya  10  raucabis  Sakata  ahan,  in  the  month  of  Bagayddi  ten  days 
were  coming  to  the  end;  et  passim.  In  Bh.  3.  1,  we  appear  to 
have  a nom.  sg.  as  subject  of  aha  (cf.  Gray,  AJP,  21,  10);  garma- 
padahya  mahya  1 rauca  0akatam  aha,  in  the  month  of  Garmapada  one 
day  was  completing  its  course.  *0ak,  YAv.  sak,  (of  time)  to  pass 
(to  completion). 

0atagu  (Elam,  sattakus;  Bab.  sa-at-ta-gu-u),  Sattagydia.  Nom. 
sg.  tfatagus.  *0ata,  hundred , YAv.  sata  (New  Pers.,  Kurd,  sad,  Oss. 
sada),  Skt.  cata  -f-  *gau,  cattle , Av.  gau  (New  Pers.  gav,  Kas.  go, 
Kurd,  ga),  Skt.  gau.  Cf.  Fick,  BB,  41,  343. 

0a"d  (Pres.  0adaya,  a for  I.  E.  n;  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  145),  to 
seem.  Pres.  subj.  3 sg.  <9adaya?  (Bartholomae,  ZDMG,  46,  295), 
Bh.  4.  8.  avahya  parav  0a [day a],  should  seem  to  him  much.  KT 
read  0a[dutiy]  remarking  that  the  restoration  is  not  certain. 
0ada  + +,  however,  seems  certain  in  Jackson’s  examination.  Pret. 
3 Sg.  (Injunctive)  0adaya,  Dar.  NRa.  6.  hauvtaiy  gasta  ma  0adaya, 
may  it  not  seem  repugnant  to  thee.  0adayamiy  is  read  in  Dar.  Sus. 
a.  by  WB,  where  I have  suggested  y(?)adayamaiy.  YAv.  sand 
(Middle  Pers.  sahet,  Turfan  MSS.  hunisandeft),  Skt.  chand. 


96 


AX  C IE  XT  PERSIAX  LEXICOX 


6a.da.6a.,  uncertain  word  in  Seal  Inscr.  b.  hadaxaya  + + + + 63.As.6a.. 

6axd,  f.  year.  Gen.  sg.  #arda;  hamahyaya  0arda,  In  the  same  year , 
(connecting  #ard  with  YAv.  sarad,  Turfan  MSS.  sar).  The  mean- 
ing in  the  same  icay  (YAv.  sarada)  was  favored  by  the  Elam, 
pelki-ma  without  the  determinative  (an).  The  interpretation  seems 
now  certain  through  Bab.  ideogram  MU-AN-NA,  year  (which 
KT,  however,  render  adverbially,  always/  cf.  sattisam,  yearly,  al- 
ways): cf.  Weissbach,  ZDMG,  61,  724.  In  a personal  letter 
Weissbach  several  months  later  writes  me  concerning  his  inter- 
pretation as  follows:  ‘“Meine  Deutung  hamahyaya  0arda,  in  einem 
vnd  demselben  Jahre  halte  ich  fur  absolut  sicher.  So  sagt  Da- 
rius. Eine  andere  Frage  ist  nun  aber,  ob  seine  Angabe  ganz 
wortlich  zu  verstehen  sei  und  diese  Frage  muss  ich  verneinen. 
Offenbar  liegt  die  Sache  so,  dass  die  Emporungen  alle  in  einem 
und  demselben  Jahre  ausgebrochen  sind;  aber  zu  ihrer  Bewalti- 
gung  hat  er  einer  etwas  langeren  Zeit  bedurft.  Die  Chronologie 
der  Bisutun-Insclirift  bietet  nocht  jetzt  gewisse  Schwierigkeiten; 
aber  uber  einige  Grimdwahrheiten  kann  man  schon  jetzt  nicht 
mehr  im  Zweifel  sein.  Gaumata  erhob  sich  am  11.  Viyakhna 
= 14.  Addaru  des  7.  Jahres  des  Kambyses,  also  am  10.  Marz  522 
v.  Chr.  Er  ergriff  die  Iierrschaft  am  9.  Garmapada.  Fur  mich 
kann  dieser  Monat  nur  dem  Nisannu  gleichgesetzt.  9.  Garma- 
pada also  = 3.  April  522  v.  Chr.  Am  10.  Bagayadis  fiel  Gau- 
mata und  Darius  wurde  Konig.  Nun  solt  Gaumata  7 Monate 
regiert  haben.  also  ist  der  Bagayadis  entweder  der  VII  Monat 
oder  der  VIII  Monat,  je  nachdem  man  entweder  von  Gaumatas 
Erhebung  oder  von  seiner  Ergreifung  der  Iierrschaft  ausrechnen 
will.  Tertium  non  dafur.  Folglich  ist  Darius — mit  einer  Feh- 
lergrenze  von  1 Tag — entweder  am  28.  Sept,  oder  am  27.  Oct. 
522  Konig  geworden.  Die  Rebellionen  sind  demnach  alle  in 
dem  Jahr  522/ ausgebrochen  und  zum  grossen  Teil  auch  noch 
in  diesem  Jahr  niedergeschlagt  worden.”  Acc.  sg.  tfardam,  Bh. 
5.  1;  cf.  Weissbach,  ZDMG,  61,  731. 

6ah  (Pres.  0aha->  6a-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  123;  270,  c,  6), 
to  declare , speak , say.  Act.  ind.  pres.  3 sg.  0atiy.  Pret.  1 sg. 
a0aham.  3 Sg.  a#aha.  Subj.  pres.  2 sg.  0ahy  (<.  #ahahy).  Pass, 
pres.  1 pi.  (with  act.  ending.  Bartholomae.  Grundr.  325)  #ahya- 
mahy.  atf-’hy  (read  aftihya,  pass.  pret.  3 sg.  with  act.  ending, 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


97 


Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  1579  or  a0ahy,  pass.  aor.  3 sg. ; cf. 
Skt.  cansi,  Tolman,  OP.  Inscr.  50;  Bartholomae,  Grandr.  151). 
Inf.  0astanaiy.  Av.  sah,  Skt.  cans.  Cf.  Fick,  BB,  41,  343. 

0uxra  (Elam,  tukkurra;  Bab.  su-uh-ra-’),  m.  name  of  the  father  of 
Otanes.  Gen.  sg.  0uxrahya.  Probably  connected  with  *0uxra, 
bright,  Av.  suxra  (New  Pers. , Oss.  surx,  Afy.  sur,  Kurd,  sor,  Socin, 
3K,  31),  Skt.  cukra;  cf.  Foy,  KZ,  35,  20. 

0uravahara  (Elam,  turmar;  Bab.  airu),  n.  name  of  a Persian 
month.  The  Bab.  indicates  agreement  with  Iyyar  (third  month) 
i.  e.  April-May.  March-April  (Justi);  April-May  (Oppert). 
Gen.  sg.  tfuravaharahya  (Bartholomae,  Grundr.  412,  n).  *0ura,  vig- 
orous -(-  *vahara,  spring  time , New  Pers.  bahar;  cf.  Skt.  vasara 
(Hillebrandt,  Yed.  Myth.  1,  26). 

0uvam  (I.  E.  tue-,  Av.  0wam,  Skt.  tvam).  See  tuvam. 


©r 

0Ti,  to  lean.  YAv.  sri,  Skt.  cri. 

with  prefix  niy  (Pres.  0raray-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  128), 

to  restore.  Pl'et.  1 Sg.  niya0:arayam,  Bh.  1.  14.  ayadana adam 

niya(9rarayam,  I restored  the  places  of  worship,  ayadana  is  better 
taken  thus  than  with  the  preceding  akunavam  (WB,  15;  Barthol- 
omae, Altiran.  Wb.,  1638;  KT,  13;  Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud.  1,  13). 
Otherwise  AJP,  21,  16;  ZDMG,  54,  373.  KT  ignore  ava$a  adan  . 
akunavam  altogether  in  their  translation. 

0ritiya,  num.  ordinal,  third.  Acc.  sg.  f.  0r[itiyam]  (Weissbach, 
0ritiyam),  Bh.  5.  1.  Acc.  sg.  n.  (as  adv.)  0ritlyam,  for  the  third 
time , Bh.  2.  9.  Skt.  trtiya  (Whitney,  Skt.  Gr.  243),  YAv.  0ritya 
(Middle  Pers.  sitikar). 


D 

l)da  (I.  E.  pres.  *di-dd-mi,  *di-d-mes;  Persian  pres.  sg.  dada-,  Bar- 
tholomae, Grundr.  126),  to  give.  Impv.  3 sg.  dadatuv,  Dar. 
7 


/ 


1)8 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


Pers.  d.  3.  ai[tamai]y  [au]ramazda  dadatufv],  this  let  AJiura  2fazda 
grant  me.  Av.  da  (Turfan  MSS.  diyad,  New  Pers.  dihaS,  Oss. 
dadt'un,  Hubschmann,  Oss.  Sprache,  96),  Skt.  da. 

2)da  (I.  E.  pres.  *dhi-dlie-mi,  *dhi-dh-mes;  Skt.  pres,  da-dba-mi,  da- 
dh-mas),  to  put , make , create.  Pret.  3 Sg.  adada  (Skt.  adadhat), 
Dar.  Pers.  d.  1.  hauv  darayavaum  xsayaftyam  adada,  he  made  Darius 
king.  Aor.  3 sg.  ada  (Skt.  adhat),  Dar.  Elvend,  1.  hya  imam 
bumim  ada,  who  created  this  earth.  Av.  da,  Skt.  dha. 

daiy,  reading  of  KT  in  Bh.  5.  1.  11.  See  marda. 

[daus,  dus?,  to  take  pleasure  in , esteem.  The  form  on  which 
Bartholomae,  AF,  2,  30,  based  the  occurrence  of  this  verb  is 
dausta  (Bh.  1.  11)  which  he  regarded  as  an  s-  aor.  mid.  2 sg. 
KT  record  avaiy  ma  dausta  + + + a.  In  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  33  I supplied 
[bly]a  (opt.  2 Sg),  cf.  0uvam  dausta  blya  (Bh.  4.  1.  55).  Weissbach 
makes  same  supplement  (ZDMG,  61,  729)  and  Bartholomae 
(IVZKM,  22,  88)  is  now  inclined  to  abandon  his  former  view. 
The  Elam,  word  corresponding  here  to  the  Persian  is  kannenti, 
fut.  2 sg,  while  the  same  verb  (kanesne,  prec.  3 sg.)  renders  the 
Persian  dausta  blya  in  Bh.  3.  11.  55,  75,  86;  cf.  Tolman,  op.  cit.  33]. 

daustar,  m.  priend.  Nom.  sg.  dausta.  A ith  acc.  #uvam  dausta 
biya,  may  he  he  a friend  to  thee , Bh.  1.  10,  et  passim.  New  Pers. 
dost;  fr.  *dus,  to  esteem , take  delight  in , YAv.  zus,  Skt.  jus. 

data,  n.  law.  Nom.  sg.  datam.  Acc.  pi.  data,  Bh.  1.  8.  tya 
mana  data  apariyaya11,  they  respected  my  laics  (written  on  the  stone 
tyana  mana  data.  See  tya).  Av.  data;  fr.  2)da  (q.  V.).  Cf.  Turfan 
MSS.  dadist. 

da?  tasa?,  a doubtful  reading  of  KT  in  Bh.  1.  1.  72.  Hoffmann- 
Kutschke  suggests  the  emendation  yava  tava  ahy,  so  lange  da 
mdchtig  hist  (Phil.  Nov.  3,  105). 

datuhya  (Elam.  tattu[hi]ya;  Bab.  za-’-tu-’-a),  m.  name  of  the  father 
of  Megabyzus.  Gen.  sg.  [datujhyahya.  Cf.  KZ,  39,  153. 

dadarsi  (Elam,  tatarsis;  Bab.  da-da-ar-su),  m.  name  of  l)a  Persian 
satrap  Gsa0rapavan) ; 2)an  Armenian  subject.  Nom.  sg.  dadarsis. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


99 

The  word  is  clearly  written  in  Bh.  2.  1.  29  and  should  be  removed 
from  brackets  in  ed. ; cf.  KT,  27.  Acc.  sg.  dadarsim.  Redup. 
theme  (intens.)  of  dars  (q.  v.). 

dan  (Pres,  dana-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  132),  to  know.  Pret. 
3 sg.  adana.  Av.  zan  (Turfan  MSS.  danem,  New  Pers.  danaS), 
Skt.  janati.  Cf.  KZ,  39,  157;  Waekernagel,  Ai.  Gram.  76. 

dan  (Pres,  danu-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  131),  to  flow.  Pres.  3 
sg.  dannu  + + + + (Dar.  Sz.  c.  3)  which  may  be  read  danuftaiy],  cf. 
Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  683;  Keller,  KZ,  39,  175,  or  danu- 
[vatiy],  cf.  Skt.  dhanvati,  Whitney,  Skt.  Gr.  716.  New  Pers.  dan- 
ldan,  Skt.  dhan. 

dar  (Caus.  pres,  daraya-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  151),  1 )to  hold , 
2 )hold  a position , halt.  Pres.  1 Sg.  darayamiy.  Pret.  3 Sg.  adar- 
aya.  In  Dar.  NRa.  3,  Foy  (KZ,  37,  560)  would  restore  the  form 
adaraya  in  place  of  adariy.  s-  aor.  1 sg.  adarsiy  (Bartholomae, 
Grundr.  156)  or  adarsaiy  (with  thematic  vowel),  Dar.  Pers.  e.  2. 
Aor.  (pass.)  3 sg.  adariy,  Bh.  2.  13,  15.  Av.  dar  (Turfan  MSS. 
dared,  New  Pers.  daraS),  Skt.  dhr. 

with  prefix  ham,  obtain.  Mid.  pret.  1 sg.  hamadarayaiy, 

Bh.  1.  9.  yata  ima  xsa0ram  ha[ma]darayai[y],  until  I obtained  this 
kingdom.  This  reading  is  attested  by  KT,  and  supersedes  [ad]ary 
of  ed.  and  the  various  attempts  at  emendation;  cf.  Tolman,  Vdt. 
Stud.  1,  9. 

daraya"ta,  reading  of  WB  in  Dar.  NRd.,  Pfeilbewahrer  (isunam; 
isuvam,  Bartholomae).  Cf.  ZDMG,  50,  663;  AJP,  21,  2;  Foy, 
ZDMG,  55,  509;  Hoffmann-Kutsehke,  Or.  Litt.  Ztg.  Sept. 
1906  (denanam  darayanta);  Justi,  dasyama  (dasya  -f*  man). 

darayavau  (Elam,  tariyamaus;  Bal).  da-ri-ia-mus;  Gr.  Aapclos  for 
*Aap«cuos,  cf.  Keiper,  Sem.  Phil.,  Erlangen,  1,  253;  Aesch.  Pers. 
Nape  Lav,  662),  m.  1 ) Darius  I.  Nom.  Sg.  darayavaus.  Acc.  Sg. 
darayavaum.  Gen.  Sg.  darayavahaus  (daraya vausahya  in  Art.  Sus.  a). 
For  gen.  sg.  darayavaus  (Art.  Pers.  a,  b,  2).  2 )Darius  II.  Gen. 

Sg.  darayavausahya  (Art.  Sus.  a,  1;  in  Art.  Hamadan,  daraya va(u)sa- 
hya,  Tolman,  PAPA,  36,  32).  For  gen.  sg.  darayavaus  (Art.  Sus. 
b;  Art.  Pers.  a,  b,  2).  Darius  I,  after  the  death  of  Cambyses, 


100 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


ascends  the  throne  by  virtue  of  his  kinship  to  the  royal  race 
(see  s.  v.  cai§apai).  Political  tradition  has  colored  the  popular 
version  of  Hdt.  Ill,  85-7  (cf.  Scholl,  Die  Anfiinge  einer  politis- 
chen  Litteratur  bei  den  Griechen)  respecting  the  counsel  of  the 
allies  and  the  stratagem  of  Darius’  groom.  Cf . Duncker,  Gesch. 
d.  Altert.  45,  388;  Marquart,  Philol.  Suppl.  6,  588;  Winckler, 
Untersuchuugen  z.  altorient.  Gesch.,  126;  Noldeke,  Aufsatze 
z.  pers.  Gesch.,  15;  Tolman  and  Stevenson,  Hdt.  and  Empires 
of  East,  86.  daraya-,  pres.  part,  to  dar,  -f-  *vahu,  Skt.  vasu,  good, 
as.  n.  sg.  wealth. 

dargam,  adj.  long.  . GAv.  daraga,  YAv.  daraya  (Oss.  dary,  Bal. 
drag,  Afy.  larya,  Geiger,  SA,  2). 

dars  (Pres,  darsnu-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  131),  to  dare.  Pret. 
3 S2f.  adarsnaus.  Skt.  dhrs. 

° o' 

darsam,  adv.  mightily , much;  cf.  dars. 

darsman,  n.  boldness,  tyranny , despotism.  Abl.  sg.  (with  haca) 
darsma11,  Bartholomae’s  conjecture  for  darsam  of  ed.  in  Bh.  1.  13, 
karasim  haca  darsma11  atarsa,  the  people  feared  his  tyranny;  cf.  Tol- 
man, Vdt.  Stud.  1,  11.  dars  (q.  v.). 

dasta,  m.  hand.  Loc.  sg.  (with  postpos.  a)  dastaya.  Av.  zasta 
(Yew  Pers.  dast),  Skt.  hasta. 

dahyu.,  f . province,  district,  land.  Nom.  sg.  dahyaus.  Acc.  sg. 
dahyaum  (DAHyum  in  Art.  Pers.  a,  b,  4).  Loc.  sg.  (with  postpos. 
a)  dahyauva.  Yoin.  pi.  dahyava.  Gen.  pi.  dahyunam.  Loc.  pi.  (with 
postpos.  a)  dahyusuva.  Av.  dahyu  (^Middle  Pers.  deh,  New  Pers.  dih, 
town,  Horn,  NS,  42,  1),  Skt.  dasyu,  used  as  the  title  of  the 
demons. 

di,  demon,  pron.  (most  often  end.),  it,  them.  Acc.  sg.  f.  dim, 
Dar.  NRa.  4.  pasavadim  (i.  e.  imam  bumim)  mana  frabara,  he  gave  it  to 
me.  Acc.  pi.  m.  dis,  Bh.  4.  4.  imaiy  karam  adurujiyasa11  pasava  di[s 
auramazjda  mana  dastaya  akunaus,  these  deceived  the  people;  after- 
wards Ahura  Mazda  put  them  (i.  e.  the  people;  cf.  Elam,  ver- 
sion) into  my  hand.  Acc.  pi.  f.  dis  (Bh.  4.  1.  34),  m.  (Bh.  4.  16, 
17).  YAv.  di. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


101 


dl  (Pres,  did!-,  Bartkolomae,  Grundr.  126),  to  see.  Impv.  2 sg. 
didiy  (baplograpky  for  dldldiy;  cf.  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  b., 
725),  Dar.  NRa.  4.  Av.  dx  (Turfan  MSS.  did.  New  Pers.  didan), 
Skt.  dhi. 

di  (Pres,  dina-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  132),  to  injure , deprive 
one  (acc.)  of  something  (acc.),  take  (acc .)  from  one  (acc.).  Pret. 
1 sg.  adlnam,  Bh.  1.  13.  xsa$'amsim  adam  adlnam,  I took  the  king- 
dom from  him.  3 sg.  adina.  Part.  acc.  sg.  m.  ditam,  Bh.  1.  13. 
avam  gaumatam  tyam  magum  xsa^’am  ditam  caxriya,  could  make  (7au - 
mata  the  Magian  deprived  of  the  kingdom.  YAv.  zi  (Middle 
Pers.  zinltan),  Skt.  ji. 

dida,  f.  stronghold . Nom.  sg.  dida.  Acc.  sg.  didam.  New 
Pers.  diz;  cf.  YAv.  diz,  heap  up. 

dipi,  f.  inscription.  Acc.  sg.  dipim.  Loc.  sg.  d[i]p[iy]a,  Bh.  4. 
8.  New  Pers.  dibir.  Cf.  Assyr.  duppu,  Elam,  tuppi;  Jensen,  ZA, 
6, 172;  Foy,  ZDMG,  50,  128;  Pedersen,  KZ,  40, 190.  According 
to  Husing’s  interpretation  of  the  Elam.  (Bh.  L.)  Darius  declares 
that  he  made  inscriptions  on  bricks,  halat,  and  leather,  SU. 

dubala,  m.  name  of  a district  in  Babylonia,  Nom.  sg.  dubala. 

duraiy,  adv.  far.  In  Dar.  NRa.  1.  44,  duraiy  for  du[ra]y  is  clearly 
to  be  read.  With  apiy  written  duraiy  apiy,  Xerx.  Pers.  a.  2;  durai- 
apiy,  Dar.  NRa.  2 (so  Stolze’s  photograph,  Pers.  II,  109);  duray- 
apiy,  ibid,  (so  Stolze’s  photograph).  Loc.  sg.  of  *dura,  /hr,  Av. 
*dura  (New  Pers.,  Kurd,  dur,  Gab.  dur),  Skt.  dura. 

duruj  (Pres,  durujiya-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  148),  to  lie , deceive. 
Pret.  3 sg.  adurujiya.  3 pi.  (with  s of  sigmatic  aor.)  adurujiyasa11, 
Schmidt,  KZ,  27,  326;  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  309,  II:  as  an  s- 
aor,  Fr.  Muller,  WZKM,  7,  253;  Foy  (KZ,  35,  30)  regarded  the 
-sa  as  end.  (cf.  Lat.  se-)  “weg,”  translating  sie  logen  meg;  cf. 
ZDMG,  52,  597.  Part.  acc.  n.  Sg.  duruxtam,  Bh.  4.  7.  ima  hasiyam 
naiy  duruxtam  adam  akuna[vam],  1 dod  this  as  something  true  not  pre- 
tended. For  Oppert’s  duruxtam  in  Bh.  4.  1.  43,  [draujjlyahy  (see 
draujlya)  is  better  to  be  supplied,  adurujiya,  occurring  in  Bh.  Inscr. 
over  twenty  times,  clearly  represents  each  rebel  as  a follower  of 
the  Druj,  the  Lie,  the  personification  of  Evil  (cf.  Tolman,  PAPA, 


102 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


33,  69),  for  it  is  the  Druj  -which  is  the  source  of  rehellion;  drau- 
ga  di[s  hami0riy]a  akunaus,  the  It e made  them  rebellious , Bh.  -1.  4. 
\ Av.  druj  (Middle  Pel's,  druzltan),  Skt.  druh. 

duruva,  adj.  sound,  secure.  Xom.  s g.  f.  duruva,  Bh.  4.  5.  YAv. 
drva,  Skt.  dhruva. 

duvaistam,  adv.  very  long.  Dar.  Pers.  e.  3.  Acc.  sg.  n.  of 
superl.  *duvaista,  cf.  diiraiy;  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  763;  IF, 
12.  127. 

duvara  (duvar,  transf.  to  a-  deck;  cf.  Skt.  dvara,  Whitney,  Skt. 
Gr.  399),  m.  door.  Loc.  sg.  (with  postpos.  a)  duvaraya,  at  ( my ) 
door,  Bh.  2.  13,  14.  7 Av.  dvar  (New  Pers.  dar,  Oss.  dvar),  Skt. 

dvar. 

duvar  <9i,  m.  portico,  colonnade.  Acc.  sg.  duvar&m,  Xerx.  Pers. 
a.  3.  Bartholomae  suggests  haplography  for  duvar-var0i. 

duvitaparanam  (Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud.  1,  8.  *duvita,  long,  GAv. 
daibita,  Skt.  dvita,  against  Geldner,  Ycd.  Stud.  3.  1;  cf.  Gray, 
JAOS,  23,  63,  + paranam,  before,  antehac , q.  v.),  adv.  long  afore- 
time. Bartholomae  writes  me  under  date  of  May  13, 1908,  that 
he  takes  paranam  as  I have  suggested  above,  but  concerning  the 
first  member  of  the  compound  he  adds:  “duvita  ist  das  mpp.  dit, 
alter.  Das  Ganze  scheint  mir  danach  zu  bedeuten,  cum  altero 
prior , alter  cum  altero , ptost  altcrum.  Das  elamische  samak-mar 
bedeutet  ex  (=  mar)  ordine,  franz.  de  suite.”  KT  read  duvitapar- 
nam,  in  two  lines,  which  is  supported  by  Weissbach  (ZDMG,  61, 
725)  who  connects  pamam  with  Skt.  parna,  wing.  Hofiinann- 
Ivutschke  (Phil.  Nov.  3,  103),  whose  treatment  of  the  compound 
defies  philological  laws,  remarks:  “pamam  jedoch  entspricht  lat. 
plenus,  germ,  fulna  (sic),  voll,  und  steht  fur  palna.”  These  views,  of 
course,  are  in  accord  with  Oppert's  early  interpretation,  en  deux 
bramches,  which  seems  not  only  at  variance  with  the  Elam,  samak- 
mar,  but  to  lack  historical  support;  cf.  Tolman  and  Stevenson, 
Hdt.  and  Empires  of  East,  74.  The  old  reading  duvitataranam 
with  which  critics  have  operated  is  superseded.  KT  record: 
‘'The  reading  p in  place  of  t is  certain.” 

duvitiya,  adj.  second.  Nom.  sg.  duvitiya  (cf.  Bartholomae,  Alt- 
iran. Wb.,  duvitlya-ma  for  duvitiyam  of  ed.  and  KT),  Bh.  3.  5. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


103 


hauv  duvitlyama  udapatata  parsaiy,  he  was  the  second  to  rise  against 
me  in  Persia.  Acc.  sg.  n.  (as  adv.)  duvitlyam,  /br  a second  time , 
Bh.  3.  13,  et  passim.  GAv.  daibitya,  YAv.  bitya  (New  Pei’S,  dlgar), 
Slit,  dvitlya. 

dusiyara  (dusiyar,  transf.  to  a-  decl.),  n.  had  harvest , scarcity , 
famine.  Nom.  sg.  dusiyaram,  Dar.  Pers.  d.  3.  “There  is  some 
space  between  the  i and  the  y,  due  apparently  to  an  original  de- 
fect in  the  stone  before  it  was  lettered.”  Jackson,  JAOS,  27,  191. 
Abl.  sg.  dusiyara,  Dar.  Pers.  d.  3.  “The  u is  not  clear  but  can 
be  made  out.”  Jackson,  JAOS,  27,  191.  dus,  ill , Av.  dus  (New 
Pers.  dus),  Skt.  dus  + *yar,  year , YAv.  yar.  Note  Turfan  MSS. 
dusvariy. 

drauga,  m.  the  Lie.  Nom.  sg.  drauga.  Abl.  sg.  (with  haca) 
drauga,  Bh.  1.  5;  Dar.  Pers.  d.  3.  Ahura  Mazda,  as  guardian  of 
Truth  and  Avenger  of  Deceit,  is  opposed  to  that  force  embodied 
in  the  Lie.  Hdt.  testifies  to  the  Persian  veneration  of  truth 
and  abomination  of  deceit;  al<j)(iOTOv  8e  avrolcri  to  i/'euSecr&u  vevofucr- 
Tcu,  I.  138;  naiSevova'i  Se  tovs  7T(uSas — Tpla  fxovva  'nrireveiv  sal  ro^eveiv  Kal 
a\r]6l£ea0au,  I.  136.  The  Druj  (drauga)  is  certainly  a personification 
of  Evil  (cf.  Jackson,  Grundr.  d.  iran.  Philol.  II,  630).  It  is  the 
Druj  which  is  the  source  of  rebellion,  Bh.  4.  4.  The  prayer  of 
Darius  is  that  his  country  may  be  saved  from  the  Druj,  Pers.  d. 
3.  He  warns  his  successor  to  guard  against  the  Druj  and  to 
punish  the  liar,  Bh.  4.  5.  It  was  because  Darius  was  not  under 
the  influence  of  the  Druj  that  he  became  the  favorite  of  Ahura 
Mazda,  Bh.  4.  13.  Morality  is  to  walk  in  the  path  of  Truth, 
NRa.  6.  This  personification  of  the  Avestan  Druj  in  the  Per- 
sian drauga,  found,  as  we  should  expect,  no  correspondence  in  the 
Babylonian  thought  (cf.  Gray,  JAOS,  21,  181).  How  strikingly 
is  this  seen  in  the  contrast  between  drauga  dahyauva  vasiy  abava,  the 
Druj  {Lie)  dominated  the  'province  and  the  lame  Babylonian 
version  par-sa-a-tu  ina  matati  lu  ma-du  i-mi-du,  in  the  lands  lies  became 
numerous , Bh.  1.  10.  Tolman  in  PAPA,  33,  69.  In  Bh.  4.  4. 
drauga  di[s  kami(9riy]a  akunaus,  KT  ignore  entirely  this  personifica- 
tion in  their  translation,  lies  made  them  revolt.  Cf.  Wilhelm, 
ZDMG,  40,  105;  Bang,  ZDMG,  43,  533;  Foy,  IvZ,  35,  69;  Horn, 
Beilage  zur  Allg.  Ztg.  1895;  Jackson-Gray,  JAOS,  21,  170. 
YAv.  draoga  (Phi.  drog,  New  Pers.  duroy),  Skt.  drogha;  fr.  duruj  (i.  e. 
druj.). 


104 


ANCIENT  PERSIAX  LEXICON 


draujana,  adj.  deceiving , false , a follower  of  the  Druj,  cf. 
drauga  and  Turfan  MSS.  drozaniy.  Nom.  sg.  draujana,  Bh.  4.  5, 
13,  14.  Jackson  and  KT  record  the  legibility  of  draujana  in  Bh. 
4.  1.  68.  YAv.  draojina-;  fr.  duruj  (i.  e.  druj). 

draujiya  (denom.  pres,  to  *d.auja,  lie;  Bartholomae,  Grundr. 
152),  to  regard  as  a lie.  Pres.  subj.  2 sg.  [draujjiyahy,  cf.  Raw- 
linson,  JRAS,  12.  This  form  (cf.  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb., 
769)  is  best  read  in  Bh.  4.  6.  KT  give  [durujjiyahy,  but  the  con- 
text as  well  as  the  Elam,  shows  a meaning  impossible  for  this 
verb.  Cf.  Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  30. 

drayah,  n.  sea.  Acc.  sg.  draya,  Dar.  Sz.  c.  3;  thus  read  also 
in  Bh.  5.  1.  23,  abiy  draya  in  place  of  darayam  of  ed.  The  absence 
of  final  m,  as  recorded  by  KT,  gives  the  regular  form  and  super- 
sedes the  theory  that  the  word  is  here  a transfer  to  the  a-  de- 
clension; cf.  Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  36.  Loc.  sg.  (with  postpos. 
a)  drayahya.  YAv.  zrayah  (Middle  Pel’s,  zray,  New  Pers.  zirik),  Skt. 
jrayas,  an  expanse.  Cf.  Fick,  BB,  41,  343. 


N 

naiba,  adj.  beautiful , Nom.  sg.  f.  naiba,  Dar.  Pers.  d.  2.  Nom. 
sg.  n.  naibam,  Xerx.  Pers.  a.  3.  Acc.  sg.  n.  naibam,  Xerx.  Van. 
3.  Phi.  nev,  New  Pers.  nev,  brave , good. 

naiy,  adv.  not;  written  nai  with  enclitics  maiy  and  sim.  YAv. 
nae-  cf.  Delbruck,  Vgl.  Syntax,  2,  524.  Otherwise  Bartholomae, 
Altiran.  Wb.,  1073. 

nadintabaira  (Elam,  nititpel;  Bab.  ni-din-tu-(ilu)bel),  m.  JTidintu- 
Bel , name  of  a Babylonian  rebel.  Nom.  sg.  nadintabaira.  Acc. 
sg.  nadintabairam.  Gen.  sg.  nadi'Habairakya.  Cf.  Duncker,  Gesch. 
d.  Altert.  45,  472. 

napat,  m.  grandson.  Nom.  sg.  napa  (reformation  with  a;  cf. 
Bartholomae,  Grundr.  397,  n.),  Bh.  1.  1;  Bh.  a.  1.  Av.  napat 
(New  Pers.  nava),  Skt.  napat. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


105 


nabukudracara  (Elam,  napkuturruzir;  Bab.  nabu-kudurri-usur),  m. 
Nebuchadrezar , the  assumed  name  of  the  rebels  Nidintu-Bel  and 
Arkha.  Nom.  S g.  nabukudracara.  Cf.  Justi,  ZDMG,  51,  236; 
Weissbach,  Grundr.  d.  iran.  Philol.  2,  55. 

nabunaita  (Elam,  napuneta;  Bab.  nabu-na’id),  m.  JYabonidus , 
name  of  the  last  king  of  the  new  Babylonian  empire  (cf.  Nabu- 
na’id-Cyrus  Chronicles);  written  in  Hdt.  Idbynetos , cf.  Tolman 
and  Stevenson,  Hdt.  and  Empires  of  East,  81-6.  Gen.  sg. 
nabunaitahya,  Bh.  1.  16,  nabunaitahya  (Bartholomae,  Grundr.  112,  n; 
thus  to  be  read  in  Bh.  3.  11;  1.  2;  Bh.  d;  Bh.  i.  cf.  KT,  56). 

naman,  n.  name.  naama,  by  name , written  naam"a  with  fern, 
noun.  The  following  are  some  of  the  theories  respecting  this 
latter  form.  J.  Schmidt  (Pluralbld.  82)  regarded  it  as  forming 
the  second  member  of  a bahuvrihi-compound  (Whitney,  Skt. 
Gr.  1293)  with  a fern,  formation  in  *-on,  e.  g.  yutiya  nama  dahyaus, 
a region  possessing  the  name  of  Yutiya.  Thumb  (KZ,  32,  132) 
would  derive  nama  from  *nomn  comparing  ga0u<gmtu.  Foy  (KZ, 
35,  11)  at  first  suggested  a transition  to  the  fern,  of  a sandhi- 
form  *naman  < nomnn;  cf.  later  IF,  12,  172  and  note  various  the- 
ories there  cited.  Bartholomae  (Grundr.  103,  II)  proposed  a 
possible  distinction  of  case  nama  (acc.  sg.)  and  nama"  (loc.  sg.), 
but  has  later  shifted  his  position,  talcing  both  forms  as  loc.  sg. 
and  transcribing  nama11  and  nama".  Can  we  regard  naamaa  as 
scriptio  plena  influenced  by  fern.  ? Cf.  gen.  sg.  -hayaa  < Ar.  -sia, 
often  written  haya  when  immediately  preceding  the  noun  on 
which  it  depends.  Tolman  in  Vdt.  Stud.  1, 12.  Av.  naman  (New 
Pei’S,  nam,  Oss.  non,  Afy.  num,  Bal.  nam),  Skt.  naman. 

navama,  adj.  ninth.  Nom.  sg.  navama,  Bh.  1.  1;  Bh.  a.  4. 
Skt.  navama,  YAv.  nauma  (Jackson,  Av.  Gr.  61). 

naviya,  Bh.  1.  18.  The  word  is  generally  regarded  as  nom. 
f.  of  an  abstract  formation  from  nav,  ship , and  as  signifying  a 
collection  of  ships , fleet ; so  Kern  (ZDMG,  23,  237),  Muller 
(WZKM,  11,  252),  Gray  (AJP,  21,  19),  Bartholomae  (Altiran. 
Wb.,  1065).  The  old  interpretation  (bei  den  Schiffen , WB),  de- 
fended by  Foy  (ZDMG,  51,  371)  regards  the  form  as  loc.  sg.  of 
nav  with  p»stpos.  a;  so  Pedersen,  KZ,  10,  129,  on  opposite  side 
(the  enemy)  was  on  shipboard.  Skt.  nav,  ship , New  Pers.  nav. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


1.06 


nas,  see  viyana[sa]ya. 

nah,  m.  nose.  Ace.  sg.  naham,  Bh.  2.  13,  11.  YAv.  nah,  Skt. 

nas. 

niy,  verbal  prefix,  down.  e.  g.,  Xerx.  Van.  3,  nipistanaiy.  Av. 
nl  (New  Pers.  ni-),  Skt.  ni. 

iii  (Pres,  naya,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  123),  to  lead.  Act.  pret. 
3 sg.  anaya,  Bh.  2.  11.  Mid.  pret.  3 sg.  (with  passive  sense) 
anayata,  Bh.  1.  IT.  Av.  ni  (Middle  Pers.  nltan),  Skt.  nl. 

with  prefix  fra(?),  lead  forth , bring  forward.  Pret.  1 sg. 

franayam,  Bh.  1.  18.  aniyahya  asam  franayam,  for  the  rest  I brought 
forward  horses.  KT  state  that  the  reading  franayam  is  probable 
from  the  traces  on  the  rock.  Jackson  (JAOS,  21,  87)  feels  less 
certain  respecting  the  prefix.  “ I appended  a further  note  that 
the  appearance  of  the  word  suggested  rather  [up]anayam  or  [uz]a- 
nayam,  but  such  a restoration  is  quite  uncertain,  though  I tried 
my  best  to  assure  it  by  examining  the  weathered  stone  again 
and  again.” 


nij,  verbal  prefix,  away.  Bh.  2.  12,  nijayam;  see  i.  Av.  nis,  Skt. 
nis-. 

nipadiy,  adv.  in  pursuit  of,  close  after.  Read  nipadiy  for  tyai- 
patiy  of  ed.  in  Bh.  2.  1.  72  (cf.  KT,  36),  adam  karam  fraisayam  nipa- 
diy, I sent  forth  my  army  in  pursuit.  The  word  hardly  means 
on  foot  as  given  by  KT  and  ed.  Both  Elam,  and  Bab.  versions 
give  no  warrant  for  this  older  interpretation  of  the  word.  Bh. 
3.  12.  liada  kara  nipadi[y]  t[ya]iy  asiyava,  he  went  with  llis  army  close 
on  the  heels  of  these.  Cf.  Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1.  26.  Probably 
loc.  sg.  of  niy  + pad,  foot;  cf.  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  1083, 
who  happily  compares  Lesb.  Boeot.  vcb-d  (instr.  sg.  to  ti-ov's).  To 
this  might  be  added  Lat.  pedisequus , following  one’s  steps. 

niyasadayam,  see  had. 

nisaya  (Elam,  nissaya;  Bab.  ni-is-sa-a-a),  m.  name  of  a Median 
district.  Nom.  sg.  nisaya,  Bh.  1.  13.  niy  -f-  *saya;  fr.  *si,  lie , 
YAv.  si  (Middle  Pers.  nisltan),  Skt.  ci. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


107 


nuram  (Jackson  and  KT  record  the  absence  of  a lacuna  before 
the  word  in  Bh.  4.  10),  adv.  now.  A v.  nuram  (Oss.  nur,  New 
Pers.  nun). 

nyaka,  m.  grandfather , supplied  in  Art.  Sus.  a.  arta[xsa0ram 
nyakamj,  Artaxerxes  my  grandfather.  YAv.  nyaka. 


P 

pa  (Pres,  pa-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  122),  to  protect,  sustain. 
Act.  impv.  2 sg.  padiy.  3 sg.  patuv.  Part.  nom.  sg.  m.  pata.  Av. 
pa  (New  Pers.  payaS),  Skt.  pa. 

with  prefix  patiy  (Pres,  paya-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  148), 

guard  oneself  (mid.)  against  (&b\.  with  haca).  Impv.  2 sg.  patipa- 
yauva,  Bh.  4.  5. 

paisiyauvada  (pisiyauvada,  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  908. 
Bab.  pi-si-’-hu-ma-du),  f.  name  of  a district.  Acc.  Sg.  paisiyauvadam, 
Bh.  3.  7.  Abl.  Sg.  (with  haca)  paisiyauvadaya,  Bh.  1.  11.  Accord- 
ing to  Justi  (IF,  17,  Anz.  107)  Pasargada , paisiya,  fr.  pis  (q.  v.)  + 
*uvada,  Skt.  svadha,  abode ; Ort  der  Sc  hr  if  ten,  i.  e. , depository  of 
the  archives  and  sacred  books.  Cf.  Oppert,  La.  langue — des 
M6des,  110. 

pat  (Pres,  pata-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  123),  to  fly, fail.  YAv. 
pat  (New  Pers.  uftadan),  Skt.  pat. 

with  prefix  ud,  rise  up,  rebel.  Mid.  pret.  3 sg.  udapatata. 

patiy,  prep,  postpos.  l)with  acc.  during,  throughout,  at;  cf. 
Foy.  AYZIxM,  14,  291.  Bh.  2.  11.  0uravaharahya  mahya  jiyamnam 
(q.  v.)  patiy,  at  the  end  of  the  month  Thermal) ar a.  Bh.  1.  7. 
xsapava  raucapativa,  by  night  or  day.  2)with  instr.  at,  Bh.  3.  5. 
hya  v'0apatiy,  xohich  was  at  the  palace.  3) with  loc.  in,  at,  Bh.  2. 
13,  et  passim,  uzmayapatiy  akunavam,  1 crucified.  Av.  paiti  (Tur- 
fan  MSS.  pad,  New  Pers.  paS-). 

patiy,  adv.  on  the  other  hand,  moreover,  again,  once  more.  Bh. 

2.  9,  et  passim,  patiy  0ritiyam  ha[m]i0r[iya]  hangmata,  again  for  the 
third  time  the  confederates  assembled.  Postpos.,  not  always  with 


108 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


the  adversative  force  which  Foy  gives  it.  Xerx.  Pers.  a.  3. 
tyapatiy  kartam,  moreover  what  work]  Elam,  appa  sarak  huttukka. 
Dar.  NRa.  4.  yadipatiy  (sic,  cf . Stolze’s  Phot. , Persepolis  II,  109) 
maniya[ha]y  (cf.  Stolze’s  Phot.),  furthermore  if  thou  thinkest , 
where  again  the  Elam,  has  sarak  for  Persian  patiy.  On  the  ground 
that  sarak  also  renders  patiy  above,  Foy  argues  that  they  are  iden- 
tical. Bartholomae,  on  the  other  hand,  still  adheres  to  the  old 
view  that  patiy  in  the  last  two  passages  cited  is  an  enclitic  parti- 
cle with  indefinite  force  and  has  no  etymological  connection  with 
patiy,  the  prep,  and  adv. 

patikara,  m.  'picture , likeness.  Acc.  sg.  patikaram.  Acc.  pi. 
patikara.  patiy  -j-  kar  (q.  v.).  Cf.  New  Pers.  paikar,  Horn,  NS,  26. 

patigrabana  (Elam,  pattikrappana),  f.  name  of  a Parthian  town. 
Nom.  sg.  patigrabana.  patiy  -j-  grab  (q.  V.). 

patipada,  adj.  in  its  own  place.  Acc.  sg.  n.  patipadam,  Bh.  1. 
14.  ava  adam  patipadam  akunavam,  I put  it  in  place  (i.  e.  restored  it). 
patiy  -f-  *pada  (thematic),  foot.  Av.  pad  (Phi.  pal,  Turfan  MSS. 
pad,  New  Pers.  pai,  Afy.  pal),  Skt.  pad. 

patis,  prep,  with  acc.  against , towards.  Cf.  patiy;  for  final  s 
of  patis  see  Brugmann,  KZ,  27,  417  vs.  Schmidt,  Pluralbld.  352. 

patisuvari,  adj.  a Patischorian.  Nom.  sg.  m.  patisuvaris,  Dar. 
NRc.  Cf.  Horn,  IvZ,  38,  290. 

pa0i,  f.  way,  path.  Acc.  sg.  paftm,  Dar.  NRa.  6.  pa0im  tyam 
rastam  ma  avarada,  depart  not  from  the  true  way.  Cf.  Av.  pa#a 
(Oss.  fandag)  Skt.  panthan. 

paya,  the  second  word  in  Seal  Inscr.  d.  vahyav'sda  paya  accord- 
ing to  WB. 

para,  prep,  postpos.  with  acc.  e.  g.  avapara,  there  before , Bh. 
3.  12.  This  reading  confirmed  by  KT  sets  aside  Foy’s  conjec- 
ture avadapara,  davor.  Av.  para,  Skt.  pura. 

para,  adj.  after , e.  g.  hyaparam  (adv.),  thereafter , Bh.  3.  7.  hya 
(abl.  sg.)  + param  (acc.  sg.  n.).  Av.  para-,  Skt.  para. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


109 


paranam,  adv.  former'll/.  Bh.  1.  13.  hya  paranam  bardiyam  adana, 
who  had  known  Smerdis  formerly;  so  Bartholomae.  As  an  adj. 
Gray  (AJP,  21,  15)  the  former  Bardiya , and  ed.  Acc.  s g.  n.  of 
adj.  fr.  para,  before. 

pariy,  prep,  with  acc.  about , concerning.  Bh.  1.  13.  pariy 
gaumatam,  concerning  Gaumata.  Ay.  pairi  (New  Pers.  par-,  Bal.  pir), 
Skt.  pari. 

paru,  adj.  many.  Nom.  sg.  n.  paruv,  Bh.  4.  8.  Gen.  pi.  m. 
pariinam  (written  pnruuvanaam“  in  Dar.  NRa.  1;  Art.  Pers.  a.  b.  1). 
For  gen.  pi.  f.  parunam,  Dar.  Pers.  e.  1.  YAv.  pouru  (Bartholo- 
mae, Grundr.  298,  3.  Middle  Pers.  pur),  Skt.  puru. 

paruva,  adj.  1 )fot'mer.  Nom.  pi.  m.  paruva,  Bh.  4.  9.  2) east- 

ern, loc.  sg.  n.  paruvaiy,  Dar.  Pers.  e.  2,  on  the  east  (written 
pVuvaiya  by  stone-cutter’s  blunder  for  par"uvaiya;  cf . Bartholomae, 
Altiran.  Wb.,  872,  n.  8).  YAv.  paurva,  Skt.  purva. 

paruvam,  »adv.  formerly , Bh.  1.  4,  10,  14.  Acc.  sg.  n.  of 
paruva.  

paruviyata,  adv.  haca  paruviyata,  from  long  ago , Bh.  1.  3,  12. 
*paruviya , first,  before.  GAv.  paouruya,  Skt.  purvya  -f-  suffix  ta. 

paruzana,  adj.  containing  many  kinds  of  people.  Gen.  pi. 

paruvzananam,  Dar.  El  vend,  2;  (written  paruv  j zananam  in  Nei'X. 
Pers.  a.  2;  ca.  cb.  2;  Van,  2:  paruvzananam  in  Xerx.  Pers.  b.  2; 
da.  db.  2;  El  vend,  2).  paru  (q.  v.)  -f-  *zana,  man,  Skt.  jana;  fr. 
*zan,  give  birth , YAv.  zan  (New  Pers.  zayaS),  Skt.  jan. 

parga  (Elam,  parrakka),  m.  Nom.  sg.  parga,  Bh.  3.  7.  Thus 
written  instead  of  paraga  of  kT  and  ed. ; cf.  Foy,  KZ,  35,  13. 
New  Pers.  purg. 

par(9ava  (Elam,  partuma;  Bab.  pa-ar-tu-u),  m.  Parthia , Parthian. 
Nom.  Sg.  par6*ava.  Loc.  Sg.  par^avaiy.  Instl’.  pi.  par#avaibi[s],  Bh. 

2.  1.  96. 

parsa,  inchoative  stem  (s  = I.  E.  xsx,  Bartholomae,  Grundr. 
135;  Skt.  preha-ti,  Av.  parasaiti,  Turfan  MSS.  pursid,  New  Pers. 


110 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


pursaS),  to  ask,  examine  into,  punish,.  Impv.  2 sg.  parsa.  Pret. 
1 Sg.  aparsam. 

with  prefix  patiy,  examine,  read.  Subj.  2 sg.  patiparsahy,  3 

sg.  patiparsatiy. 


parsa  (Elam,  parsir;  Bab.  par-sa-a-a),  l)adj.  Persian.  Nom.  sg. 
m.  parsa.  Acc.  sg.  m.  parsam.  Instr.  sg.  m.  parsa.  Gen.  sg.  in. 
parsahya.  2)As  subs.  m.  Persia.  Nom.  Sg.  parsa.  Acc.  Sg.  par- 
sam. Instr.  sg.  pars!  (with  ana,  q.  v.),  Xerx.  Pers.  a.  3.  Abl.  sg. 
(with  haca)  parsa,  Dar.  NRa.  3,  4;  Sz.  C.  3.  Loc.  Sg.  parsaiy.  In 
addition  to  the  places  of  occurrence  KT  record  an  omitted  line, 
Bh.  3.  1.  53;  ima  tya  mana  kartam  parsaiy  ' #atiy  darayavaus  xsayaftya. 

pasa,  prep,  with  gen.  afterr.  Bh.  3.  6.  pasa  mana,  with  me. 
pasa  is  probably  for  *passa  < *pasca,  Av.  pasca  (New  Pers.  pas), 
Skt.  pacca  < *pas-ac-a  (instr.  Whitney,  Skt.  Gr.  1112,  e.);  cf. 
Gray,  AJP.  21,  8,  and  Grierson,  ZDMG,  50,  25.  Otherwise 
Bartholomae,  Altiran,  Wb.,  879  and  Foy,  KZ,  35,  26. 

pasava,  adv.  thereafter,  afterwards,  pasa  (q.  v.)  -f-  acc.  sg.  n. 
ava.  According  to  Bartholomae’s  reference  to  M6nant  and  Da- 
ressv  (Recueil  de  trav.)  pasava  is  to  be  supplied  after  aitiy  in  1.  10 
of  Dar.  Sz.  c.  3,  though  ed.  show  no  lacuna  here.  For  [pas]ava 
avada  karam  of  ed.  read  [a]vada  avam  karam  in  Bh.  1.  1.  88;  cf. 
KT,  18.  pasava  is  wrongly  supplied  in  ed.  in  Bh.  2.  1.  29. 
“There  is  no  gap  here;  the  clause  is  not  introduced  by  pasava, 
the  proper  name  dadarsis  being  the  first  word  in  the  sentence. 
All  the  signs  in  the  line  are  clear  upon  the  rock.”  KT.  [pasava] 
is  also  wrongly  supplied  by  KT  and  ed.  in  Bh.  2.  1.  49,  where 
the  corresponding  word  fails  in  Elam,  and  Bab.  versions.  Its 
omission  would  have  an  important  bearing  on  Weissbach’s  inter- 
pretation of  hamahyaya  tfarda,  in  the  same  year,  in  Bh.  4.  2,  6,  7, 
9,  12. 

pitar,  m.  father.  Nom.  sg.  pita.  Gen.  sg.  pi$ra,  Xerx.  Pers. 
a.  4.  tya  mana  kartam  uta  tyamaiy  pi^'a  kartam;  Pei'S,  ca.  cb.  3.  Av. 
pitar  (Turfan  MSS.  pidar,  New  Pers.  pidar),  Skt.  pitr;  cf.  Wack- 
ernagel,  Ai.  Gram.  16. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


111 

pirava,  in.  the  river  Nile.  Nora.  sg.  pirava,  Dar.  Sz.  c.  3.  adam 
ni[yas]tayam  imam  [yuviyajm  kantanaiy  haca  pirava  nama  rauta,  / ordered 

to  dig  this  canal  from  the  river  the  Nile  by  name.  Foy  (KZ, 
35,  31)  argues  for  a construction  of  an  acc.  with  haca  and  regards 
pirava  nama  as  a bahuvrihi  compound.  Thumb  (KZ,  32,  129) 
makes  the  anacoluthon  the  equivalent  of  haca  rauta  — pirava  nama 
rauta  — haca  ada;  cf.  Bartholomae,  BB,  14,  249;  Foy,  IF,  12,  176. 

pisa,  reading  of  ed.  and  KT  in  Bh.  5.  1.  24.  According  to 
Justi  (IF,  17,  Anz.  126),  the  instr.  sg.  (in  collective  sense)  of 
pisa,  raft , fl’.  pis  (q.  V.).  pisa  viyatarayam,  I crossed  on  rafts.  Cf. 
Foy,  KZ,  37,  529. 

pis.  The  primitive  meaning  of  the  root  (I.  E.  peik)  seems  to 
be  cut , trim  rather  than  farbig  machen  which  Bartholomae  gives. 
A survival  of  this  signification  we  see  in  such  a passage  as  BY. 
1,  161,  10,  mansam  ekah  pincati,  the  one  carves  the  meaty  ill  Old 
Slav,  pisa,  pisati,  to  scratch  in,  write / in  Gr.  7rot«tAos  as  applied  to 
work  in  metal,  stone  and  wood,  and  mie-pos  (nil  grade),  cutting , 
■sharp,  stinging , e.  g.  66 ' Zp.Tre.ae.  wiKpos  olaros,  where  the  piercing 
arrow  had  fallen , A,  217;  Ovyarepes  mKpa dSu'as  Z^ovacu,  sharp 
pains , A.  271  (cf.  6£tiai  oSAat,  ibid.  268).  The  transfer  to  the 
familiar  adorn  (Middle  Pers.  peslt,  ornamented)  which  is  the 
meaning  of  the  root  in  YAv.  is,  of  course,  natural  and  seen  in 
many  of  the  cognates;  e.  g.  pic,  to  ornament , Goth,  filu-faiha 
translating  ttoAwoikiAos  of  Ephes.  3,  10.  Tolman  in  Vdt.  Stud. 
1,  31. 


with  prefix  niy,  cut  (an  inscription),  s-  aor.  1 sg.  niyapis- 

am,  Bh.  4.  15,  21.  Inf.  nipistanaiy,  Xerx.  Van,  3.  Part.  acc.  sg. 
n.  nipistam,  Bh.  4.  8.  Acc.  sg.  f.  nipistam,  Xerx.  Van,  3.  Note 
Turf  an  MSS.  nibist. 

puntiya,  adj.  name  of  a people.  Nom.  pi.  m.  pu"tiya,  Par. 
NRa.  3. 

pu#ra,  m.  son.  Nom.  sg.  pu0ra.  Av.  pu0ra  (Turfan  MSS.  pus, 
pur,  puhr.  New  Pers.  pusar,  Oss.  furth),  Skt.  putra. 


112 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


F 

fra,  verbal  prefix,  forth;  e.  g.,  frabara  (fra  + abara).  Av.  fra. 
(Phi.  fra,  New  Pel’s,  far),  Skt.  pra. 

fratama,  adj.  first,  foremost.  Kom.  pi.  m.  fratama.  fra  (q.  v.) 
+ superl.  suffix  tama. 

fratarta,  reading  confirmed  by  KT  in  Bh.  3.  1.  26.  See  s.  v. 
tar. 

frada  (Elam,  pirrata;  Bab.  pa-ra-da-’),  m.  name  of  a Margian 
rebel.  Nom.  sg.  frada.  Cf.  Justi,  IF,  17,  Anz.  106. 

framatar,  m.  master , lord.  Acc.  sg.  framataram,  Xerx.  El- 
vend,  1.  aivam  parunam  framataram,  one  lord  of  (i.  e.  over ) many , et 
passim;  (written  wrongly  framataram,  Dar.  NBa.  1,  framataram, 
Art.  Pers.  a.  b.  1;  cf.  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  TCb.,  987).  New 
Pei’S.  farmaSar,  Skt.  pramatr;  fr.  fra  -}-  (fi-  V.). 

framana,  f.  command , precept.  Norn.  sg.  framana,  Dar.  NRa. 
6.  Turfan  MSS.  framan,  New  Pers.  farman;  fr.  fra  -f  ma  (q.  v.). 
Cf.  Pedersen,  IvZ,  39,  311. 

fravarti  (Elam,  pirrumartis;  Bab.  pa-ar-u-mar-ti-is;  Gl’.  d’/aacpr^s), 
m.  Phraortes , a Median  rebel.  See  Tolman  and  Stevenson,  Hdt. 
and  Empires  of  East,  68  if;  Weissbach,  ZDMG,  51,  517.  Nom. 
sg.  fravartis.  Acc.  sg.  fravartim.  Gen.  sg.  fravartais. 

fras*^  y(?)adayamaiy,  an  emendation  which  I suggested  in 
Dar.  Sus.  a.  for  the  uncertain  word. 

fraharavam,  adv.  altogether , in  all,  Bh.  1.  6.  Thus  to  be  read 
instead  of  fraharvam  of  KT  and  ed.;  cf.  Bartholomae,  BB,  13,  69; 
Fov,  KZ,  35,  1.  n.  Acc.  Sg.  n.  of  ’'frabara va,  all / fra  *harava, 
cf.  haruva  (q.  V.). 


B 

baxtri  (Bab.  ba-ab-tar),  f.  Bactria.  Nom.  sg.  baxtris.  Loc.  sg. 
baxtriya.  Cf.  Foy,  KZ,  35,  65,  who  discuss  the  proper  name  in 
reference  to  the  Elam,  (baxtris  = pakturris;  *bax#ris  = paksis). 
YAv.  baxSl  (New  Pers.  baxr). 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


113 


baga,  m.  god.  Nom.  sg.  baga.  Nom.  p).  bagaha.  Instr.  pi. 
bagaibis.  Gen.  pi.  baganam.  For  plurality  of  gods  see  Jackson- 
Gray,  JAOS,  21, 16S;  Tolman,  PAPA,  33,  68.  The  polytheism 
of  the  Deirmenjik  Inscription  of  Darius  (rijv  l-rrep  Oeu>v  p.ov  Sidfleow, 
cf.  Cousin-Desehamps,  Bull,  de  corr.  hell.  13,  530)  is  probably 
due  to  political  considerations.  The  plural  occurs  once  in  YAv. 
(Yt.  10,  111),  yet  more  frequently  in  Pahlavi.  YAv.  baya  (Mid- 
dle Pers.  bay,  Turfan  MSS.  bagiystom),  Skt.  bhaga.  Cf.  Fick, 
BB,  41,  311. 

bagabigna  (Elam,  pakapikna),  m.  name  of  the  father  of  Yidarna. 
Gen.  sg.  bagabignahya,  Bh.  1.  18.  "baga  which  may  be  connected 
with  YAv.  baya,  apportionment,  + *bigna(?).  Otherwise  Justi, 
ZDMG,  19,  682;  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  922. 

bagabuxsa  (Elam,  pakapuksa;  Bab.  ma-ga-bu-di-su;  Gr.  Mey a/3v£os), 
Megabyzos , one  of  the  allies  of  Darius  in  the  defeat  of  false 
Smerdis.  Nom.  sg.  ba[gab]uxsa,  Bh.  1.  18.  baga  (q.  v.)  -f-  *buxsa, 
fr.  *buj,  to  free,  YAv.  buj  (Middle  Pers.  boxtan). 

bagayadi  (Elam,  pagiyatis),  f.  name  of  a month,  Sept. -Oct. 
(Oppert,  Weissbach).  Gen.  sg.  bagayadais,  Bh.  1.  13.  baga  (q.  v.) 
-f-  *yada,  worship,  fr.  yad  (q.  V.). 

baji,  m.  tribute,  Acc.  sg.  bajim.  New  Pers.  baz;  fr.  *baj,  to 
allot,  YAv.  baj  (Middle  Pers.  baxtan),  Skt.  bhaj. 

band  (I.  E.  xbhendh),  to  bind.  Part.  nom.  sg.  m.  basta  (I.  E. 
*bhndh-to-s),  Bh.  1.  IT;  2.  13,  11.  YAv.  band  (Turfan  MSS.  bast, 
New  Pers.  bandad),  Skt.  bandb. 

ba”daka,  adj.  subject;  as  subs,  servant,  subject.  Nom.  sg. 
ba'Maka.  Nom.  pi.  f.  bandaka,  Bh.  1.  7.  *banda,  bond,  YAv.  banda 
(New  Pers.  band),  Skt.  bandha,  + suffix  ka;  lit.  he  who  is  in  bond*. 

babiru  (Elam,  papili;  Assyr.  in  oldest  documents  babilu,  babili, 
gate  of  god;  in  later  documents  babilani,  gate  of  the  gods,  whence 
Gr.  Ba/3vAu>v),  m.  Babylon,  Babylonia.  Nom.  sg.  babirus.  Acc. 
Sg.  babirum.  Abl.  Sg.  (with  haca)  babiraus.  Loc.  Sg.  babirauv. 

babiruviya,  adj.  Babylonian.  Nom.  sg.  m.  babiruviya.  Acc. 
Sg.  m.  blbiruvi[ya]m  (thus  read  in  Bh.  3.  1.  86  in  place  of  babirauv 


114 


AXCIEXT  PEKSIAX  LEX1C0X 


of  ed. ; cf.  KT,  58).  Nom.  pi.  (as  subs,  the  Babylonians)  babi- 
ruviya,  Bh.  3.  14.  Acc.  pi.  babiruvi[y]a,  Bh.  3.  1.  88.  babiruvi[y]a 
aja",  he  smote  the  Babylonians  (thus  read  in  place  of  babirum  agar- 
baya  of  ed. ; cf.  KT,  58). 

bar  (Pres,  bara-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  123),  to  bear , sustain, 
esteem.  Act.  ind.  pres.  3 pi.  barantiy,  Dar.  NRa.  4.  Pret.  1 sg. 
abaram.  3 sg.  abara  (written  ar:ira  by  stone-cutter’s  blunder  in  Bh. 
3.  1.  67;  cf.  KT,  54).  3 pi.  abara".  Impv.  3 sg.  baratuv.  Mid.  * 

ind.  pret.  3 pi.  abaranta,  Bh.  1.  7.  Av.  bar  (Turfan  MSS.  burdan, 
New  Pers.  baraS,  Gil.  bardan,  Kas.  bartan),  Skt.  bhr. 

with  prefix  patiy  + bring  bach , restore.  Pret.  1 sg. 

patiyabaram,  Bh.  1.  14. 

with  prefix  para,  bear  away,  tahe  away.  Pret.  3 sg.  para- 

bara,  Bh.  1.  14,  19.  Part.  nom.  sg.  n.  paraba[rta]m,  Bh.  1.  14. 

with  prefix  party,  protect,  preserve.  Pres.  subj.  2 sg. 

paribarahy  (paribar-  to  be  read  in  place  of  parikar-  in  Bh.  4.  11.  72, 

74,  78.  “The  character  b is  certain.”  KT),  Bh.  4.  17.  yadiy 

[naijydis  paribarahy,  if thou  shult  not  protect  them.  Bh.  4.  16. 

paribarah(i)dis.  pari[ba]ra  (subj.  2 sg.,  not  impv.;  cf.  the  preceding 
vikanahy,  (].  V.),  Bh.  4.  15.  ava&Lsta  (KT)  pari[ba]ra,  which  IIoll- 
mann-Ivutschke  (Phil.  Nov.  3.  105)  would  understand;  so  stehe 
da  (wie  ich  hier  im  Relief),  halt  (sir)  im  Zaurne(=  gefcsselt). 

with  prefix  fra.,  proffer,  grant.  Pret.  3 sg.  frabara. 

barataya,  reading  of  ed.  and  confirmed  by  IvT  in  Bh.  5.  1.  23, 
where  Foy  would  emend  [xaudajm  tigram  bara"ty,  (Scythians  who) 
wear  the  pointed  cap , but  IvT’s  cuneiform  text  reads  sakam  in  1.  22 
which  makes  this  theory  impossible  (unless  we  ascribe  a blunder 
here  to  the  work  of  the  two  English  scholars). 

bardiya  (Elam,  pirtiya;  Bab.  bar-zi-i-a),  m.  Smerdis,  brother  of 
Cambyses.  For  the  prothetic  <j  in  S/^epSts  of  Hdt.  (cf.  MapSos, 
MapSis,  Aesch.  Pers.  765)  see  Kretschmer,  KZ,  29,  440.  Nom. 
Sg.  bardiya.  Acc.  Sg.  bardiyam.  Cf . 4 Av.  barszant,  lofty,  Turfan 
]\1SS.  burzist.  Bartholomae,  ZDMG,  48,  155;  Fov.  KZ,  37,  536; 
Justi,  IF,  17,  Anz.  103. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


115 


bu  (Pres,  bava-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  123),  to  be.  Ind.  pret. 
L sg.  abavam.  3 sg.  abava.  3 pi.  abava'1.  Subj.  3 sg.  bavatiy,  Dar. 
NRa.  4:.  Opt.  2 sg.  blya  (Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud.  1,  33;  Weissbach, 
ZDMG,  61,  729;  Bartholomae,  "VVZKM,  22,  88).  3 sg.  blya  (I. 

E.  bhu-I-ie-t,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  11:3).  Av.  bu  (New  Pers. 
buvaS),  Skt.  bhu. 

bumi,  f.  earth.  Acc.  sg.  bumim  (written  bumam  in  Art.  Pers.  a. 
b.  1).  Gen.  Sg.  bumiya.  Av.  bumi  (New  Pers.  bum),  Skt.  bhuml. 

bratar,  m.  brother.  Nom.  sg.  brata,  Bh.  1.  10,  11.  Av.  bratar 
(New  Pers.  biradar,  Kurd,  bara,  Oss.  arvada),  Skt.  bhratr. 


M 

mft  in  Seal  Inscr.  e.  ma  xarsadasya.  According  to  Justi,  IF,  17, 
Anz.  112,  the  expression  for  seal , *maraka,  New  Pers.  marah. 

ma,  prohibitive  ptel.  not / l)with  opt.,  Bh.  1.  11,  17;  Dar. 
Pers.  d.  3;  2)with  injunctive,  Bh.  4.  10,  14;  Dar.  Pers.  e.  3; 
NRa.  6.  Av.  ma  (New  Pers.  ma),  Skt.  ma.  Cf.  Delbruck,  Ygl. 
Syntax,  3,  288. 

ma,  to  measure.  Av.  ma  (New  Pers.  azmayaS,  Oss.  amain),  Skt. 
ma. 

with  prefix  a,  extend  (i.  e.  be  of  ancient  lineage ),  ox  prove 

oneself.  Part.  nom.  pi.  amata,  Bh.  1.  3;  Bh.  a,  where  Andfeas- 
Hiising  would  emend  adata,  noble , i.  e.  of  ancient  family  (KZ, 
38,  255.  Cf.  also  the  supplement  of  Bab.  [mar]-banuti  which, 
however,  renders  fratama  in  Bh.  23,  77,  83,  88);  Yet  KT’s  cunei- 
form text  plainly  gives  m in  Bh.  1.  3. 

ma,  pron.  stem.  See  adam. 

maka  (Elam,  makka),  adj.  as  subs,  name  of  a people.  Nom. 
sg.  m.  maka,  Bh.  1.  6;  Dar.  Pers.  e.  2.  Hdt.  4.  175,  ot  M d/<at. 

magu  (Elam,  makus;  Bab.  ma-gu-su;  Gr.  Mayoi),  adj.  as  subs, 
name  of  a Median  tribe  celebrated  in  priestcraft  (cf.  Jackson, 


110 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


Zoroaster),  Magian.  Nom.  sg.  magus.  Acc.  sg.  magum.  Phi. 
magu.  Cf.  Justi,  IF,  IT,  Anz.  103. 

maciya,  adj.  as  subs,  name  of  a people.  Nom.  pi.  maciya. 
For  the  reading  iyam  maciya  in  Dar.  NRe.,  see  s.  v.  iyam.  Hdt.  4. 
191,  MaA’cs. 

matya,  conj.  with  subj.  that  not , lest , not.  Bh.  1.  13;  4.  6,  8, 
15.  ma  -f-  tya  (q.  V.). 

ma0ista,  adj.  1 )the  greatest.  Nom.  sg.  m.  ma0ista.  2) As  subs. 
chief. \ leader.  Nom.  sg.  maflista.  Acc.  sg.  maflistam.  Superl.  to 
*ma0,  great , YAv.  mas  (Middle  Pers.  mas,  New  Pers.  mih,  Horn, 
NS,  42,  2). 

mada  (Elam,  mata;  Bab.  ma-da-a-a;  Gr.  Mr;  Sot),  l)adj.  Median . 
Nom.  Sg.  m.  mada.  Acc.  Sg.  m.  madam.  Instl’.  pi.  mada[ibi]s,  Bh. 
2.  6.  Loe.  pi.  madaisuva,  Bh.  2.  6.  2)As  subs.  Media.  Nom. 
Sg.  mada.  Acc.  Sg.  madam.  Loc.  Sg.  madaiy. 

man  (Pres,  maniya-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  147),  to  think.  Mid. 
subj.  2 sg.  maniyahay,  Bh.  4.  5;  Dar.  Pers.  e.  3;  NRa.  4;  so  Bar- 
tholomae for  maniyahy  of  ed.  3 Sg.  maniya[taiy] , thus  read  in  Bh. 
4.  1.  50.  The  a is  attested  by  KT's  examination.  Jackson  (JAOS, 
24,  89)  feels  less  certain,  for  he  remarks  that  “despite  syntacti- 
cal grounds”  there  is  no  space  for  a.  Av.  man,  Skt.  man. 

man  (Pres,  manaya-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  151),  to  remain. 
Pret.  3 Sg.  amanaya,  Bh.  2.  9,  11.  amaniya,  Bh.  2.  6 (cf.  KT,  26). 
Av.  man  (New  Pers.  mandan). 

maniya,  n.  estate  (f).  Cf.  Turf  an  MSS.  rnanbed.  Acc.  sg. 
maniyam,  Bh.  1.  14.  Some  of  the  meanings  which  have  been 
proposed  for  this  doubtful  word  are  the  following:  dwelling 
places  (KT);  les  rnaisons  (Darmesteter,  Etud.  Iran.  2.  129);  le 
case  (Rugarli);  das  Wohnen  (IV B);  liegende  JIabe  (Bartholomae); 
real  estate  (Gray,  AJP,  21,  16;  cf.  YAv.  nmana);  Justi  (IF,  17, 
Anz.  108)  translates,  Ila uskomplexe  (maniya  von  mana,  lions,  wie 
naviya,  Flotille,  von  *nau,  also  Pliitze  wo  etwa  Gewerbetreibende 
oder  Handler,  Reprasentanten  dcr  biigerlichen  Untertanen, 
wohnen).  Cf.  Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  13. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


117 


[man'1uvatama,  a proposed  reading  of  Jackson  (JAOS,  24,  93) 
for  IvT’s  + + t"nuuvat“ma  (q.  v.).  “The  text  is  indeed  much  mu- 
tilated, but  each  of  the  letters  u,  v,  t,  m is  legible.  (The  letter 
of)  the  first  part  of  the  word  (is)  apparently  n” — . The  sketch 
made  in  my  notes  looks  precisely  like  n".  A further  examina- 
tion of  the  damaged  part  revealed  an  apparent  m preceding  this, 
so  that  we  may  assume  that  the  word  began  with  m.”  A possi- 
ble comparison  with  Skt.  manuvat,  v:ie  Menschen  is  suggested. 
Weissbach  (ZDMG,  61,  729)  reads  naiy  sakauri[m  naiy  + +]  nuvatam, 
weder  dem  Findding  nock  dem  Armen.  The  Bab.  apparently 
renders  by  muskinu.  We  might  compare  manbed  of  Turfan  MSS. 
So  Hofl'mann-Kutschke  who  renders,  Kneclit  undllerr  (manuvant).] 

+ + + + mamaita  (KT's  cuneiform  text;  + + + + mamita,  KT’s 
transliteration),  mutilated  proper  name  in  Bh.  5.  1. 

mar  (Pres,  mariya-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  148),  to  die.  Mid. 
pret.  3 sg.  arnariyata,  Bh.  1.  11.  YAv.  mar  (Turfan  MSS.  murd, 
New  Pers.  mlrad),  Skt.  mr. 

ma  + + + (Elam,  marus;  Bab.  ma-ru-’),  to  be  read  maru,  m.  name 
of  a Median  town.  Nom.  sg.  m[aru]§,  Bh.  2.  6;  cf.  KT,  25. 

margava,  adj.  as  subs.  Margian.  Nom.  sg.  margava.  Instr.  pi. 
margavaibis,  thus  read  in  Bh.  3.  1.  16  in  place  of  margayaibis  of  ed. 
“The  sign  is  v not  y.”  KT. 

margu  (Elam  markus;  Bab.  mar-gu-’;  Gl’.  Mapyos,  Mapyiavi)),  ni. 
Margiana.  Nom.  Sg.  margus.  Acc.  Sg.  margum.  Loc.  Sg.  margauv. 
YAv.  maryu  (New  Pei’S,  marv). 

martiya,  m.  man.  Nom.  sg.  martiya.  Acc.  sg.  martiyam.  Gen. 
Sg.  martiyahya  (written  in  Art.  Pers.  a.  martihya).  Voc.  Sg.  martiya, 
Dar.  NRa.  6.  Nom.  pi.  martiya.  Acc.  pi.  martiya.  Instr.  pi. 
martiyaibis.  Av.  masya  (New  Pei’S,  mard,  Kurd,  mir),  Skt.  martya; 
fr.  mar  (q.  V.). 

martiya  (Elam,  martiya;  Bab.  mar-ti-ia),  m.  name  of  a Susian 
rebel.  Nom.  Sg.  martiya.  Acc.  Sg.  martiyam. 

marda,  doubtful  word  in  Bh.  5.  1.  11.  Foy  (KZ,  35,  48)  would 
emend  utasim  a marda,  und  vernichtete  es.  connecting  the  word  with 


118 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


Skt.  mrd.  KT  record;  uta  daiy  marda  where  one  feels  strongly 
tempted  to  read  uta  sis  amarda,  and  he  annihilated  them.  Cf.  Tol- 
man,  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  36. 

marduniya  (Liam,  martuniya;  Gr.  MapSonos),  m.  2Lo,rdonius , 
father  of  Gobryas.  Gen.  sg.  marduniyahya,  Bh.  I.  18. 

mazdah,  see  s.  V.  aura  and  auramazdah. 

maska,  skin,  flood  of  skins.  Loc.  pi.  maskauva,  text  as  con- 
firmed by  KT  in  Bh.  1.  1.  86,  who  fail  to  appreciate  the  value  of 
their  record,  since  they  attempt  no  translation  and  even  sug- 
gest the  possibility  of  taking  the  obliquely-meeting  wedges  of 
the  cuneiform  sign  for  u as  the  word-divider,  thus  giving  maska 
dava.  The  new  reading  proves  the  correctness  of  Justi’s  conjec- 
ture (IF,  IT,  Anz.  125;  cf.  Foy,  KZ,  37,  533)  as  loc.  pi.  of  maska; 
cf.  Assyr.  mas-ku-u,  skin,  Aram,  meska.  It  is  in  Persian  a loan 
word  (New  Pers.  mask)  and  has  reference  to  the  manner  of  cross- 
ing the  river,  which  has  been  in  vogue  from  early  times  to  the 
present  day,  i.  e. , on  inflated  skins  or  a raft  or  bridge  supported 
by  such  skins.  The  Assyrian  reliefs  (e.  g.  Layard’s  Nineveh, 
fig.  52)  show  the  method.  Xeu.  (Anab.  2.  4.  28)  speaks  of  the 
rafts  as  a Stats  8t<£0epiVais.  The  meaning  of  the  passage  is  now 
quite  clear  and  this  reading  supersedes  the  various  attempted 
emendations  (cf.  KZ,  35,  35;  AJP,  21,  20;  ZDMG,  46,  244). 
Jackson  (JAOS,  24,  85)  records  that  the  first  part  of  the  word 
looks  more  like  m^y",  but  later  writes  in  a personal  letter  to 
Justi:  “Your  conjecture  is  so  brilliant  that  I am  almost  tempted 
to  doubt  my  reading,  but  the  y did  seem  quite  certain  in  my 
notes,  for  I examined  the  word  with  great  care.”  Tolman  in 
Ydt.  Stud.  1,  15. 

mah,  m.  month,  with  gen.  of  the  name.  Loc.  sg.  (with  post- 
pos.  a)  mahya.  Gray  (AJP,  21,  14)  returns  to  the  older  view  of 
regarding  mahya  as  contracted  from  mahahya  (them.  gen.  sg. ; cf. 
Skt.  masa)  and  thus  avoids  the  “appositional  genitive”  of  the 
name.  For  the  seasons  of  the  Persian  months  see  Justi,  ZDMG, 
51;  Oppert,  ibid.  52;  KT,  xxvi;  Prasek  Beitrage  z.  alt.  Gesch. 
1901.  Av.  mah  (Turfan  MSS.  pur-mah,  New  Pers.  mah,  Oss. 
maya),  Skt.  mas. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


119 


mi0ra,  m.  the  god  2Iithra}‘  cf.  Ilillebrandt,  Ved.  Myth.  3,  128; 
Jackson,  JAOS,  21, 169;  Grundr.  d.  iran.  Philol.  2,  40;  Tolman, 
PAPA,  33,  69.  Norn.  sg.  miflra,  Art.  Sus.  a;  Art.  Pers.  a.  b.  4, 
(written  m'tra,  Art.  Ilamadan;  cf.  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb., 
1185,  n.).  Av.  mi0ra  (New  Pers.  mihr),  Skt.  mitra. 

mud  (Pres,  mu0a-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  124),  to  flee.  Pret.  3 
sg.  amu0a.  Cf . Htlsing,  KZ,  38,  258.  This  interpretation  (which 
is  favored  by  both  Elam,  and  Bab.  versions)  is  undoubtedly  cor- 
rect and  supersedes  the  former  view  of  regarding  amu0a  as  an  adv. 
Cf.  Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  21.  In  Bh.  3.  1.  71  read  am[u0a]  in 
place  of  ma&sta  of  ed. 

mudraya  (Elam,  muzzariya;  Bab.  mi-sir;  Steph.  Byz.  Mixrpa),  adj. 
as  subs.  Egyptian , Egypt.  Nom.  sg.  mudraya.  Acc.  sg.  mudrayam, 
Dar.  Sz.  C.  3.  Abl.  Sg.  [mudrajya,  Dar.  Sz.  C.  3.  Loc.  Sg.  mud- 
rayaiy,  Dar.  Sz.  c.  3.  Nom.  pi.  mudraya,  Dar.  Pers.  e.  2;  NRa.  3. 


Y 

yautiya  (Elam,  yautiyas;  Bab.  i-u-ti-ia),  f.  name  of  a Persian  dis- 
trict. Nom.  Sg.  yautiya,  Bh.  3.  5. 

yau  + + + +,  read  by  Bartholomae  (IF,  12,  132)  yauda”tim  (act. 
pres.  part.  f.  to  yaud,  YAv.  yaoz,  be  in  commotion .);  by  WB1, 
yu[diya],  in  Aufruhr ; WB11,  yau^  + +,  Dar.  NRa.  4.  auramaz[da 
ya0]a  avaina  imam  bumim  yau  + + + + pasavadim  mana  frabara,  when  Aihura 
Mazda  saw  this  earth  in  rebellion , thereafter  he  gave  it  to  me. 

yauna  (Elam,  iyauna;  Bab.  ia-a-ma-nu),  adj.  as  subs.  Ionian , land 
of  the  Ionians.  Nom.  sg.  yauna,  Dar.  NRa.  3.  Nom.  pi.  yauna. 
Cf.  Justi,  IE,  17,  Anz.  99. 

yata,  conj.  1 )ivhile,  when , 2)until.  Cf.  Delbrtick,  Vgl.  Syn- 
tax, 3,  334. 

ya0a,  conj.  1 )as,  2)when , 3 )because,  4 )in  order  that , that.  Barth- 
olomae, by  reference  to  Mbnant  and  Daressy  (Recueil  de  trav.) 
reads  ava0a  ya0a  for  pa[s]ava  in  1.  11  of  Dar.  Sz.  c.  3.  Av.  ya0a 
Skt.  yatha.  Cf.  KZ,  33,  423;  ZDMG,  46,  297;  WZKM,  3.  147; 
Delbrtick,  Vgl.  Syntax,  3.  429. 


120 


AXCIEXT  PERSIAX  LEXICOX 


yad  (Pres,  yada-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  123),  to  worship.  Mid. 
subj.  3 sg.  yaaatai[y],  thus  read  in  Bh.  5.  1.  31  (cf.  KT,  83),  con- 
firming Bartholomae’s  conjecture  (Foy,  yadatiy,  KZ,  35,  48). 
The  same  form  I supplied  (Vdt.  Stud.  1,  36)  in  the  lacuna  of  Bh. 
5.  1.  19,  hya  auramazdam  ya[dataiy].  Pret.  1 sg.  ayadaiy,  recorded 
by  KT  in  Bh.  5.  2,  who  attempt  no  interpretation,  yet  I regard 
it  as  quite  likely  the  root  yad;  cf.  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  36.  I also 
would  emend  y(?)adayamaiy,  Dar.  Sus.  a.  Av.  yaz  (Middle  Pei’S, 
yastan,  New  Pel's,  yazdan,  cf.  Horn,  NS,  37,  2),  Skt.  yaj. 

yadaya,  abl.  with  haca  of  an  uncertain  word  in  Bh.  3.  5,  con- 
firmed by  IvT  who  translate,  from  my  allegiance.  This  attested 
reading  makes  improbable  Foy’s  ya[u]daya  ( Jcampf '.  cf.  Skt.  yodh- 
ana,  -j-  aya,  gang)  vom  hriegszug , and  haca  yutiya  (Or.  Lift.  Ztg. 
Nov.,  1905). 

yadiy,  conj.  1 )if  2)  when.  For  yadipatiy  (sic)  see  s.  v.  patiy, 
adv.  Cf.  Delbruck,  Vgl.  Syntax,  3,  314.  YAv.  yeSi,  Skt.  yadi. 

yana,  m.  favm\  There  is  now  hardly  any  doubt  as  to  the 
reading  of  this  word  and  the  lacuna  in  Bartholomae’s  Altiran. 
Mb.,  1285  (yan  + + m)  should  be  removed.  Jackson  (JAOS,  27, 
191)  records:  “There  is  a slight  space  between  n and  m,  appar- 
ently due  to  an  original  defect  in  the  stone,  and  not  to  any  la- 
cuna in  the  tablet.  I could  see  no  evidence  of  any  letter  being 
missing  and  I believe  that  the  reading  yanam  may  be  accepted  as 
certain.”  Stolze’s  photograph  (Pers.  II,  95)  evidently  shows 
simply  this  “defect  in  the  stone”  and  makes  Foy’s  proposed 
emendation  yaniyam,  segen , improbable.  Acc.  sg.  yanam,  Dar. 
Pers.  d.  3.  aita  adam  yanam  jadiyamiy  auramazdam,  this  OS  a favor  1 
pray  of  Ahura  JIazda.  Av.  yana. 

yanaiy,  adv.  whereon.  Xerx.  Van.  3.  yanaiy  dipim  naiy  nipistam 
akunaus,  whereon  he  had  cut  no  inscription.  Loc.  sg.  on  instr. 
stem  of  ya;  so  Muller,  WZKM,  7,  112;  Bartholomae,  Altiran. 
Mb.,  1262;  otherwise  Foy  (instr.  yana  -j-  iy;  KZ,  37,  501);  Bollen- 
sen  (yana  naiy);  Oppert  (ya-naiy). 

yam  (Inchoative  pres,  yasa-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  135),  to 
reach , attain.  Av.  yam,  Skt.  yam. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


121 


with  prefix  a,  appropriate , take  to  oneself,  seize  as  one’s 

possession.  Mid.  pret.  3 s g.  ayasata  (Bartholomae,  BB,  Id,  216), 
Bh.  3.  7.  karam  ayasata,  he  took  over  the  army ; Bh.  1.  12.  dahyava 
hauv  ayasata,  the  lands  he  seized  as  his  possession  ; Bab.  + + ti  a-na 
sa  ra-ma-ni-su  ut-te-ir,  he  took  it  for  himself / Elam.  emitusa  tuman-e, 
he  seized  as  his  possession.  Cf.  Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud.  1, 11.  Kern 
(ZDMG,  23,  229)  read  ayasta  as  nom.  a g.  with  acc.  Hoffmann 
(BB,  18,  285)  regarded  the  word  as  instr.  sg.  comparing  Skt. 
ayatta,  abhdngig  von.  Cf.  Foy,  KZ,  35,  33;  Gray,  AJP,  21,  Id. 

yava,  adv.  as  long  as.  Skt.  yavat.  Cf.  Delbriick,  Ygl.  Syntax, 
3,  33d. 

yuviya,  f.  canal.  Nom.  sg.  yuviya,  Dar.  Sz.  c.  3.  Acc.  sg. 
yuviyam,  Dar.  Sz.  c.  3.  Cf.  Skt.  yavya  (instr.),  RV.  8.  98,  8.  Phi. 
yoi,  New  Pers.  joi. 


R 

raucah,  n.  day.  Nom.  sg.  rauca,  Bh.  3.  1.  1 rauca  0akatam  (q.  v.) 
aha,  one  day  v:as  completing  its  course.  Acc.  sg.  rauca,  Bh.  1.  7. 
xsapava  raucapativa,  either  by  night  or  day.  Instr.  pi.  (for  nom. 
pi.)  raucabis,  Bh.  3.  3.  23  raucabis  Sakata  (q.  v.)  aba11,  twenty-three 
days  were  completing  their  course.  Av.  raocah  (Phi.  roc,  Turfan 
MSS.  roj,  New  Pers.  roz);  fr.  *ruc,  to  shine , YAv.  rue,  Skt.  rue. 

rautah,  n.  river.  Nom.  sg.  rauta,  Dar.  Sz.  c.  3.  haca  pirava 
nama  rauta,  from  the  river  Kile  by  name;  for  construction  see  s. 
v.  pirava.  Phi.  rot,  New  Pers.  rod,  Kurd,  ro;  Skt.  srotas  fr.  sru, 
flow. 

raxa  (Elam,  rakkan),  f.  name  of  a Persian  town.  Nom.  sg. 
raxa,  Bh.  3.  6. 

raga  (Elam,  rakkan;  Bab.  ra-ga-q,  f.  name  of  a Median  district. 
Nom.  sg.  raga,  Bh.  2.  13.  Abl.  sg.  (with  haca)  ragaya,  Bh.  3.  1. 
YAv.  rayi. 

rad  (Pres,  rada-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  123),  to  leave.  Skt.  rah. 
Cf.  Foy,  KZ,  37,  56d;  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  1505. 


122 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


with  prefix  ava,  leave , abandon.  Injunctive  2 sg.  avarada, 

Bar.  NRa.  6.  pa$im  tyam  rastam  ma  avarada,  leave  not  the  true 
path . 

rad,  f.  see  avahyaradiy. 

rasa-,  inchoative  pres. ; see  ar. 

rasta,  adj.  true ; so  now  Bartholomae  (AVZKM,  22,  88),  com- 
paring YAv.  rasta,  Turfan  AISS.  rast,  true.  Acc.  sg.  rastam, 
NRa.  6. 

+ + + + rtaiyiya,  text  confirmed  by  KT  in  Bh.  1.  1.  At.  I sug- 
gested (Vdt.  Stud.  1.  30)  the  supplement  [upavajrtaiy,  I turn  to 
(i.  e.  appeal  to  Ahura  Mazda)  regarding  + + + + rtaiyiya  as  ditto- 
graphy  for  + + + + rtaiy  (cf.  tyana  mana,  Bh.  1.  8).  For  this  mean- 
ing of  upa  -}-  a -f-  vart  in  Skt.  cf.  examples  quoted  in  PWb.  and 
note  Turfan  MSS.  vard.  Elam,  ankirir  auuramasta-ra  sap  appa,  1 
state  as  a follower  of  Ah  ura  Mazda.  See  s.  v.  auramazdah.  Bar- 
tholomae (WZKM,  22,  69)  suggests  auramazd[a  vajrtiyaiy  (or  avart- 
or  vavart-;  cf.  New  Pers.  avar),  may  Ahura  Mazda  be  my  witness , 
regarding  the  form  as  opt.  3 sg.  of  denom.  to  var  built  on  nom. 
ag.  in  tay.  Hofi'mann-Kutschke  (Phil.  Nov.  3,  103)  proposes 
auramaz[da  baga  ma] rtaiyiya,  Auramazda  1st  der  Gott  des  Mensclien , 
wobei  letzteres  Wort  wohl  fur  martiyahya  vermeisselt  ware  oder 
besser  martiyaiy  vw.  /xaprv s,  Zeuge , mit  vorhergehendem  auramaz- 
fdam],  ich  rife  zum  Zeugen  an.  He  interprets  the  Elam.  ankirir 
a“uramasta-ra,  der  (einzige)  Gott  ist  Auramazda. 


V 

va,  conj.  end.  or;  va  — va,  Bh.  1.  7.  Av.  va  (Turfan  MSS. 
va,  and , New  Pers.  va),  Skt.  va. 

vaina-,  pres,  of  na-  class  treated  as  thematic  (Bartholomae, 
Grundr.  132;  cf.  YAv.  vaenaiti,  Turfan  MSS.  veneed,  New  Pers. 
blnaS,  Skt.  venati),  to  see.  Mid.  to  seem.  Act.  ind.  pret.  3 sg. 
avaina.  Subj.  2 Sg.  vainahy.  Mid.  pres.  3 sg.  vainataiy,  Xerx. 
Pers.  a.  3. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


123 


vaumisa  (Elam,  maumissa;  Bab.  u-mi-is-su),  m.  name  of  a Persfan 
leader.  Norn.  S g.  vaumisa.  Ace.  Sg.  vaumisam.  va[h]u  -j-  misa  (cf. 
mi#ra). 

va#rabara,  reading  of  WB  in  Bar.  NRd.  who  translate  Genosse 
(?);  Bartholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.  and  Justi,  ZDMG,  50,  669, 
Stabtrdger  (?).  Otherwise  Foy,  ZDMG,  55,  509.  It  is,  as  Justi 
observes,  clearly  a title  of  a court  official.  If  va#ra  = New  Pers. 
bar,  branch , bough , as  Horn  suggests,  I would  favor  the  meaning 
how-bearer. 

vayam,  Av.  vaem,  Skt.  vayam;  see  adam. 

vayaspara  (Elam,  mispar  + +;  Bab.  mi-is-pa-ru-’),  ni.  name  of  the 
father  of  Intaphernes.  Gen.  sg.  va[ya]sp[ara]hya,  Bh.  4.  18.  Foy 
suggests  the  etymology  vaya[t],  flechtend  (Skt.  vayanti)  + spara, 
schild  (Av.  spara. dasta,  New  Pers.  sipar)  which  Bartholomae 
(Altiran.  Wb.,  1359)  rejects  because  of  the  a in  reference  to  the 
New  Pers.  and  o"n-apaf3dpau  in  Hesychius.  KT  record  va-,  not  va-. 

var  (Pres,  vamav-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  131),  to  choose / Mid. 
to  convince.  Mid.  subj.  3 sg.  vamavataiy  (thematic),  Bh.  4.  8. 

mat[ya]  naisa[iy]  ima  (Weissbach,  ZDMG,  61,  728)  vamavataiy, 

lent  it  does  not  convince  him.  Impv.  3 sg.  vamavatam  (thematic), 
Bh.  4.  6,  10.  Av.  var.  Skt.  vr.  Cf.  Keller,  KZ,  39, 176.  Note 
Turfan  MSS.  ne  varov&d. 

varkana  (Elam,  mirkaniya;  Gr.  'YpKavia),  adj.  as  subs.  Ilyrcania. 
Nom.  sg.  varkana.  Cf.  YAv.  vahrka,  wolf  (New  Pers.  gurg),  Skt. 
vrka. 

[vart,  to  turn;  with  prefix  upa  + a.  1 sg.  mid.  [upavajrtaiy,  / 
appeal.  See  + + + + rtaiyiya.] 

vardana,  n.  town.  Nom.  sg.  vardanam.  GAv.  varazina,  YAv. 
varazana  (New  Pei’S,  barzan;  cf.  Noldeke,  ZDMG,  46,  442),  Skt. 
vrjana.  Note  also  Justi,  IF.  Anz.  18,  39. 

vasiy,  adv.  much , to  a great  extent , in  large  numbers , utterly. 

Phi.  vas,  New  Pers.  bas,  Bal.  gvas;  fr.  *vas,  to  vnsh , Av.  vas,  Skt. 
vac.  Gray  renders  etymologically,  at  will , AJP,  21,  15.  For 


124 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


reading  vasaiy  (*unsxhai),  see  Foy,  KZ,  35,  21;  Muller’s  vasiya, 
(jew alt,  menge  (WZKM,  7,  257;  cf.  Pedersen,  KZ,  40,  134)  is 
improbable. 

vasdasaka,  uncertain  word  in  Seal  Inscr.  c.  vasda  saka,  WB. 

vasna,  m.  will,  favor.  Instr.  Sg.  vasna;  vasna  auramazdaha,  Dei 
gratia  (Dar.  Inscr.  41  times;  Xerx.  Inscr.  6 times;  Art.  II.  Inscr. 
once).  The  divine  right  of  kings  is  recognized  not  only  in  this 
phrase  but  in  such  expressions  as  auramazda  xsa0‘am  mana  frabara 
(Dar.  Inscr.  7 times);  hya  (mam)  xsaya0iyam  akunaus  (Dar.  Inscr.  5 
times;  Xerx.  Inscr.  6 times;  Art.  III.  Inscr.  once).  Av.  vasna; 
fr.  V'vas,  to  wish,  Av.  vas  (Turfan  MSS.  vasnad),  Skt.  vac. 

vazarka,  adj.  great,  mighty.  The  word  is  probably  thus  to  be 
read  instead  of  the  common  transliteration  vazraka  (YAv.  vazra, 
New  Pers.  gurz,  Skt.  vajra,  Indira’s  thunderbolt)  of  ed.  and  KT. 
Cf.  TavvoiapKrjs  = Persian  tanu-vazarka,  great  in  body.  Noldeke 
argued  against  vazraka  on  the  ground  that  it  would  give  New 
Pers.  *bazra  or  *guzra,  not  buzurg,  yet  I fail  to  see  his  phonetic  rea- 
sons. Cf.  Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1.  7;  Foy,  KZ,  37,  537;  Bar- 
tholomae,  Altiran.  Wb.,  1390,  n.  Nom.  sg.  m.  vazarka.  Acc.  sg. 
n.  vazarkam.  Gen.  sg.  f.  vazarkaya.  Turfan  MSS.  vazurg,  New 
Pers.  buzurg,  Paz.  guzurg.  Cf.  Jud.  Pers.  buzurgan. 

vahauka  (Elam,  maukka),  m.  name  of  the  father  of  Ardumanish. 
Gen.  sg.  vahau[kahya],  Bh.  4.  18. 

vahyavisdapaya,  uncertain  word  in  Seal  Inscr.  d.  vahyavisda 
paya,  WB. 

vahyazdata  (Elam,  mistatta;  Bab.  u-mi-iz-da-a-tu),  m.  name  of  a 
Persian  rebel.  Nom.  sg.  vahyazdata.  Gen.  sg.  vahyazdatahya  (sic; 
cf.  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  412,  n),  Bh.  3.  6,  7.  Acc.  sg.  vahyaz- 
datam. 

viy,  verbal  prefix,  apart,  away,  e.  g.  viyaka11  (see  kan).  Av.  vi 
(New  Pers.  gu-),  Skt.  vi. 

viO,  f.  1 )royal  court,  royal  race.  2)royal  jialace.  Cf.  Turfan 
MSS.  visbed.  Acc.  sg.  vi#am  (written  v^am  in  Bh.  1.  121).  Instr. 
Sg.  (with  patiy)  v'tfapatiy,  Bh.  3.  5.  kara  parsa  hya  v’#apatiy  (text  as 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


125 


confirmed  by  KT,  thus  setting  aside  Foy’s  emendation  (KZ,  37, 
55G)  vitfiyapatiy,  vi#iy  -j-  apatiy,  zu  house  in  opposition  to  the  army 
in  the  field;  cf.  Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  2d).  Loc.  sg.  (with  post- 
pos.  a)  v'#iya,  Fill.  4.  13.  martiya  hya  hamataxsata  mana  v'0i[ya],  tin 
mail  who  aided  wy  royal  house.  Bartholomae  (Altiran.  Wb., 
1446)  takes  vifliya  as  gen.  sg.  of  vi#i  with  meaning  of  vi 0.  vi0iya, 
Dar.  Pers.  c.  Av.  vis,  Skt.  vie. 

v'i0aibaisa  (read  either  vi&nbis  or  vitfibis),  an  adj.  in  instr.  pi. 
agreeing  with  bagaibis  in  Dar.  Pers.  d.  11.  22,  24.  The  commonly 
accepted  view  at  present  regards  the  word  as  vi#a,  all  < visa  < 
vispa  (cf.  asa  < aspa).  I do  not  attach  to  the  Bab.  phrase,  Dar. 
Pers.  g.  24,  itti  ilani  gabbi,  with  all  the  gods , the  importance  some 
scholars  have  given  it.  The  polytheism  of  the  Babylonians 
would  obscure  a distinctive  Pei’sian  religious  conception  in  the 
epithet.  Note  s.  v.  drauga,  how  the  Bab.  translation  fails  to  re- 
produce the  Persian  thought.  This  meaning  has  also  sutfered 
through  the  correction  v'0abaisaca  (q.  v.)  in  Bh.  1.  1.  65,  which 
cannot  now  signify  all , as  was  formerly  suggested.  The  older 
reading  and  interpretation  vDibis  bagaibis,  with  the  gods  of  the 
royal  house  or,  as  Justi  (IF,  17,  Anz.  108)  puts  it,  mit  den  vow 
Stamm  verehrten  Gottem , come  again  into  prominence.  So  Foy 
(KZ,  33,  431),  Rawlinson,  Spiegel,  "WB,  Tiele  {met  de  goden  van 
den  stam ),  Bartholomae  (Zum  Altiran.  Wb.,  227).  For  a discus- 
sion of  this  epithet  in  reference  to  the  6eol  fiaaiXyioi  of  Hdt.  see 
Tolman,  PAPA,  33,  68.  Cf.  Gray,  JAOS,  21,  181;  ibid.  23,  56; 
Foy,  KZ,  37,  533;  Rapp,  ZDMG,  19,  67;  Justi,  IF,  17,  Anz.  108; 
Pedersen,  KZ,  40,  133. 

v'0abaisaca,  text  as  confirmed  by  Jackson  and  KT  in  Bh.  1.  1. 
65.  Cf.  Turfan  MSS.  visbed.  The  late  discussions  of  the  word 
have  been  based  on  the  reading  vi&ubis;  cf.  Gray,  JAOS,  23,  56, 
who  regarded  the  form  as  instr.  pi.  for  acc.  pi.,  translating  and 
all  things;  See  now  Bartholomae,  Zum  Altiran.  Wb.,  227.  Foy’s 
vi0abisaca-ca  (ZDMG,  54,  349),  gescldechtsgefolgschaft  agrees  more 
closely  with  the  reading  which  we  must  now  adopt.  In  Vdt. 
Stud.  1,  14,  I suggested  vitfbis  (Av.  vlz^is)  instr.  pi.  for  acc.  pi., 
and  the  royal  residences;  or  as  Justi  (IF,  17,  Anz.  108),  einzelne 
Hauser  (vi0  ist  in  der  Inscrift  des  Dareios  palastes  die  Bezeich- 
nung  dieses  Gebaude,  nicht  des  ganzen  Sehlosses  oder  der  Burg 


120 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


von  Persepolis,  welche  in  der  susischen  Bauurkunde  an  der  stid- 
lichen  Mauer  halvarras  heisst).  Gray  in  a personal  letter  to  me 
suggests  vi#abis  (instr.  pi.  n.)  relating  to  the  royal  residence*,  com- 
paring Av.  visan,  der  ein  Jlaus,  Ilauswesen  hat. 

vindafarnah  (Elam,  mintaparna;  Gr.  Ii'ra^e'pr^s),  m.  Intaphern.es. 
name  of  ally  of  Darius  against  the  false  Sinerdis,  Bh.  3.  11;  1. 
18;  thus  read  vindafar[na],  Bk.  3.  1.  84,  [v]i”da[farn]a,  1.  86,  vi"da- 
[far]na,  1.  88,  text  as  confirmed  by  KT,  which  removes  vi'  dafra  of 
ed.  from  the  Persian  vocabulary;  cf.  Tolinan,  Vdt.  Stud.  1.  27. 
*vPda(t),  act.  pres,  part.  to  vid,  find,  Av.  vid  (Turfan  MSS.  vin- 
dad,  Middle  Pers.  vinditan),  Skt.  vid,  -j-  *farnah,  glory,  \ Av, 
x'aranah. 

vidarna  (Elam,  mitarna;  Bab.  u-mi-da-ar-na-’;  Gr.  'YSapvrjs),  m.  II y- 
darnes,  name  of  ally  of  Darius  against  the  false  Smerdis.  Nom. 
sg.  vidarna.  The  restoration  [majna  for  vidarnahya  of  ed.  in  Bh.  2. 
1.  25  is  certain;  cf.  KT,  20. 

viyaxna  (Elam,  miyakannas;  Bab.  addaru),  m.  name  of  a Persian 
month,  Feb. -March  (i.  e.  Adar,  twelfth  month;  cf.  Bab.).  Gen. 
sg.  viyaxnahya  (sic;  cf.  KT,  8,  54),  Bh.  1,  11;  3.  11. 

viyana[sa]ya,  text  in  Bh.  4.  1.  66  as  confirmed  by  KT,  {who- 
ever) injured  (my  house).  Foy  suggests  viyana&iya,  wer  schadrU 
and  regards  the  form  as  pret.  3 sg.  caus.  to  *nas,  perish,  Av.  nas 
(Middle  Pers.  nasitan),  Skt.  nac. 

vivana  (Elam,  mimana;  Bab.  u-mi-ma-na-’),  m.  name  of  a Persian. 
Nom.  Sg.  vivana.  Acc.  Sg.  vivanam. 

visa,  adj.  all.  Acc.  Sg.  n.  visam.  vispa,  all  > vis(s)a  visa. 

visadahyu,  adj.  containing  .all  lands.  Acc.  sg.  m.  visadahyum, 
Xerx.  Pers.  a.  3.  duvarftm  visadahyum,  “the  hall  where  the  repre- 
sentatives of  the  several  provinces  brought  at  stated  times  their 
homage  to  the  Great  King.”  Bartholomae.  visa  -(-  dahyu  (q.  v.). 

vispazana,  adj.  containing  all  kinds  of  people.  Gen.  pi.  f.  vis- 
pazananam,  Dar.  NKa.  2.  vispa,  all,  Av.  vispa  (Middle  Pers.  visp), 
Skt.  vieva  -j-  zana,  man , Skt.  jana;  cf.  paruzana. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


127 


vistaspa  (Elam,  mistaspa;  Bab.  us-ta-as-pi;  Gl-.  'Yo-racr7r^s),  m.  Ilys- 
taspes,  father  of  Darius.  Norn.  sg.  vistaspa.  Acc.  sg.  vistaspam. 
Geu.  sg.  vistaspahya.  "vista  (Middle  Pers.  visaSak)  depressed  (vi  -f 
had,  sit,  settle  down / cf.  Skt.  vi  -f-  sad,  to  sink,  despond ) + aspa, 
horse  (q.  v.).  As  a poss.  compound  the  name  must  mean,  he  of 
spiritless  horses.  Note  New  Pers.  gustasp,  cf.  Horn,  NS,  27,  3. 
Written  always  v'st-  in  Bh. 

vispauzati  (Elam,  mispauzatis;  cf.  KT,  41),  f.  name  of  a Parthian 
town.  Nom.  sg.  vis[pa]uz[a]tis,  Bh.  2.  16. 


S 

saka  (Elam,  sakka;  Bab.  rnatu  gi-mi-ri;  Gr.  HkvOcll),  adj.  as  subs. 
Scythian , Scythia.  Nom.  sg.  saka.  Nom.  pi.  saka. 

saka,  f.  Scythia.  Acc.  sg.  sakam,  Bh.  5.  4.  abiy  sakam,  against 
Scythia , text  confirmed  by  KT. 

[san,  with  suffix  viy,  to  destroy,  the  reading  of  KT  in  Bh.  4.  11. 
71,  73,  77.  Better  read  vikan-,  see  s.  v.  kan,  and  Tolman,  Ydt. 
Stud.  1,  34.] 

s“ra,  an  uncertain  word  in  Dar.  NRa.  1.  52,  [ma]m  auramazda 
patuv  haca  sV  + + +.  The  meaning  is  shown  by  Elam,  musnika 
and  Bab.  bi-i-si,  evil.  Because  of  the  correspondence  of  these 
words  with  gasta  1.  58,  Foy  would  emend  haca  gasta,  from  evil. 
Jackson  (JAOS,  20,  55)  suggests  a comparison  with  Skt.  chala 
and  translates  (JAOS,  21,  111)  from  treachery  (haca  sara,  abl.). 

[sar,  asariyata,  reading  of  KT  in  Bh.  3.  1.  92.  See  akariya”ta  s.  V. 
kar,  and  Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1.  28.] 

sikayauvati  (Elam,  sikkiumatis;  Bab.  sik-kam-u-ba-at-ti-’),  f.  name 
of  a fortress  in  Media.  Nom.  sg.  sika[ya]uvatis,  Bh.  1.  13. 

suguda  (Elam,  suktas;  Bab.  su-ug-du;  Gr.  SoySmv?)),  adj.  as  subs. 
Soydiana.  Nom.  sg.  suguda.  YAv.  suySa. 

sku’  xa  (Elam,  iskunka),  m.  name  of  a Scythian  rebel.  Nom. 
sg.  sku"xa  (thus  read  for  sku"ka  of  ed.  in  Bh.  k.).  In  Bh.  5.  1.  27 


1 28 


AX  C IE  XT  PERSIAX  LEXICOX 


s[kuc]xa  is  clearly  to  be  supplied.  The  note  of  IvT  (later  cor- 
rected) that  the  name  cannot  be  restored  is  based  on  their  wrong 
transliteration  of  the  word  in  Bh.  k. ; cf.  Tolman,  Ydt.  Stud. 
1,  37. 

skudra,  m.  name  of  a district.  Nom.  sg.  skudra,  Dar.  NRa.  3. 

sta  (Pres,  ista-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  127,  showing  transfer  to 
thematic  conjugation  as  in  Av.  histaiti  and  Skt.  tisthati;  cf.  Tol- 
man, Old  Persian  Notes,  203),  to  stand , halt.  Mid.  Pret.  3 sg. 
aistata.  Av.  sta  (Turfan  MSS.  ested,  New  Pers.  estadan),  Skt.  stha. 

with  prefix  ava  (Pres,  staya-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  147), 

place , restore.  Pret.  1 sg.  avastayam.  Cf.  KZ,  39,  44. 

with  prefix  niy  (Pres,  staya-,  see  above),  enjoin , command. 

Pret.  1 Sg.  niyastayam.  3 Sg.  niyastaya. 

stana,  n.  place.  Acc.  sg.  stanam,  Xerx.  Van.  3.  Skt.  sthana, 
New  Pers.  -stan;  fr.  sta  (q.  v.). 

star  (Pres,  starav-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  141),  to  sin.  Injunc- 
tive 2 sg.  starava  (thematic).  Dar.  NBa.  6,  ma  starava,  sin  not;  so 
Bartholomae  (Altiran.  Wb.,  1597)  in  defense  of  the  old  reading 
against  WB's  stakava,  sei  nicht  it ng credit.  WB"  now  read  starava. 

sparda  (Elam,  isparta;  Bab.  sa-par-du),  m.  name  of  a region;  ac- 
cording to  Lassen,  Sardis;  cf.  Meyer,  IF,  1,  326-29;  Muller, 
WZKM,  2,  93;  Gray.  AJP,  21,  3.  Nom.  sg.  sparda. 


s 

sa,  abl.  sg.  pron.  end.  in  haca  avadasa,  therefrom . YAv. 

ho  (New  Pers.  (a)s).  See  s.  v.  avada. 

saiy,  dat.  sg.  pron.  end.  GAv.  hoi,  YAv.  he.  Bh.  2.  7, 

ava#a[saiy]  atfaham,  thus  I said  to  him , et  passim,  uta  naham  uta 
gausa  uta  harbanam  frajanam,  Bh.  3.  13,  I cut  off  both  his  nose  and 
his  ears  and  his  tongue. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


1 l!lf 


sakauri[m],  word  of  doubtful  meaning  in  Bh.  4.  13,  naiy  sakau- 
ri[m]  + + + tunuvatam  (KT;  manuvatam,  Jackson)  zura  akimavam.  The 
Bab.  renders  lik-tu  u mus-ki-nu.  It  seems  to  me  possible  that  the 
Bab.  lik-tu  (=  sakaurim)  and  mus-ki-nu  (=  + + t"nuuvatama)  from  their 
derivation  may  refer  to  the  two  lowest  classes  of  the  kingdom, 
lik-tu,  slave , lit.  one  received  (against  Yindling,  Delitzsch,  Muss- 
Arnolt)  and  mus-ki-nu,  generally  rendered  pauper;  cf.  Muss- 
Arnolt,  Assyrian  Dictionary,  604,  but  note  Johns:  “I  think  it 
very  probable  that  the  class  included  the  subject  race,  not  prop- 
ertyless, but  of  lower  standing.  It  may  have  included  freed 
slaves  and  foreign  residents.”  Weissbach  (ZDGM,  61,  729)  in- 
terprets derm.  Findling;  Hoffmann-Ivutschke  (Phil.  Nov.  3,  108) 
Knecht , TToriger , Gefolge.  Bang  suggests  that  sakaurim  is  a Se- 
mitic loan  word  *sakor!m,  einem  Verleumder.  It  is  doubtful 
whether  NT’s  translation  of  Bab.  version  to  the  prisoner  (?)  and 
freed  man  is  correct.  See  s.  v.  + + + t"nuuvatama  and  m*nuuvatama 
(cf.  Turfan  MSS.  manbed).  The  reading  is  attested  by  the 
recent  collations  of  the  text  and  the  various  attempted  emenda- 
tions (KZ,  35,  45;  ibid.  37,  557;  IF,  12,  130)  are  impossible. 


sam,  gen.  pi.  pron.  end.,  a re-formation  to  dat.  sg.  saiy 
and  abl.  sg.  sa  after  analogy  of  noun-stems,  Bartholomae, 
Grundr.  251,  n.  Bh.  3.  10,  avaflasam  atfaha,  thus  he  said  to  them. 
Bh.  2.  4.  hyasam  maftsta  aha,  who  was  chief  of  them.  Bh.  5.  1.  15, 
utafsjam  auramazda  + + + + a + + + +. 

sim,  acc.  sg.  pron.  end.  YAv.  him,  Skt.  sim.  Bh.  1.  13, 

xsa^'amsim  adam  adlnam,  I took  the  royal  power  from.  him,.  Bh.  1. 
14,  adamsim  ga#ava  avastayam,  I restored  it  (i.  e. , the  kingdom.)  to  its 
place.  As  acc.  pi.  n.  Bh.  4.  1.  6,  adamsim  (text  confirmed  by  KT 
for  adamsam  of  ed.)  ajanam,  I waged  these  (i.  e.  battles ),  wrongly 
translated  by  KT,  I overthrew  nine  kings;  cf.  Tolman,  Ydt. 
Stud.  1,  28. 

siyati,  f.  well  being.  Nom.  sg.  siyatis,  Dar.  Pers.  e.  3.  Acc. 
sg.  siyatim  (written  sayatam  in  Art.  Pers.  a,  b,  1;  Foy,  KZ,  35. 
58  after  Marquart,  ZDMG,  49,  671,  reads  saytam).  YAv.  sati; 
fr.  *siya,  Av.  sya,  rejoice  (Turfan  MSS.  sad,  New  Pers.  sad).  Cf. 
Casartelli,  La  Religion,  41;  Stave,  Einfluss  des  Parsismus,  6-1; 
9 


130 


AN  C IE  XT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


Jackson  (JAOS,  21,  166)  compares  Isaiah,  45,  7:  “lam  JHVH, 
and  there  is  none  else — who  forms  light  and  creates  darkness, 
who  makes  welfare  and  creates  calamity.” 

siyu  (Pres,  siyava-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  123),  to  set  forth,  go. 
Pret.  1 Sg.  asiyavam.  3 Sg.  asiyava.  3 pl.asiyava”.  GAv.  syu. 
lAv.  su  (New  Pers.  savaS,  Oss.  cairn,  Kurd,  clan),  Skt.  cyu. 

sis,  acc.  pi.  pron.  end.  \ Av.  his.  Bh.  3.  8,  avadasis 
uzmayapatiy  akunavam,  there  I crucified  them.  Cf.  Delbrtick,  Vgl. 
Syntax,  3,  47. 


zazana  (Elam,  zazzan;  Bab.  za-za-an-nu),  m.  name  of  a Babylonian 
town.  Nom.  Sg.  zazana,  Bh.  1.  19. 

zurakara,  adj.  doing  wrong.  Nom.  sg.  m.  zurakara,  Bh.  4.  13. 
naiy  zurakara  aham,  I was  not  an  evil-doer  (text  confirmed  by  Jack- 
son  and  KT).  The  word  is  also  to  be  read  in  Bh.  4.  1.  68,  hyava 
[zu]rakara  (text  confirmed  by  KT),  thus  superseding  the  various 
attempts  at  emendation  (stavaka,  Justi;  starta,  Bartholomae;  atarta, 
WB1)  and  confirming  Muller’s  conjecture  in  WZKM,  1,  134;  cf. 
Tolman,  Vdt.  Stud.  1,  33.  zurah  -f-  *kara,  fr.  kar  (q.  v.). 

zurah,  n.  wrong,  deceit.  Acc.  sg.  zura  (text  confirmed  by 
Jackson  and  KT).  YAv.  zurah-  (New  Pers.  zur). 

+ + + + y (Elam,  zuzza;  Bab.  zu-u-zu),  name  of  a town  in  Bh.  2. 
1.  33.  “The  name  was  composed  of  5,  possibly  6,  signs,  of 
which  only  the  last  is  visible.”  IvT. 

zra"ka  (Elam,  [zirrajnkas;  Bab.  za-ra-an-ga-’;  Gr.  Npayyiainj),  m. 
Dra/ngiana.  Nom.  sg.  zranka. 


H 

haina,  f.  army,  hostile  host,  array  of  evil.  Nom.  sg.  haina, 
Dar.  Pers.  d.  3.  Abl.  sg.  (with  haca)  hainaya,  Dar.  Pers.  d.  3. 
YAv.  haena  (IMiddle  Pers.  hen),  Skt.  sena;  fr.  *hi,  hind,  Av.  hi 
(New  Pers.  gusayaS,  he  uncovered),  Skt.  si. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


m 


hauv,  demon,  pron.  nom.  sg.  m.  f.  (I.  E.  *so  + u,  Gr.  ov-tos), 
1 )that.  In  Bh.  1.  1.  29  written  hauv“ma  (cf.  KT,  6).  Probably  the 
-am,  as  Bartholomae  suggests  (WZKM,  22,  65),  is  to  be  compared 
with  the  suffix  in  adam,  tuvam,  iyam,  but  I believe  it  comes  here 
only  through  analogy;  cf.  Prakrit  tumam,  thou , beside  tum.  Bh. 
3.  10,  hauv  kara  asiyava,  that  army  set  forth,  et  passim.  2 )that  one, 
he,  it.  Bh.  1.  12,  hauv  ayasata,  he  (i.  e.  Gaumata)  seized  ( the  lands) 
as  his  OXvn.  Bh.  3.  3,  hauvmaiy  hami0riya  (sic;  cf.  KT,  44)  abava, 
it  (i.  e.,  the  land  of  Margiana)  became  rebellious  to  me.  With 
encl.  saiy  and  ciy  written  hausaiy,  hauciy.  YAv.  hau,  m.  f.  (as  if  an 
extension  of  the  fern.  I.  E.  sa  + u,  Gr.  av-rr]),  Skt.  a-sau,  m.  f. 
Note  Turf  an  MSS.  ho. 

haumavarka  (Elam,  umumarka;  Bab.  umurga),  adj.  designating  a 
part  of  the  Scythians  in  Dar.  NRa.  3.  If  the  reading  be  cor- 
rect, the  word  would  seem  to  apply  to  a custom  in  regard  to  the 
use  of  leaves  *varka,  YAv.  varoka  for  the  drink  of  the  *hauma, 
YAv.  haoma,  Skt.  soma;  cf.  Hillebrandt,  Ved.  Myth.  1,  102;  Foy, 
KZ,  35,  51.  Should  the  last  member  of  the  compound  be  read 
varga  (after  the  Bab.),  the  interpretation  still  remains  doubtful. 
Foy  suggests,  die  Hawnahemmenden  (cf.  Skt.  vrj)  or  die  Ilauma- 
hereitenden  (cf.  Skt.  vrjana).  Nom.  pi.  haumavar[ka].  Cf.  Hdt. 
7.  64,  eovra?  %kvvi is  ’A/xupyiovs. 


haxamanis  (Elam,  akkamannis;  Bab.  a-ha-ma-ni-is-’;  Gl'.  ’A^ai/Av^s), 
m.  Achaemenes ; founder  of  the  Achaemenidan  dynasty.  Nom. 
Sg.  haxamanis,  Bh.  1.  2;  Bh.  a.  2.  *haxa  (nom.  sg.  in  comp.), 
friend,  YAv.  haxi,  Skt.  sakhi  -f-  x'manis,  Av.  manah;  fr.  l)man 
(q.  v.).  Cf.  Bartholomae,  Zum  Altiran.  Wb.,  39.  Note  Turfan 
MSS.  has&-gerd. 

haxamanisiya  (Elam,  akkamannisiya;  Bab.  a-ha-ma-ni-is-’;  Gr. 
’A^ai /icviSijs),  adj.  of  the  race  of  Achaemenes,  Achaemenidan. 
Nom.  sg.  haxamanisiya  (written  haxamanisiya  in  Xei'X.  Pers.  a.  2). 
Nom.  pi.  haxamanisiya.  For  the  Achaemenidan  dynasty  cf.  Tol- 
man  and  Stevenson,  Hdt.  and  Empires  of  East,  73  ff. ; Meyer, 
Gesch.  des  Altert.  1.  613;  PiAsek,  Forsch.  z.  Gesch.  d.  Altert. 
3,  24,  vs.  the  extreme  view  of  Winckler,  Or.  Lift.  Ztg.,  1898, 
43;  Noldeke,  Aufsatze  z.  pers.  Gesch.  15;  Justi,  Grundr.  d.  iran. 
Philol.  2,  416;  Weissbach,  Assyriol.  Bibl.  9.  86.  haxamanis 
(q.  v.)  + suffix  ya. 


AXCIEXT  PE  RSI  AX  LEXICOX 


132 

hagmatana  (Elam,  akmatana;  Bab.  a-ga-ma-ta-nu;  Gr.  'Ex^a-rai/a, 
’Ay/ldram),  m.  Ecbatana.  Loc.  Sg.  hagmatanaiy.  New  Pei’S,  ham- 
aSan,  ef.  Hubschmann,  Lautl.  143. 

haca,  prep,  with  abl.  from.  Bh.  2.  12.  haca  babiraus,  from  Bab- 
ylon. Bh.  1.  11,  haca  avadasa,  from  there.  With  tarsa-,  Bh.  1.  13, 
karasim  haca  darsma"  atarsa,  the  people  feared  his  tyranny.  GAv. 
haca,  YAv.  haca  (Phi.  aj,  Tui’fan  MSS.  ’aj,  New  Pel’s,  az,  Kurd,  az), 
Skt.  saca. 

hanj  (Pres.  hanja-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  123),  to  hale  to  prison 
or  inflict  some  form  of  penalty.  Skt.  sanj;  cf.  Foy,  KZ.  37,  547. 

with  prefix  fra;  Pret.  1 sg.  frahanjam,  Bh.  2.  13. 

had,  to  sit.  YAv.  had  (Tui’fan  MSS.  nisiyand,  New  Pers.  ni- 
sastan),  Skt.  sad. 

with  prefix  niy  (cans,  nisadaya-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  151), 

pilace  down , establish.  Pret.  1 sg.  niyasadayam,  Dar.  NRa.  4. 

hada,  prep,  with  insti’.  with.  GAv.  hada,  YAv.  haSa  (Turfan 
MSS.  ’ad,  Oss.  ad),  Skt.  saha. 

hadaxaya,  an  uncertain  word  in  Seal  Inscr.  b,  hadaxaya  + + + + + 
^ada^a. 

hadis,  n.  dwelling  pilace.  Acc.  sg.  hadis,  Xerx.  Sus. ; Xerx. 
Pers.  cb.  da. ; Art.  Sus.  Cf . had. 

ha"duga,  f.  proclamation , record.  Acc.  sg.  handugam,  Bh.  4. 

10,  11. 

hapariya-  (Bartholomae's  conjecture,  Studien,  2,  67  in  Bh.  1. 
1.  23;  cf.  Skt.  saparyati),  to  reverence,  respect.  Pret.  3 pi.  apari- 
yayaQ  (for  ahapariya-),  see  s.  V.  data.  Cf.  Justi,  IF,  17,  Anz.  106; 
Tolmau,  Ydt.  Stud.  1,  9.  KT  still  read  apariyaya;  W B" 
upariyaya(?). 

ham,  verbal  prefix,  together,  e.  g. , hangmata,  assembled  together. 
GAv.  ham,  YAv.  ham  (Middle  Pers.  ham),  Skt.  sam. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


1 


hama,  adj.  same , one  and  the  same / cf.  Weissbach,  ZDMG, 
61,  724.  Gen.  sg.  f.  hamahyaya  (a  re-formation  of  gen.  of  a-  stem 
on  masc.  gen.  suffix;  cf.  ahyaya).  See  s.  V.  0ard.  Av.  hama  (Middle 
Pers. ; New  Pers.  ham),  Skt.  sama.  For  + + + + + + ara  hama  am ax- 
amata  of  KT  in  Bli.  4.  1.  92,  Weissbach  (ZDMG,  61,  730)  emends, 
kara  hama  amaxahya’Ha,  die  Leute  allzumal  freuten  sick"  cf.  Elam, 
tassutum-pe  sapis. 

hamatar,  adj.  having  a common  mother.  Nom.  sg.  m.  hamata, 
Bh.  1.  10.  ham  (ha)  -f-  *matar,  Av.  matar  (New  Pei’S,  madar,  Gil. 
maar),  Skt.  matr;  or  by  haplography,  as  Bartholomae  suggests, 
for  hama  -f-  matar. 

hamapitar,  adj.  having  Oj  common  father/',  Nom.  sg.  m.  hama- 
pita,  Bh.  1.  10.  hama,  same  -f  pitar  (q.  V.). 

hamara,  m.  foe , enemy.  Acc.  sg.  hamaram,  Dar.  NRa.  4.  [hacja 
parsa  hamaram  patiyajata,  far  from  Persia  he  fought  his  foe:  so 
Bartholomae.  ham  + *ara,  fr.  ar  (q.  v.). 

hamarana,  n.  battle,  conflict.  Nom.  acc.  sg.  hamaranam.  Acc. 
pi.  hamarana.  YAv.  hamarana,  Skt.  samarana;  ham  -p  "arana,  fr.  ar 
(q.  V.). 

hami^’iya,  adj.  rebellious.  Nom.  sg.  m.  hami0riya.  Nom.  sg. 
f.  hami0riya,  thus  read  in  Bh.  3.  1.  11  (text  confirmed  by  KT, 
which  removes  hasitiya  from  the  Persian  vocabulary;  cf.  Tolman, 
Vdt.  Stud.  1,  23).  Acc.  sg.  m.  hami0riyam.  Nom.  dual.  m.  (Bar- 
tholomae), hami^'iya,  Bh.  2.  16.  Nom.  pi.  m.  f.  hami0riya.  Acc. 
pi.  f.  [hami0riy]a,  Bh.  4.  4.  Instl’.  pi.  m.  hami^'iyaibis,  Bh.  3.  1. 
According  to  J usti,  IF,  18,  Anz.  36,  ha  -j-  mi 9,  jjaarweise  vev- 
binden. 

[har  (Pres,  hara-,  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  123),  to  flee.  Oppert’s 
supplement  [aharatja,  pret.  3 sg.  in  Bh.  1.  95.  See  s.  v.  l)ah.] 

haraiva  (Elam,  ariya;  Bab.  a-ri-e-mu),  m.  Aria.  Nom.  sg.  haraiva. 
YAv.  haroiva. 

harauvati  (Elam,  arraumatis;  Bab.  a-ru-ha-at-ti;  Gr.  ’ Apa^ojcna),  f. 
Arachosia.  Nom.  Sg.  harauvatis.  Acc.  Sg.  harauvatim.  Loc.  Sg. 
harauvatiya.  Skt.  sarasvatl,  rich  in  waters / *harah,  water,  fr.  *har, 
flow,  Skt.  sj  + suffix  vant. 


ANCIENT  PERSIAN  LEXICON 


134 

haruva,  adj.  whole.  Noin.  sg.  m.  haruva.  YAv.  haurva  (Tur- 
fan  MSS  harv,  New  Pers.  har),  Skt.  sarva. 

h ir^bana,  in.  tongue.  Acc.  sg.  harbanam,  Bh.  2,  13.  adamsai[y] 
uta  naham  uta  gausa  uta  harbanam  frajanam,  1 cut  off  both  Ids  nose  and 
his  ears  and  his  tongue.  KT  record:  “Of  the  signs  r,  b,  and  n 
traces  are  preserved  upon  the  rock;  the  remaining  signs  are 
clear.”  Weissbach  (ZDMG,  61,  726)  suggests  uzbana,  i.  e.  hu-zbana. 
Note  New  Pers.  zaban,  z"ban;  cf.  Horn,  NS,  34,  5. 

haldita  (Elam,  altita)  m.  name  of  father  of  Arkha.  Gen.  sg. 
halditahya  (sic;  cf.  Bartholomae,  Grundr.  412,  n.),  Bh.  3.  13. 

hasiya,  adj.  true.  Acc.  sg.  n.  hasiyam,  Bh.  4.  7.  Av.  hai0ya, 
Skt.  satya;  fr.  *hat  (weak  stem  to  *hant,  pres.  act.  part,  to  2)ah)  -f 
suffix  ya. 

hi"du,  111.  India.  Nom.  Sg.  hi”du§.  YAv.  hindu,  Skt.  sindhu,  the 

land  on  the  Indus. 

hya  (I.  E.  *sio),  rel.  pron.  (originally  demon.),  who.  Nom.  sg. 
m.  hya.  KT’s  cuneiform  text  and  transliteration  fail  to  record 
hya  after  martiya  in  Bh.  4.  1.  65,  where  I have  restored  it  as  in 
ed.,  regarding  its  omission  as  simply  a blunder  in  copying. 
Noill.  Sg.  f.  hya.  Cf.  tya.  Skt.  sya. 

[hya,  regard  by  Bartholomae  as  abl.  sg.,  whence , hence  in  Dar. 
Pers.  e.  3,  hya  duvais[ta]m  siyatis,  hence  for  long  time , etc.  It  is 
more  probably  the  nom.  sg.  f. ; cf.  Foy,  KZ,  37,  561.] 

hyaparam,  adv.  thereafter , thereupon.  Bh.  3.  11,  patiy  hyapa- 
ram.  hya  (abl.  sg.  n.)  4-  *para,  later,  beyond.  Cf.  Bartholomae, 
Altiran.  Wb.,  1844.  Skt.  para. 


DATE  DUE 


